Documents
Resources
Learning Center
Upload
Plans & pricing Sign in
Sign Out

USNS HENSON _TAGS – 63_

VIEWS: 2 PAGES: 280

									                ∰ 3PSC




USNS Bruce C. Heezen (T-AGS 64)
   DRYDOCK OVERHAUL SPECIFICATION
             January 7 – March 7, 2010
                         (PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS)
   LENGTH:                                        329 Feet
   LENGTH (LBP):                                  310 Feet
   BREADTH:                                       58 Feet
   DRAFT:     At Dome                             23 Feet 6 inches
   DISPLACEMENT:        FULL LOAD                 5137 TONS
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




                           Table of contents
Section 1: Terms and Conditions .............................................. 5

 STATEMENT OF GENERAL CONDITIONS............................................. 6
   A. INTENT ................................................................ 6
   B. SCOPE ................................................................. 6
   C. ADMINISTRATIVE ........................................................ 7
   D. GENERAL CONDITIONS AND DEFINITIONS .................................... 7
   E. MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE ........................................ 11
   F. MEETINGS ............................................................. 12
   G. 3PSC INSPECTION AND CONTRACTORS INSPECTION RECORDS ................... 13
   H. DELIVERY, CARE, AND REDELIVERY OF VESSEL ............................. 15
   I. FIT-UP AND WELDING ................................................... 17
   J. CHANGE ORDERS ........................................................ 18
   K. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES – REDELIVERY & DOCKING ............................ 18
   L. PERMISSIBLE DELAYS ................................................... 19
   M. WARRANTY ............................................................. 19
   N. FINAL INVOICE PREPARATION ............................................ 19
   O. PAYMENT .............................................................. 20
   P. INDEMNIFICATION ...................................................... 21
   Q. FAR FLOWDOWN CLAUSES ................................................. 22
   R. WAIVER OF LIEN ....................................................... 23
   S. DISPUTES ............................................................. 23
   T. CLAIMS ............................................................... 25
   T. MISCELLANEOUS ........................................................ 26

 000 SERIES   ITEMS .......................................................... 29
   ITEM NO.   001 GENERAL SERVICES AND REQUIREMENTS .......................... 30
    7.1.1      Tugs, Pilots, Linehandlers and Berthing ...................... 30
    7.1.2      Electrical Shore Power ....................................... 30
    7.1.3      Fresh and Salt water: ........................................ 31
    7.1.4      Debris and Garbage Removal ................................... 31
    7.1.5      Deck Protection and Cleaning ................................. 32
    7.1.6      Toilet Facilities ............................................ 32
    7.1.7      Oily Waste/Waste oil Removal ................................. 32
    7.1.8      Sewage ....................................................... 32
    7.1.9      Gangway & Lighting ........................................... 33
    7.1.10     Crane and Transportation Service ............................. 33
   ITEM NO.   002 FURNISH PORT ENGINEER’S OFFICE & PARKING SPACES ............ 34
   ITEM NO.   003 SHIPBOARD PHONE SERVICES ................................... 37
   ITEM NO.   004 PROVIDE OFFICE SPACE FOR SPONSOR PERSONNEL ................. 38
   ITEM NO.   005 STORAGE OF REFRIGERATED & FROZEN STORES & CLEANING OF LOCKERS40
   ITEM NO.   006 RECEIPT, CARE, HANDLING & SHIPMENT OF GFM .................. 42
   ITEM NO.   007 CONTAMINATION PREVENTION DURING SHIPYARD PERIOD ............ 46
   ITEM NO.   007 CONTAMINATION PREVENTION DURING SHIPYARD PERIOD ............ 46
   ITEM NO.   008 SHIPBOARD ACCESS & SECURITY (CATEGORY B) ................... 48
   ITEM NO.   009 FIRE PROTECTION, GAS FREE CERTIFICATION & SHIP’S SAFETY .... 50
   ITEM NO.   010 PREPARATION OF WEIGHT & MOMENT REPORT ...................... 53
   ITEM NO.   011 DOCK TRIAL ................................................. 55
   ITEM NO.   012 SEA TRIAL .................................................. 56
   ITEM NO.   013 HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (CATEGORY B) ....... 58

 100 SERIES ITEMS - HULL.................................................... 61


3PSC                                                             Page 2 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



   ITEM NO. 101 CLEAN, GAS FREE, AND PRESSURE TEST VARIOUS TANKS, VOIDS AND
       SPACES (ABS) ......................................................... 62
   ITEM NO. 102 VARIOUS HULL GAUGINGS (ABS) – 2ND SPECIAL SURVEY............ 67
   ITEM NO. 103 CONVERT FUEL OIL TANKS TO LUBE OIL STORAGE TANKS ........... 68
   ITEM NO. 104 PREPARE, PRIME, AND PAINT SEWAGE HOLDING TANK .............. 72
   ITEM NO. 105 PREPARE, PRIME AND PAINT SIDESHELL ......................... 77
   ITEM NO. 106 PREPARE, PRIME AND PAINT THE TRANSDUCER WELL DECK AND SUPPORT
       STRUCTURES ........................................................... 82
   ITEM NO. 107 PREPARE, PRIME AND PAINT THE FORWARD PUMP ROOM AND RENEW DECK
       GRATING .............................................................. 86
   ITEM NO. 108 PREPARE, PRIME AND PAINT THE AFT SECTION OF MAIN HOUSE AND
       RENEW STAGING BAY DOOR GASKET ........................................ 91
   ITEM NO. 109    INSTALL RAW WATER OVERBOARD DOWNSPOUT..................... 96
   ITEM NO. 110 SHOP OVERHAUL OF VARIOUS PORT LIGHTS ....................... 97
   ITEM NO. 111 MISCELLANEOUS EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR DECK REPAIRS .......... 100

 200 SERIES ITEMS    MAIN PROPULSION MACHINERY ........................... 103
   ITEM NO. 201 DISASSEMBLE AND CLEAN IN PLACE GENERATORS 1 – 4 ........... 104
   ITEM NO. 202 REPLACE MAIN MOTOR ARMATURES .............................. 106

 300 SERIES ITEMS    ELECTRICAL........................................... 110
   ITEM NO. 301 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM - INSPECT & REPAIR ............ 111
   ITEM NO. 302 MODIFY HEIGHT OF INTERPHASE COILS ......................... 113

 400 SERIES – COMMS & NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT ................................. 116
   ITEM NO. 401 CLEANING OF C-BAND RADOME ................................. 117

 500 SERIES AUXILIARY AND MACHINERY REPAIRS ................................ 118
   ITEM NO. 501 CLEANING OF HEAT EXCHANGERS ............................... 119
   ITEM NO. 502 RECONDITION ANCHOR WINDLASS ............................... 121
   ITEM NO. 503 ANNUAL SERVICING OF LIFERAFTS ............................. 123
   ITEM NO. 504 WEIGHT TESTS ON MISSION RELATED DECK EQUIPMENT (MRDE) ..... 125
   ITEM NO. 505 REPAIR THE RHIB BOAT INFLATABLE COLLAR (HZV09051) ......... 127
   ITEM NO. 506 ASW COOLING ISOLATION VALVE RENEWALS & REPAIRS ............ 128
   ITEM NO. 507 HSL ENGINE SERVICING, HULL PAINTING AND WAXING ............ 130
   ITEM NO. 508   ALLIED CRANE SERVICING AND CARGO GEAR TESTING ........... 135
   ITEM NO. 509 VARIOUS LABOR REQUIREMENTS IN SUPPORT OF TECHNICAL SERVICE
       REPRESENTATIVES ..................................................... 139
   ITEM NO. 510 SUPPLEMENTAL LABOR ........................................ 142
   ITEM NO. 511 CALIBRATE SPECIAL TOOLS, GAUGES AND TEST EQUIPMENT (CATEGORY B)144

 600 SERIES   ITEMS     HABITABILITY.........................................        157
   ITEM NO.   601 STATEROOM CARPET CLEANING AND CARPET RENEWAL ..............        158
   ITEM NO.   602 CLEAN AND FLUSH VACUUM SEWAGE SYSTEM ......................        160
   ITEM NO.   603   CLEAN GRAY WATER DRAIN PIPING ...........................        163

 700 SERIES   ITEMS     SPONSOR EQUIPMENT – CATEGORY B .......................       164
   ITEM NO.   701 MAIN LAB MODIFICATIONS ....................................        165
   ITEM NO.   702 LOW DENSITY STOREROOM MODIFICATIONS .......................        169
   ITEM NO.   703   TRANSDUCER POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION ........       172
   ITEM NO.   704   MBSS TARGET FABRICATION ..................................       174
   ITEM NO.   705 SSSV & BIOLITE SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS .......................        175
   ITEM NO.   706 MOVING VESSEL PROFILER SYSTEM INSTALLATION ................        176
   ITEM NO.   707 HSL MODIFICATIONS .........................................        178
   ITEM NO.   708 MAIN MAST SAFETY RAIL .....................................        180
   ITEM NO.   709 NAVO GENERAL LABOR AND ASSISTANCE .........................        182



3PSC                                                              Page 3 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



 800 SERIES   ITEMS .........................................................        183
   ITEM NO.   801 AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS REPAIRS ........        184
   ITEM NO.   802 OVERHAUL ENGINE ROOM SUPPLY FANS & PAINT INTAKE PLENUM ....        186
   ITEM NO.   803 REFURBISH VARIOUS FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLIES ................        192
   ITEM NO.   804 VENT DUCT RENEWAL (HZV08116) ..............................        195
   ITEM NO.   805   OVERHAUL SUPPLY, DISCHARGE, EDG AND NATURAL AIR DAMPERS ..       196
   ITEM NO.   806 CLEAN ALL HVAC DUCT WORK, AIR HANDLERS, & FAN ROOMS .......        199
   ITEM NO.   807 CLEAN GALLEY EXHAUST SYSTEM ...............................        203
   ITEM NO.   808 CLEAN CLOTHES DRYER EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................        205
   ITEM NO.   809 VARIOUS INSULATION/LAGGING RENEWALS .......................        207

 900 SERIES ITEMS       HULL ............................................... 209
   ITEM NO. 901 DOCKING AND UNDOCKING VESSEL ............................... 210
   ITEM NO. 902 UNDERWATER HULL PAINTING .................................. 222
   ITEM NO. 903 STERN THRUSTER UPPER AND LOWER GEAR BOX SERVICE (ABS) ..... 229
   ITEM NO. 904 RENEW BOWTHRUSTER SHAFT SEALS & INSPECT LOWER GEARBOX ..... 237
   ITEM NO. 905 SERVICE SPURS LINECUTTERS ................................. 240
   ITEM NO. 906 SEAWATER PIPING CLEANING, STRAINER REFURBISHMENT AND OVERHAUL
       OF ISOLATION VALVES (HZV09045) ...................................... 242
   ITEM NO. 907 RANGE, MEASURE, PAINT ANCHORS & CHAINS .................... 245
   ITEM NO. 908 OVERHAUL SEA VALVES ........................................ 248
   ITEM NO. 909 RENEW ZINC ANODE PLATES ................................... 251
   ITEM NO. 910 CLEAN AND POLISH PROPELLERS ................................ 253
   ITEM NO. 911 INSPECT AND CLEAN RETRACTABLE TRANSDUCERS ................. 254
   ITEM NO. 912 BUBBLE FENCE REMOVAL ...................................... 256
   ITEM NO. 913 BILGE KEEL REMOVAL ........................................ 257

 950 SERIES   ITEMS      NAVO DRYDOCK ITEMS – CATEGORY B ....................        258
   ITEM NO.   951 GONDOLA INSTALLATION ......................................        259
   ITEM NO.   952 TRANSDUCER POD MODIFICATIONS ..............................        263
   ITEM NO.   953 TRANSDUCER CABLE PIPE INSTALLATION ........................        266
   ITEM NO.   954 EM1002 TRANSDUCER ARRAY SYSTEM REMOVAL ....................        268
   ITEM NO.   955 EM121A TRANSDUCER ARRAY SYSTEM REMOVAL ....................        270
   ITEM NO.   956 TRANSDUCER ARRAY SYSTEM INSTALLATION ......................        274
   ITEM NO.   957 SENSOR SURVEY SUPPORT .....................................        277
   ITEM NO.   958 GAPS SEACHEST MODIFICATION ................................        279




3PSC                                                              Page 4 of 280
                       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




       Section 1: Terms and Conditions




3PSC                                           Page 5 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




STATEMENT OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.     INTENT

       3PSC intends that the Contractor shall perform all work and provide all
       plant facilities, labor, supervision, services, equipment and materials
       and other such resources required to modify or repair the ship as
       specified in the individual work items at the Contractor's own risk and
       expense.


B.     SCOPE

       1.   The specification, accompanying drawings, references, specified
            technical manuals, and documents define the scope of the work to
            be performed.    When contract guidance plans are provided, the
            contractor shall prepare “working and/or as installed drawings.”
            Any variation from guidance plan shall be approved by the 3PSC
            Representative and so documented by the contractor prior to the
            commencement of work.   Working drawings must be approved by the
            3PSC Rep prior to commencement of any work.     Anything shown on
            the drawings and in the Technical Manuals but not described in
            the specification, or described in specification but not shown on
            the drawings or in the mechanical Manuals, shall be of like
            effect as if shown or described on or in both.     In the case of
            conflict between the drawings and the specification, the
            specification shall govern.    Any omission from the drawings or
            from the specification of details of work that are customarily
            performed will not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to
            perform such details of work and shall be included in the cost of
            the item.

       2.   Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall provide all
            plant facilities, labor, supervision, services, equipment and
            materials, and other such resources required to modify or repair
            the ship as specified in the individual work items and in
            accordance with the general technical requirements at the
            contractor’s own risk and expense.




3PSC                                                            Page 6 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




C.     ADMINISTRATIVE

1.     The following terms have meanings as shown and may be found throughout
             these specifications:

       Vessel, The vessel, Ship, The     Vessel/ship named in these
       Ship                              Specifications
       3PSC                              The vessel's Ship Manager /
                                         Operator
       Navoceano (NAVO)                  The Vessel’s Sponsor/Charterer
       Military Sealift Command          The Vessel's Owner
       (MSC) for and on behalf of
       the Government of the United
       States of America
       3PSC Representative               The 3PSC Port Engineer or, for
                                         inspection purposes only, his
                                         designated Representative
       3PSC Port Engineer, or Port       The Operator’s Representative in
       Engineer                          the field
       MSC Port Engineer                 The Owner’s Representative
       3PSC Contract Representative      The 3PSC Manager who is the
                                         signatory on this contract
       Contractor                        The Shipyard of Ship Repair
                                         Facility holding the prime
                                         contract for contractor work
                                         described in this specification
       Sub-Contractor                    Contractor sub-contracted to the
                                         shipyard holding the prime
                                         contract
       The ABS Surveyor                  Surveyor to the American Bureau
                                         of Shipping, assigned to the
                                         vessel
       The USCG Inspector                Inspector from the local U.S.
                                         Coast Guard Marine Safety Office,
                                         assigned to the vessel
       Regulatory Bodies                 The American Bureau of Shipping,
                                         United States Coast Guard, U.S.
                                         Public Health Service, and their
                                         representatives in the field


D.     GENERAL CONDITIONS AND DEFINITIONS

       The following conditions and definitions are applicable to all items of
       this Specification and are intended to outline the level of
       completeness, quality of workmanship and practice that are deemed the
       minimum acceptable level.




3PSC                                                            Page 7 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       1.     All workmanship and materials used in the repair or alteration of
              the above Vessel shall be of highest quality in all respects and
              shall conform to the marine practices and requirements of any
              regulatory body with jurisdiction over the vessel, to the
              Contract Plans and Specification, and to the applicable Item.

       2.     The  words   “Operator  Furnished,”   “GFE,”  “GFM,”  "Government
              furnished" and "Owner furnished" have the same meaning and may be
              used interchangeably.

       3.     The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment and items
              indicated by each Item except where specifically indicated that
              such equipment is Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) or
              Operator Furnished Equipment (OFE).

       4.     The Contractor shall take delivery of all GFE/OFE, whether
              stored on board or delivered to the Contractor's plant, and
              shall store, preserve, and protect it in accordance with
              manufacturer's recommendations.

       5.     The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials
              to assemble, test and prepare GFE/OFE for installation.

       6.     The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to install
              and connect all GFE/OFE so as to make the installation complete
              except as otherwise stated.   This action shall include, but not
              be limited to, providing foundations, securement, stacking clips,
              brackets, piping and wiring as well as services such as
              electricity, water, air and painting.

       7.     Pursuant to the Government Furnished Property clause referenced
              in Attachment A, Contractor shall promptly notify 3PSC if GFE/OFE
              is delivered with parts missing or in need of repair.      In such
              case the 3PSC Representative may direct, and the Contractor shall
              provide, necessary parts and repairs on a reimbursable basis.

       8.     The words "install," "extend" and "modify" shall be construed to
              mean that the Contractor shall provide the piece of equipment to
              be installed, and, in addition, provide the materials and labor
              to install, connect, test, remove and reinstall interferences and
              effect a finished, fully operational installation.           When
              "install" is used with reference to GFE/OFE, all conditions of
              the previous definition except the requirement to provide the
              piece of equipment are applicable.

       9.     The word "replace" shall be construed to mean that the Contractor
              shall provide the piece of equipment to be installed, and, in
              addition, provide the materials and labor to install, connect,
              test, remove and reinstall interferences and effect a finished,
              fully operational installation.    When "install" is used with
              reference to GFE/OFE, all conditions of the previous definition
              except the requirement to provide the piece of equipment are
              applicable.

       10..   The word "ripout" or the words "ripped out" shall be construed to
              mean that the Contractor shall provide all labor and material to
              remove the unit, equipment, materials, or system in its entirety.


3PSC                                                              Page 8 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             Part of the removal process is to blank openings, restore
             insulation and paint, and remove brackets, hangers, foundations,
             etc.

       11.   The terms “remove” and “removed” mean that the contractor shall
             provide all labor, materials and services to remove the unit,
             equipment, materials or system in its entirety. The word
             “reinstall” means that the contractor shall provide all labor,
             services and incidental material such as fasteners, gaskets,
             welding rods, etc. to replace anything removed to “as original”
             configuration.

       12.   The phrase "temporary removal" or "temporarily removed" shall be
             construed to mean that the Contractor shall provide all labor and
             material to remove the unit, piece of equipment, or system and to
             install the same unit, piece of equipment, or system either in
             the same location or elsewhere on the ship as described in the
             Specification Items.

       13.   The word “relocate” means that the contractor shall provide all
             labor and materials to remove the unit, piece of equipment, or
             system and to reinstall   the same unit, piece of equipment, or
             system; including foundations, mounting brackets, securers, and
             related components to a new location as specified in the
             specification.

       14.   The word “detach” means that the contractor shall unbolt, unpipe,
             and/or disconnect all attachments to the unit to enable the unit
             to be removed. All attachment points shall be tagged, identified
             and protected to facilitate reinstallation.

       15.   The word “refurbish” means that the contractor shall remove,
             disassemble, clean, and reassemble the unit, equipment, or system
             using new bolting materials, gaskets, and replacement parts; test
             the unit to demonstrate proper function and advise the 3PSC Rep
             upon completion.

       16.   The term “remove and replace interferences” means that the
             contractor shall provide all labor, material and equipment
             necessary to remove and replace material or equipment to the
             degree necessary to accomplish the statement of work in each
             specification work item.

       17.   Any  equipment   that  is  damaged  by   the  contractor  during
             modification shall be replaced, repaired, or restored at the
             contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the 3PSC
             Representative.
             The ship’s systems, furniture, furnishings, deck coverings or
             coatings that are damaged by the contractor shall be replaced,
             repaired or restored at the contractor’s expense and as verified
             by the 3PSC Rep.

       18.   All workmanship and material specified in the work item shall be
             of the highest quality in all respects and shall conform to the
             American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) standard, to the drawings,
             references, specified technical manuals, all notes contained
             therein.


3PSC                                                            Page 9 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection and
             approval of the 3PSC Representative at all times.      Workmanship
             and materials found to be defective, or not in conformity with
             good   marine   practice,   regulatory   requirements,   or   this
             Specification and its associated approved drawings shall be cause
             for rejection and removal and reinstallation to the satisfaction
             of the 3PSC Representative at the Contractor's expense.

             The contractor shall be responsible for pre-testing and final
             testing of all work and for the timely notification to the 3PSC
             Rep and to regulatory body personnel when required, of all events
             that will require on-site inspection so that completion of the
             work will not be delayed.

       19.   The term "Specification" or "Work Package" shall include
             references specified in the applicable work item.       The term
             "Section" shall mean a major part of the Specification and shall
             include a group of Items.     The   term "Item"  shall   mean  a
             separately numbered part of the Specification describing a
             portion of the work to be accomplished.

       20.   The term "Article" or "sub-item" shall mean a separately lettered
             part of an Item of the Specification.       Articles in different
             Items may bear the same letter; hence to identify an article
             completely, the Item of which it is a part must be specified.

       21.   The terms "CFM" and "CFE" shall identify Contractor Furnished
             Material and Equipment and are used interchangeably.

       22.   The term "tank" or "space" shall be construed to mean a tank
             onboard the ship, including, but not limited to: Fuel tank,
             ballast tank, lube oil tank, hydraulic oil tank, sewage tank,
             potable water tank, storage tank, holding tank, void, or
             cofferdam.

       23.   All equipment which presents a hazard to personnel shall have
             suitable protective devices installed.    These may be carrier
             guards or other approved devices and shall preclude personnel
             injury.   Examples of equipment which require protective devices
             are those which contain exposed rotating parts, fan blades,
             belts, pulleys, flywheels, etc.

       24.   ALL NEW MATERIAL MUST BE CERTIFIED ASBESTOS FREE. If a material
             which contains asbestos is inadvertently identified on a contract
             Guidance Drawing or other document, it shall be the Contractor's
             responsibility nevertheless to substitute an otherwise equivalent
             non-asbestos material. Contractor is responsible for all costs
             associated with the provision of asbestos free material whether
             provided for in Specification Items or not.

       25.   All equipment, furnishing, and material ripped out except that
             specified for temporary removal or otherwise designated by the
             3PSC Representative or this Specification shall remain the
             property of the Government.

       26.   The term "labor and material(s)" shall be construed to mean that
             the Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, plant


3PSC                                                             Page 10 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             facilities supervision, services, equipment, and other resources
             required to accomplish the assigned task(s).

       27.   The   Contractor  shall   relocate  existing  ductwork,   piping,
             wireways, fixtures, equipment, etc., as necessary, to facilitate
             installations and modifications covered by this Specification.
             In the event that existing piping, ductwork, equipment, etc.,
             must be temporarily removed to facilitate installation of new or
             modified work, Contractor shall remove and subsequently reinstall
             same as far as reasonably possible, to the satisfaction of the
             3PSC Representative.

       28.   The term "or equal" or “in kind” shall mean that components or
             equipment shall not only be equivalent in terms of quality and
             performance (flow rate, pressure, heat transfer characteristics,
             etc.) and services required (power, cooling water, HVAC, etc.)
             but   also   be   compatible   with   interrelated  systems  and
             arrangements. Requests shall be made in writing to the 3PSC Rep.
             The   contractor   shall   provide   manufacturer’s  design  and
             performance data on both the named product and the product
             requested by the contractor to be used as “equal.” All equipment
             or machinery provided as “or equal,” shall be subject to the
             approval of the 3PSC Representative.

       29.   The term "Tempest Areas" refers to a select group of spaces that
             are secure areas. Free access to these areas during the overhaul
             period is not guaranteed.



E.     MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE

       1.    Contractor's Responsibility
             Unless specified to the contrary, it is the Contractor's
             responsibility   to   arrange   for  the   services   of   on-site
             manufacturer's representatives to provide technical assistance.

       2.    Services Required
             The Contractor shall provide the 3PSC Representative with
             documentation of manufacturer's representatives' authorization.

             The Contractor shall engage the services of the manufacturer's
             representative for on-site supervision and inspections to certify
             that the equipment and/or system has been installed, modified,
             adjusted, disassembled, reassembled and tested in accordance with
             the manufacturer's requirements.

             Specific installations, modifications, adjustments, etc., and
             tests requiring manufacturer's on-site representatives are as
             specified in individual Items of this Specification.

             The service contract shall call for a written report to be
             submitted by the manufacturer's on-site representative that fully
             states his observations and that specifically approves the
             Contractor's work as satisfactory to meet the requirements for
             warranty   or   explicitly   enumerates  existing   deficiencies.



3PSC                                                            Page 11 of 280
                                       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



            Deficiencies shall be corrected.   The Contractor is responsible
            only for installation deficiencies of GFE, not any GFE deficiency
            itself.

            The Contractor shall provide the 3PSC Representative with three
            (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's report, not
            later than five (5) days after successful completion of all
            tests.

       3.   Costs of Service Representative
            Unless specified to the contrary, the Contractor shall bear all
            costs of the manufacturer's representatives as part of the
            Contract.

       4.   Non-Contract Related Manufactures Representative
            3PSC   has    the   right    to   bring    in    a        manufacturers
            representative/specialist to work various jobs            not in the
            original contract as required by the Port Engineer.


F.     MEETINGS

       1.   An arrival conference shall be held between Contractor's senior
            staff and the 3PSC Representative on the first day after vessel
            arrival. Topics to be reviewed include:
            a. Contractor’s contact information
            b. Shipboard telephone numbers
            c. Emergency contact information
            d. Scheduled work days and shifts
            e. Security Requirements
            f. Rules and regulations within the shipyard
            g. Rough or magnitude schedule of vessel shifts, if applicable

       2.   Daily meetings shall be held between the 3PSC Representative and
            the Contractor’s senior staff to review daily Plans of the Day.
            Meeting location and time shall be agreed upon between the 3PSC
            Representative and Contractor. Contractor shall furnish “Plans
            for the Day”, which shall cover work to be performed on each
            item, and specify the following:
            a. Hot work locations
            b. Regulatory Inspection schedules
            c. Quality Assurance Checkpoints for the 3PSC Representative
            d. Quality Assurance Checkpoints for the 3PSC Representative and
Regulatory Bodies
            e. Ship’s force assistance requirements

            Second Shift Plan of the Day shall be turned over to the Port
            Engineer prior to the end of the first shift.

       3.   A weekly progress meeting shall be held on Thursday afternoon.
            At this meeting, the Contractor shall provide, in writing, a
            progress report listing the percentage of completion for each
            item, including change orders.    Advanced copy shall be provided
            to the Port Engineer. Approximately 8 shipboard representatives
            shall be in attendance for this meeting. The Contractor shall be
            required to furnish sufficient copies for all attendees.



3PSC                                                           Page 12 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




       4. The   weekly   progress  meeting   shall   be   held  in the   3PSC
          Representative’s office or Contractor's conference room.     Ensure
          that location is suitable to accommodate all attendees.


G.     3PSC INSPECTION AND CONTRACTORS INSPECTION RECORDS

       1.   When specification items require that a 3PSC representative
            accept and witness in progress work, completed work, testing or
            inspections, the contractor shall provide written notification to
            the 3PSC Representative at least four (4) hours but no more than
            24 hours in advance of the work sequence to be witnessed or
            approved.   When work to be witnessed or approved is to occur
            after normal day shift working hours or on a weekend, the 3PSC
            Representative shall be notified at least four (4) hours before
            the end of the last preceding regular work shift.

       2.   The 3PSC Representative may designate work sequences, in addition
            to those identified by the specification item, that are to be
            observed or inspected by a 3PSC Representative or regulatory
            body.   The aforementioned notification requirements shall also
            apply to these designated work sequences.

       3.   The contractor is responsible for performing the tests and
            inspections required by the specification or those considered
            necessary to ensure product conformity to the satisfaction of the
            3PSC Representative.

       4.   The contractor shall prepare a test and inspection record (TIR)
            for each specification item in the contract which requires
            productive work. TIRs shall be developed for each specification
            work item prior to production of work being accomplished for that
            item. Each TIR shall include the following:
            (a) Each TIR shall be identified by specification number . Ship
                 and work item number.
            (b) Each TIR shall provide identification of each unit to be
                 inspected by name, number, and location (e.g. number 2 SSDG,
                 port condenser, cargo winch number 12, etc.) Where multiple
                 units are contained within a work item, an entry on the TIR
                 shall be made for each unit.
            (c) Each TIR shall list the specific inspection attributes,
                 methods of inspection or test and the acceptance/rejection
                 criteria.    Acceptability or rejection of each inspection
                 attribute shall be indicated and shall be signed and dated by
                 authorized personnel.    Each TIR shall be updated as work
                 progresses and maintained current to within 24 hours.
            (d) Inspection attributes - The contractor shall list, on TIR,
                 all tests and inspections contained in each work item.     In
                 addition, the contractor shall include the following types of
                 inspection, as applicable in the TIR even though they may not
                 be identified as a required inspection by the work item:
                  (1) Pertinent tolerances, clearances and conditions found
                      upon   disassembly/opening   of   equipment,   machinery
                      components or spaces.




3PSC                                                            Page 13 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                 (2) In   progress    verification,   including    refit/final
                     tolerances, clearances, alignment, tests, cleanliness
                     and internal condition prior to closure, fit-up and
                     welding.
                 (3) Verification of item completion including prerequisites
                     for operational testing (i.e. lubrication, continuity
                     checks, rotation) and final test with supporting data.

       5.   The contractor shall maintain records of completed TIRs including
            inspection records generated by subcontractors for a period of 90
            days after contract completion.   The records shall document the
            specific inspection actions or test and shall provide objective
            quality evidence of completed work and form the basis for
            acceptance of the work.

            The records shall include documentation of rejected work,
            corrective action taken and objective quality evidence which the
            contractor offers as assurance of the conformance to the
            specifications.   Records provided by the subcontractor may be
            incorporated into the inspection and test documentation, or if
            maintained as separate documentation, shall be referenced therein
            and be readily available for review by the government.

            The inspection record shall, for each work item, reference any
            quality deficiency records (QDR) issued by 3PSC for which a
            written response is required from the contractor to 3PSC.

            During the performance of the contract, records shall be
            maintained at a location accessible to the site of the work and
            be available for review by during work hours.

            Contractor's inspection records are an integral part of the work,
            therefore, 3PSC will consider the work item incomplete if the
            contractor's documentation and records are not complete.

            Records shall include all TIRs, subcontractor inspection reports,
            material certificates and receipt inspection records.

       6.   With respect to subcontractors, the contractor shall establish:
            (a) Procedures for selection of qualified subcontractors based on
                 evaluation and assessment of the subcontractor's ability,
                 quality control, facilities and available resources, as
                 appropriate, to perform the specific type of work.
            (b) Procedures for transmittal of all technical, design and
                 quality   requirements  to   the   subcontractor.     Quality
                 requirements shall include the inspections and tests required
                 by the work item as well as contractor inspection at the
                 subcontractor's plant when such action is necessary to assure
                 product conformance.

            The contractor shall invoke, and require subcontractors and
            suppliers to invoke, adequate inspection systems that ensure the
            required quality of materials, parts, components, and services
            for end-use in this ship repair.      3PSC shall be permitted to
            monitor the contractor's system for inspecting subcontractors.




3PSC                                                            Page 14 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.   Only calibrated   equipment   shall   be   used   to   perform    tests   and
            inspections.

            Test   and  measuring   equipment  shall   be  within recognized
            calibration limits and shall be calibrated against standards
            traceable to the national bureau of standards.

            Calibrated equipment shall be identified with a label stating
            date of calibration, due date and certifying agency.

            Calibrated equipment shall be used for all pressure and weight
            testing, measurements of electrical waves, balancing operations,
            tachometers and other indirect measuring devices used for
            inspection  or   to  record  data  or   dimensions  required  by
            specifications.




H.     DELIVERY, CARE, AND REDELIVERY OF VESSEL

       1.   The Operator shall deliver the ship to the Contractor's plant for
            the purpose of the accomplishment of the work as described in
            these specifications.    Signed receipt of the ship shall be
            provided by the Contractor.    Signed receipt for return of the
            ship back to 3PSC shall be provided by the Contractor. The
            delivery date and return date and time shall be agreed upon by
            3PSC and the Contractor.

       2.   Throughout the duration of        the performance period of the
            Contract, the Contractor shall    provide services and care for the
            ship as specified in this item     and other service items in these
            specifications and shall be       responsible for the safety and
            security of the vessel.

       3.   In addition to the above, the Contractor shall:
            (a)   Repair or replace all ship's parts, equipment, systems,
                  etc., damaged or destroyed by the Contractor and assume
                  expense for repairs or replacement.

            (b)   Permit the free movement of properly identified employees
                  and materials of the Government to all points of the ship
                  at all times during the contract period, including, but not
                  limited   to   manufacturer's    technical  representatives
                  subcontracted by 3PSC and the Government.

            (c)   Clean, on a daily basis, to the satisfaction of the captain
                  and chief engineer, those areas of the ship where work is
                  being performed in accordance with this specification.
                  Keep the ship in a clean and sanitary condition by removing
                  all debris, garbage and sweeping all passageways daily
                  (including Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays).

            (d)   Refrain from discharging or throwing hazardous materials,
                  scrap materials, oil, etc., into the water and shall



3PSC                                                               Page 15 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                  dispose of same in a proper manner in accordance                  with
                  applicable environmental laws and regulations.

            (e)   Assume responsibility for the protection of the ship's
                  interiors from weather, fire, damage by shipyard personnel,
                  theft, dirt, foreign substances, etc… save to the extent
                  that damage results from any act or omission on the part of
                  the crewmembers of 3PSC personnel.

            (f)   Store in a suitable container for flammable liquid storage,
                  all paint and flammable liquids used by the Contractor and
                  those that are stored aboard the ship by the Contractor,
                  including any paint furnished by Owner for use of
                  Contractor.

            (g)   Maintain rigid    control of welding and grounding for the
                  protection of     the hull, stern tubes and other hull
                  appendages and   ensure that the welding polarity and ground
                  connections of    welding machines used on the ship or on
                  other ships in    the immediate vicinity, or on the pier or
                  wharf to which   the ship is moored, do not damage any part
                  of the ship.

       4.   Upon completion of all work hereunder, Contractor shall redeliver
            the ship to the 3PSC Port Engineer, after successful tests, dock
            trials, and sea trials, complete and ready for service in full
            accordance with the Contract and this specification.

       5.   Before redelivery of the ship, Contractor shall complete all
            tests and inspections required by specifications. The existence
            of a large number of uncorrected minor deficiencies will be
            sufficient cause for rejection of delivery. The existence of any
            major uncorrected Contractor responsible deficiency item that
            affects the safe navigation or the immediate efficient use of the
            ship for its intended service will be sufficient cause to reject
            redelivery of the ship pending the correction of the item or
            items concerned, and the resulting delay in redelivery shall be a
            matter of Contractor responsibility.   All deficiencies shall be
            corrected prior to redelivery.

       6.   To ensure that the ship is in proper condition for redelivery,
            Contractor shall conduct a final joint survey of the ship with
            the 3PSC Port Engineer no less than 3 days prior to the scheduled
            redelivery date.   This survey will include review of the status
            of completion of acceptance survey deficiencies and items
            developed after the acceptance survey.     Based on this survey,
            Contractor shall reach an agreement with the 3PSC Port Engineer
            as to the extent of further cleaning and correcting of minor
            deficiencies that must be completed prior to the 3PSC Port
            Engineer accepting redelivery of the ship, and as to the work
            that may, as a practical matter, be deferred for accomplishment
            until after redelivery of the ship. In connection with this
            agreement, the Contract, and this specification, the Contractor
            shall redeliver the ship free of all known defects and
            deficiencies.




3PSC                                                             Page 16 of 280
                                       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



I.     FIT-UP AND WELDING

       1.   Welding Qualification
            All welding procedures shall conform to the Regulations and
            Standards of the American Bureau of Shipping.  Welders shall be
            certified for the welding process employed and require approval
            of the regulatory bodies.

       2.   Non-Destructive Testing
            Non-Destructive  Testing,   unless  specified  otherwise  in   an
            individual specification item, shall be as required by regulatory
            bodies. The cost of testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

       3.   Inserts or Access Cuts
            Temporary access cuts or inserts not following existing butts or
            seams shall be generously radiused at corners.      All temporary
            access cuts shall have prior approval of the Port Engineer and in
            addition, access cuts in primary hull structure or machinery
            foundations shall have the approval of the regulatory bodies.

            The Location, size and pertinent structural-details of all access
            cuts shall be documented on sketches and submitted to the Port
            Engineer.

       4.   Weld Sequence, Fairness and Alignment
            Weld sequencing shall be utilized to minimize distortion and
            residual stresses.   A minimum cut back of six inches shall be
            employed at corners where butts and seams intersect.

            Strong backs shall be used where necessary to maintain alignment
            of plating members.

            Alignment of butt welded plate edges shall be +1/16 inch of each
            other.

       5.   Full Penetration and Fillet Welds
            All full penetration welds in primary hull structure, machinery
            foundations or tank boundaries shall be back gouged to sound
            material and approved by the Port Engineer prior to final
            welding.

            Unless otherwise specified, fillet welded members shall be welded
            continuously in areas exposed to weather or wet spaces.

            Fillet weld size, unless otherwise specified, shall be a minimum
            of 1/2 the thickness plus 1/16th of the thinner member.

            Temporary attachment shall be removed and ground flush. Scars in
            plating shall be welded and ground.      All scale, slag and weld
            spatter shall be removed and sharp or rough edges ground smooth.

       6.   Quality Assurance Requirements
            The contractor shall apply any costs, if required, as a result of
            this item to the individual service or repair items listed
            elsewhere in these specifications.




3PSC                                                           Page 17 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



J.     CHANGE ORDERS

       Whenever the scope of work on any bid specification item exceeds the
       detailed steps described in the Statement of Work and/or the intent of
       the specification, a change order shall be issued to the Contractor
       detailing   the   additional   steps  that  must   be   undertaken  to
       satisfactorily complete the item.

       Any additional work, not related to the bid specifications, that owners
       desire to have accomplished shall be initiated by a change order.

       Change orders may be initiated only by the 3PSC Port Engineer and will
       remain invalid until written in detail, negotiated and signed by the
       3PSC Port Engineer and any other party so required by the 3PSC
       Representative.

       Whenever a change order becomes necessary, upon notification by the
       3PSC Port Engineer, Contractor shall immediately, and in good faith,
       enter into negotiations with the 3PSC Port Engineer to arrive at a
       mutually agreeable price for the performance of the work.


       Pricing of Change Orders
       Change orders shall be priced on the same basis as bid items. Where a
       change order is similar or equivalent in most respects to a bid item,
       the price shall be a percentage of the bid price directly proportional
       to the amount of labor/material required to accomplish each job. Where
       no similarity exists between a change order and an existing bid item,
       the hourly labor rates quoted (for the accomplishment of additional
       work) shall prevail and all materials used shall be supported by
       invoices or vendor quotations.


K.     LIQUIDATED DAMAGES – Redelivery & Docking
       Time is of the essence in the performance of this contract and any
       delay in the timely redelivery of the vessel shall cause Owners
       irreparable monetary harm.    In bidding upon and accepting this work,
       Contractor has agreed to pursue and expedite the work to timely
       completion and has provided to Owners a realistic and attainable period
       of performance culminating in a date for redelivery of the vessel upon
       which   Owners  may   confidently  schedule  the   vessel's  subsequent
       deployment. With the exception of permissible delays, Contractor shall
       be liable for all delays in the redelivery of the vessel and shall be
       subject to the imposition by Owners of a monetary sum which shall be
       termed Liquidated Damages.

       The Contractor shall pay to 3PSC as fixed, agreed and liquidated
       damages for each calendar day of delay the amount of $46,100.00 (Forty
       Six Thousand One Hundred Dollars US). The sum stated shall be imposed
       daily for each day that redelivery of the vessel is delayed, but not
       exceed 10% of the Contract value.




3PSC                                                            Page 18 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



L.     PERMISSIBLE DELAYS

       Permissible delays are those delays over which the Contractor has no
       control whatsoever, i.e.;
             (1)   Owner's delays
             (2)   Fire at Contractor's Facility, flood and other natural
                   disasters
             (3)   Acts of war
             (4)   Named Storms



M.     WARRANTY

       In the event that any work done or material furnished by the Contractor
       on or for the vessel or the equipment thereof shall, after completion
       of all work, and within 180 days of vessel operation, prove defective,
       deficient, or not in conformity with the specifications, such defects
       or deficiencies shall be corrected and repaired by the Contractor at
       his expense, to the satisfaction of the Operator.       All associated
       costs, as well as liquidated damages, if appropriate, will be borne by
       the Contractor.


N.     FINAL INVOICE PREPARATION

       Contractor shall prepare a final invoice for all work performed in
       accordance with these specifications and any 3PSC approved changes
       thereto and present the final invoice to the 3PSC Representative for
       validation and approval.     The final invoice shall contain the
       following:

       (a)   Section 1: Original Fixed Price Items
             (1)   Ship’s name and 3PSC Purchase Order Number
             (2)   Item #: Title of Item
             (3)   Total Item Cost which shall include labor, material, and
                   subcontractor invoices.

       (b)   Section 2: Changes and Extras:
             (1)   Comprehensive   Spreadsheet  (Microsoft  Excel   format  or
                   equivalent) that shows all original items plus applicable
                   change orders assigned to the original items or, if new
                   work, the applicable work item number
             (2)   3PSC Change Order Form, signed by Contractor, the attending
                   3PSC Port Engineer, and wherever appropriate, the MSC Port
                   Engineer.

       (c)   Section 3: Invoice Cover Sheet
             (1)   Final agreed to amount for all work performed
             (2)   Total Invoice amount (allowing withholding 5% for 180 day
                   warranty period)

             Example:
             i.    USNS Pathfinder, 3PSC Purchase Order Number 0001




3PSC                                                             Page 19 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             ii     Original Quoted Price for This Performance Period:
                    $1,100,000
             iii.   Change Order Total for this Performance Period: $90,000
             iv.    Total Amount for this Performance Period:       $1,190,000
             v.     Invoice Amount (less 5% for warranty)           $1,130,500

       (d)   Subsequent Invoice – Final 5% after warranty period
             The final 5% shall be invoiced separately with an original
             invoice sent to the 3PSC office 180 days after the completion of
             the performance period.
             (1)   Ship’s name and 3PSC Purchase Order Number
             (2)   Total Outstanding Amount After 180 day warranty period
             expiration
             Example:
             i.    USNS Pathfinder,   3PSC Purchase Order Number 0001
             ii.   Final 5% of invoice for USNS Pathfinder completed on
                   XX/YY/ZZZZ:       $59,500
             iii. Copy of any previous invoices submitted and paid by 3PSC
                   under this purchase order number.

O.     PAYMENT

       Contractor shall tender the above referenced final invoice, approved by
       the 3PSC Representative in the required format complete with all
       required information to 3PSC Cape Canaveral, FL office, original and
       two (2) copies. Submit the invoice to the following address:
       3PSC, LLC
       7099 North Atlantic Avenue, Suite 200
       Cape Canaveral, FL 32920
       USA
       Attn: Accounts Payable

       3PSC shall pay 95% of the invoice within 30 days of receipt provided
       that the invoice is submitted in accordance with the Terms and
       Conditions stated herein and such invoice is approved by the 3PSC
       Representative.   The remaining 5% shall be paid net 180 days.     The
       payment of all invoices will be net of any costs to be borne by the
       Contractor but paid by 3PSC including but not limited to the costs and
       liquidated damages described in this contract.

       In the event of a dispute, 3PSC reserves the right to remit the
       undisputed part and withhold payment of the disputed amount until such
       time the dispute is resolved.

       If the Contractor requires a progress payment, this request shall be
       included in their price quotation. Given the length of the performance
       period, one progress payment may be permitted, pending review of the
       Military Sealift Command.   The terms and conditions for the progress
       payment are:

       1. When the time expended has reached 50% of the overall performance
          period, the overall progress of work performed shall be reviewed and
          agreed upon by the Contractor and the 3PSC Port Engineer.    Payment
          terms for this progress payment are net 30 days of receipt provided
          that the invoice is submitted in accordance  with   the  Terms   and




3PSC                                                              Page 20 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



          Conditions stated herein and such invoice is approved by the 3PSC
          Representative.
       2. A final invoice shall be submitted at the completion of the
          performance period.   3PSC shall pay 95% of the invoice within 30
          days of receipt provided that the invoice is submitted in accordance
          with the Terms and Conditions stated herein and such invoice is
          approved by the 3PSC Representative. The remaining 5% shall be paid
          net 180 days.   The payment of all invoices will be net of any costs
          to be borne by the Contractor but paid by 3PSC including but not
          limited to the costs and liquidated damages described in this
          contract.



P.     INDEMNIFICATION

       1.   Personal Injury, Property Damage and Infringement.
            Contractor will indemnify, defend and hold harmless (including
            paying reasonable attorneys' fees) 3PSC and its employees, agents
            and permitted assigns (and the Government for infringement
            liability) against all liability to third parties that: (1)
            arises    from    Contractor's,     its    employees',      agents',
            subcontractors' or permitted assigns' negligence, wanton or
            reckless conduct that results in death or bodily injury or damage
            to real or tangible personal property, or (2) arises from or in
            connection with the Contractor's performance of the Services or
            the use or resale of any item furnished under the Contract that
            violates   any   third   party's    trade   secrets,    proprietary
            information, trademark, copyright or patent     rights,    if:   (1)
            3PSC notified the Contractor of any claim (provided that failure
            to provide such notice shall not relieve Contractor from any duty
            to indemnify unless Contractor is materially prejudiced by such
            failure and had no actual knowledge of such complaint, claim, or
            other notice); (2) Contractor was permitted to control the
            defense or settlement of the claim; and (3) 3PSC cooperated with
            all reasonable requests of the Contractor (at the expense of the
            Contractor) in defending or settling the claim.      If   3PSC’s or
            the Government's use or resale of an item furnished under this
            Contract is enjoined, Contractor shall: (1) procure for 3PSC and
            the Government the right to continue using and reselling the
            item, or (2) replace or modify the item so that 3PSC's and the
            Government's use becomes non-infringing, so long as all Contract
            specifications are met. Any modified or replacement item will be
            covered by Contractor's indemnity obligation in this Section.

       2.   Contract Performance. Contractor will indemnify 3PSC to the full
            extent of 3PSC’s costs (including any damages, costs or charges
            assessed by the Government against 3PSC) if any cost, price or
            fee included in the Prime Contract is reduced or liquidated, or
            if   other   damages  are   incurred   because  Contractor,   its
            subcontractors or prospective subcontractors: (1) furnished cost
            or pricing data that was not complete, accurate and current as
            certified in Contractor's or its subcontractors' or prospective
            subcontractors' Certificate of Current Cost of Pricing Data; (2)
            furnished any other data or certifications that were not
            complete, accurate and current as submitted; (3) failed to comply



3PSC                                                            Page 21 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



            with the provisions of the "Cost Accounting Standards" clause or
            other similar clause of this contract; or (4) breached this
            Contract by (a) violating any law or regulation required to be
            complied with under this Contract, (b) failing to provide any
            certification, report or supporting information required under
            this   Contract,  or  (c)  violating   the  Contract's  warranty
            provision.

Q.     FAR FLOWDOWN CLAUSES

       In accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulations the following
       clauses by reference are made part of THIS CONTRACT:

       52.219-8, Utilization of Small Business Concerns
       52.222-26, Equal Opportunity
       52.222-35, Equal Opportunity for Special Veterans, Veterans of the
       Vietnam Era and Other Eligible Veterans
       52.222-36, Affirmative Action for Workers with Disabilities
       52.222-41, Service Contract Act of 1965
       52.247-64, Preference for Privately Owned US Flag Commercial Vessels
       52.203-6, Restrictions on Subcontractors Sales to The Government
       52.203-7, Anti-Kickback Procedures
       52.203-11, Certification and Disclosure regarding Payments to influence
       certain Federal Transactions

       These clauses are required by our contract with MILITARY SEALIFT
       COMMAND and the Federal Acquisition Regulations to be flowed down to
       this sub-contract.   The full text of each clause can be found on the
       web at: www.acqnet.gov/far/index.html




3PSC                                                            Page 22 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




R.     WAIVER OF LIEN
       Referencing 2.7.3.4.3.1 of MSC Contract N00033-09-C-2504, the following
       waiver of lien is in effect throughout this performance period and
       warranty period
       Waiver of Maritime Liens.
       A)   Neither the Contractor nor any of its subcontractors shall be
            entitled to a maritime lien upon the vessel.      The Subcontractor
            agrees that nothing in or contemplated by this contract creates or
            shall be construed to create any right to assert a maritime lien on
            the vessel or to bring an action under the Public Vessels Act, 46
            U.S. C. app 791 et seq. or the Suits in Admiralty Act, 46 U.S.
            C.app 741, et seq.
       B)   The Subcontractor further agrees that this contract between
            Operator and Subcontractor creates no privity between itself and
            the Owner and that it is relying solely on the credit of the
            Operator for payment hereunder.   The Subcontractor agrees that it
            is not authorized by either the Owner or the Operator to enter into
            contracts on behalf of the Government or the vessel, nor is the
            Subcontractor entrusted with the management of the vessel or
            authorization to pledge the credit of the vessel. This contract is
            strictly for ship repair or alteration and does not create an
            agency agreement.
       C)   The subcontractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Government,
            its agencies and instrumentalities, and the Operator, against all
            suits, actions, claim, costs or demands against the Government, its
            agencies and instrumentalities and the Operator, for which the
            vessel and its owner may be subject under this subcontract.
       D)   The subcontractor agrees to include, and require inclusion of, this
            clause, suitably modified to identify the parties, in all
            subcontracts at any tier for supplies or services and
       E)   Shall cause all its subcontractors to execute similar waivers



S.     DISPUTES

       1.   Disputes under this Contract.
            This section governs all claims, controversies or disputes
            arising out of or relating to this Contract or its breach
            ("disputes") that are not directly or indirectly subject to
            resolution under the disputes clause of 3PSC's prime contract.
            Any dispute that is not disposed of by written mutual agreement
            will be preliminary determined by 3PSC's contract representative,
            who will within 15 days after determining that the matter will
            not be resolved by mutual agreement, render a preliminary written
            determination on the issues in dispute and furnish a copy thereof
            to the Contractor.   3PSC's preliminary determination will become
            final and conclusive unless the contractor submits a written
            demand for arbitration to the American Arbitration Association
            within 30 days of the preliminary determination.      The dispute
            will then be arbitrated, pursuant to the commercial rules of the
            American Arbitration Association, before a panel of three



3PSC                                                            Page 23 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



            arbitrators.   3PSC's "preliminary determination" will not bind
            the arbitrators and will not prejudice the legal position of
            either party in the arbitration. One of the arbitrators will be
            selected by each party, and the third arbitrator will be selected
            by the two party-appointed arbitrators.     Any such arbitration
            will be held in the Washington, DC. metropolitan area.        The
            parties will share the costs of the arbitration equally.      The
            arbitrators will apply the choice of law chosen by the parties to
            govern this contract.   The decision of the arbitrators will be
            final and conclusive upon the parties.    Judgment upon an award
            rendered by the arbitrators may be entered in any court of
            competent jurisdiction. Neither party shall institute any action
            or proceeding against the other party in any court concerning any
            dispute that is or could be the subject of a claim or proceeding
            under this section.

       2.   Disputes under the 3PSC- Military Sealift Command Contract. This
            section governs all disputes of the Contractor concerning matters
            that are directly or indirectly subject to resolution under the
            disputes clause of 3PSC's contract with the Military Sealift
            Command.   3PSC will notify the Contractor of any final decision
            of the Government’s Contracting Officer under the prime contract
            that relates to this Contract or to the Contractor's performance
            under it within 10 business days after 3PSC receives the
            decision. Any final decision will be conclusive and binding upon
            the contractor unless 3PSC elects to appeal it under this section
            and disputes clause of the 3PSC-Military Sealift Command.      If
            3PSC elects to do so, the Contractor will provide 3PSC reasonable
            assistance in prosecuting such an appeal, including, but not
            limited to, giving 3PSC access to the contractor's personnel and
            relevant non-privileged documents.

            If 3PSC elects not to appeal any final decision of the
            Contracting Officer under the Disputes Clause of the Prime
            Contract, 3PSC will so notify the Contractor in writing within 20
            business days after 3PSC receives the final decision. If within
            30 days after Contractor receives 3PSC's notice of its decision
            not to appeal the final decision of the Contracting Officer, the
            Contractor notifies 3PSC that the Contractor intends to appeal
            that final decision, 3PSC will grant the Contractor an indirect
            right to appeal that final decision in 3PSC's name under the
            Disputes Clause of the Prime Contract.    Contractor will pay all
            costs and expenses of any such appeal. Contractor will be solely
            responsible for prosecuting the appeal and preparing and
            presenting all pleadings, evidence and argument. Contractor will
            provide monthly written reports to 3PSC of the progress of the
            appeal and will furnish 3PSC copies of all pleadings and non-
            privileged  correspondence   filed  or  received   by   contractor
            concerning the appeal.

            If 3PSC is required to submit a certification to the Government
            regarding a claim submitted pursuant to the Contract Disputes
            Act, contractor will make available to 3PSC all data and
            documentation that is necessary or appropriate to support or
            confirm the certification. Contractor agrees to indemnify 3PSC,
            in a written instrument satisfactory in form and substance to




3PSC                                                            Page 24 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             3PSC, against any loss or liability that 3PSC might incur with
             respect to the certification.

       3.    Dispute-resolution method and continuation of performance.    3PSC
             will determine whether section 1 or 2 of this clause applies to
             any particular dispute, and that determination will be conclusive
             upon the parties.    Pending the final resolution of any dispute
             under this clause, Contractor will proceed diligently to perform
             this Contract and comply with 3PSC's preliminary determination.


T.     CLAIMS
        In the event that the Contractor submits a claim or request for
        adjustment to the contract price, for performance of work under a
        contract, the Contractor shall provide:

       (1) A description of work required by the contract, including the
           citations to the contract, before the factual events which led to
           the claim;

       (2) A detailed report on the status of the work as originally required
           by the contract;

       (3) A description of new requirements or other events which led to the
           claim;

       (4) A list of components, equipment, and other identifiable property
           involved in the claim. The status of manufacture, procurement, or
           installation of shipyard/industrial assistance Contractor furnished
           property is to be indicated. The status of specified design and
           production work. Items of raw material, purchased parts,
           components, and other identifiable hardware, which are made excess
           by the change and which are not to be retained by the Contractor,
           and are listed for later disposition;

       (5) A description of work completed which is deleted, or will be
           deleted, by events which led to the claim;

       (6) A description of interferences and inefficiencies involved in
           performing the work;

       (7) A description of each element of work disruption and exactly how
           work has been, or will be, disrupted, including:

            (i)   The calendar period of time during which disruption occurred,
                  or will occur;
            (ii) Area(s) aboard the ship where disruption occurred, or will
                  occur;
            (iii) Trade(s) disrupted, with a breakdown of man-hours for each
                  trade;
            (iv) Scheduling of trades before, during, and at the period of
                  disruption;
            (v)   Description of measures taken to lessen the disruptive
                  effect;




3PSC                                                             Page 25 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       (8) Delay in delivery attributable solely to the events which led to
           the claim;

       (9) Other new works attributable to the events which led to the claim;

       (10) Supplementing the foregoing, a narrative statement of the direct
            causal relationship between any alleged act or omission of the
            Contractor or the Government, and the claimed consequences thereof,
            cross-referenced to detailed information provided as required
            above;

       (11) A statement of costs budgeted for the work as originally specified
            under the contract (prior to the events leading to the claim).”


T.     MISCELLANEOUS

       1.    Notice. Any notice or other communication will be in writing and
             will be considered to have been given if delivered by hand or
             sent by certified united states mail, return receipt requested,
             to the other party's designated Contract representative.

       2.    Remedies. Neither party will be liable to the other for any lost
             profits, any claim based upon any third party claims (except as
             provided for in the indemnification clause), or any special,
             indirect,   incidental  or  consequential   damages (except  for
             Contractor's obligations in the indemnification clause), even if
             either has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
             Remedies for breach are cumulative and may be exercised
             separately or concurrently. The exercise of one remedy is not an
             election of that remedy to the exclusion of others.

             Notwithstanding   the  preceding,   the  Contractor  has   assumed
             responsibility for the protection of the vessel from fire,
             weather, damage by shipyard personnel, theft, dirt, foreign
             substance, and if (i) by reason of the negligence of Contractor,
             its subcontractors or personnel or agents of either of them in
             carrying out such responsibility, or (ii) as a result of faulty
             workmanship   or   failure   to   comply  with   the   plans   and
             specifications, the vessel shall suffer damage, including damage
             to any part of the vessel not within the scope of the work, the
             Contractor shall be liable at its sole cost and expense for the
             repair or correction of any such damages and if the redelivery of
             the vessel shall be delayed due to such occurrence, the
             Contractor shall pay to owner liquidated damages in accordance
             with clause o of this Contract and the invitation for bid for the
             period of any such delay.

       3.    Entire agreement and amendment.     This Contract, including the
             documents described in the letter Contract, constitutes the
             entire agreement between the parties.      All prior agreements,
             understandings and proposals, oral or written, between the
             parties relating to this subject are null and void and superseded
             by this Contract. This Contract may only be modified or amended
             by a writing signed by both parties. Change orders, however,
             shall be effective without Contractor's signature. Both parties



3PSC                                                             Page 26 of 280
                                       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



            explicitly acknowledge and agree that all subsequent oral
            agreements, and any oral understandings and oral proposals are
            null and void.

       4.   Insurance. During the term of this Contract, Contractor will
            maintain insurance coverage as required by 3PSC with carriers and
            policies reasonably acceptable to 3PSC. Contractor will provide
            certificates of insurance coverage to 3PSC upon request, and will
            immediately notify 3PSC if any policy is canceled.

       5.   Contract administration.
            (a) 3PSC's Contract representative is Mr. Robert Petrosino, Vice
                 President. 3PSC's Contract Representative is the only person
                 authorized to amend this Contract and send and receive
                 notices on behalf of 3PSC.
            (b) 3PSC's technical representative will be Mr. Robert Petrosino,
                 Vice President.    3PSC's technical representative will be
                 responsible for technical direction under each applicable
                 work order and is authorized to make technical decisions
                 under such work orders.

            (c) Contractor's   Contract   representative   is  the designated
                shipyard     representative.          Contractor's   Contract
                representative is the only person authorized to amend the
                Contract, and send and receive notices on behalf of
                Contractor.
            (d) Contractor's technical representative is the designated
                shipyard     representative.         Contractor's   technical
                representative is responsible for technical administrative of
                the Contract.

       6.   Employment Relationships.   During the term of this Contract and
            for a period of one year thereafter, neither party shall
            knowingly solicit for hire any officer or employee of the other
            whose responsibilities relate to this Contract without the
            other's prior written approval.    However, either party may hire
            an   individual  employed  by   the   other  who,  without  other
            solicitation, responds to employment advertising in newspapers,
            trade publications or other public commercial media.         This
            provision shall in no way be construed to restrict, limit, or
            encumber the rights of any employee granted by law. The parties
            expressly acknowledge the materiality of this covenant.

       7.   Disclosure and publicity.   Contractor will not make public any
            information concerning this Contract and 3PSC's prime Contract,
            or Contractor's efforts in connection therewith, without 3PSC's
            prior written consent. This prohibition includes the issuance or
            making of any news release, public announcement, advertisement or
            other form of publicity.

       8.   Waiver and severability.   No provision of this Contract will be
            waived and no breach excused unless the waiver or consent is in
            writing and is signed by the party that is claimed to have waived
            or consented. If any provision of this Contract is determined to
            be invalid or unenforceable, in whole or in part, the remaining
            provisions will continue in full force and effect as if the
            Contract had been executed without the invalid provision.


3PSC                                                           Page 27 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




       9.    Assignment. Neither party will assign or otherwise transfer its
             rights, liabilities or obligations under this Contract without
             the other party's prior written consent, which may be granted or
             withheld in the other party's sole discretion.    Any prohibited
             assignment or subcontract by either party will be void, and the
             assigning or subcontracting party will remain liable for full
             performance of its duties, liabilities and obligations under the
             Contract.

       10.   Applicable law. This Contract will be governed by the law of the
             state in which the Contract is executed, except for those
             portions   of   the  federal  acquisition   regulation or   other
             regulations   applicable   to  Government  procurement that   are
             incorporated herein.    Those provisions shall be interpreted in
             accordance with the decisions of the federal courts and the
             boards of Contract appeals.

       11.   Independent Contractor. Contractor is an independent Contractor
             whose employees or agents will not be deemed to be employees or
             agents of 3PSC for any purpose.




3PSC                                                            Page 28 of 280
                   4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




000 SERIES ITEMS




3PSC                                       Page 29 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 001 General Services And Requirements
1.0 Abstract
   Provide general services to the ship for duration of the overhaul period.

2.0    Reference/Enclosures:   None.

3.0 Item Location/Description:     None

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services:       None

5.0 Notes:    None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:    None

7.0 Statement of work required
      7.1 Furnish the services that follow from the date of the ships arrival
          at the contractor's plant until the date of final departure from the
          contractor's plant:


7.1.1 Tugs, Pilots, Linehandlers and Berthing
      A.    The contractor shall provide the necessary tugs, pilots and
            linehandlers for all vessel movements in the shipyard, except for
            arrival and departure. This shall include the following:
            - Sea trial
            - Dock trial
            - Docking and undocking
            - Vessel movements within the yard to accommodate other works
            * If the vessel shall be docked upon arrival into the shipyard,
              the cost for tugs, pilots and linehandlers for docking shall be
              borne by the Contractor. Once the vessel arrives at the entrance
              of the drydock, costs associated with docking shall be to the
              Contractor’s account. In other words, 3PSC shall not pay for
              any costs that exceed the normal arrival and mooring at a
              layberth.
      B.    Two tugs shall be used at all times to accomplish vessel movements.
            The tugs used shall be minimum 2500 SHP, and of suitable size and
            rating to assist the ship as required.
      C.    The Pilots to be employed shall be licensed and certified with the
            local pilot agency.
      D.    Furnish a layberth for the ship throughout the entire performance
            period. The pier space shall be sufficient to support the ship’s
            mooring arrangements, fendered, and have acceptable lighting
            conditions.   There shall be no less than 5 feet of water between
            the floor and lowermost hull appendage.
      E.    Ship’s mooring lines shall be used to secure the ship at the
            contractor’s facility.
      F.    A copy of the most recent soundings of where the vessel will be
            berthed shall be provided along with the price quotation. The
            soundings report shall not be older than 24 months.


7.1.2 Electrical Shore Power
      A.   The contractor shall provide a reliable source of power at a minimum
           capacity of 1200 amps of electrical power at 480 volts ac, 3 phase,



3PSC                                                                  Page 30 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



            60 hertz. The contractor's personnel shall connect the electrical
            power at the shore connection. Four(4) shore power cables are
            required, with a maximum output of 400Amps drawn per cable.   Each
            shorepower cable shall be fed from one 600V, 400Amp drawout type
            circuit breaker. Access to these shoreside breakers shall be made
            available around the clock in the event of emergency. All electric
            cables utilized shall be in good material condition, free of tears,
            cracks, or poorly repaired insulation. Cables that are spliced shall
            be insulated in accordance with current IEEE codes and be clearly
            marked to ensure they are readily identifiable at all times.
       B.   Electrical shore power shall be supplied to the ship through
            contractor provided circuit breakers, of the appropriate capacity,
            installed on the pier between the ship and the pier side connection.
            For estimating purposes, assume shorepower consumption at 600,000kwH
            for the duration of the performance period. If the total kw consumed
            exceeds the estimated total, a change order shall be submitted to
            compensate the contractor for additional costs. If the total kw
            consumed is less than the estimated kw total, a change order will be
            issued for credit and subtracted from invoice total.
       C.   The contractor shall maintain AC power continuously at a maximum of
            490 volts and a minimum of 480 during the entire availability the
            ship is on shore power. The contractor shall provide and install a
            voltage recording device and continuously record the voltages at the
            shore power to ship connection. The chart recordings shall be
            delivered to the 3PSC Port Engineer on a weekly basis.
       D.   The Contractor shall disconnect and connect electric power for all
            vessel movements throughout the performance period.
       E.   If required, the fueling of any shoreside generator shall be the
            responsibility of the contractor.


7.1.3 Fresh and Salt water:
      A.   Provide 25 gpm of fresh and flushing water at 50 psig during the
           entire yard period. Provide all material and labor to make hook-ups
           and disconnections. The ship’s force shall be responsible for
           filling the shipboard potable water tanks.   For bidding purposes,
           estimate 8 tons per day consumption.
      B.   Provide 1000 gpm of salt water at 60 psig during the entire yard
           period and connect in order to support the air conditioning and
           refrigeration systems. This shall be independent from the firemain
           shore connection supply.   Provide all material and labor to make
           hook-ups and disconnections.
      C.   The overboard discharges shall be temporarily modified so that the
           seawater does not run down the sideshell and affect the underwater
           hull coatings and other maintenance items.
      D.   This price shall include all of the necessary disconnections and
           reconnections associated with vessel movements while in the
           shipyard.


7.1.4 Debris and Garbage Removal
      A.   Provide 1 each garbage container on the fantail that measures no
           less than 8’ x 5’ x 5.    Container shall have hinged cover.
           Container shall be emptied daily, inclusive of weekends and holidays
           while the ship is in the shipyard.




3PSC                                                             Page 31 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       B.   All garbage that has been generated by the ship's crew and shipyard
            personnel shall be collected and removed on a daily basis (including
            Saturdays, Sundays and holidays). The contractor shall provide
            metal containers at appropriate locations for garbage deposit.


7.1.5 Deck Protection and Cleaning
      A.   Install fire retardant plywood covering minimum 1/8 inch thick on
           all decks, bulkheads, passageways, carpeted staterooms and other
           areas that will be modified or heavily traversed by the Contractor.
           The protective covering shall be securely fastened and renewed by
           the contractor as necessary or by the direction of the 3PSC Port
           Engineer. Areas to be covered include:
           1. Main Deck in its entirety
           2. EOS and adjacent decks leading to the Engineering office
           3. 01 deck
           4. 02 deck
           Total area to be covered are approximately 3000 sf.
      B.   All protected areas shall be maintained throughout the performance
           period.
      C.   5 days prior to redelivery, remove all covering and securing
           material thoroughly and leave all areas of the ship in a sanitary
           condition. Broom clean, & wet mop passageways, mess halls,
           compartments, public spaces, as well as any other areas entered or
           traversed by contractor personnel two days prior to redelivery of
           the ship.


7.1.6 Toilet Facilities
      A.   Shipyard personnel shall not use shipboard toilet and shower
           facilities. In other cases where the ship sanitary system is not
           active or upon deactivation, the contractor is to provide
           facilities, aboard ship on the fantail, for the shipboard personnel.
           These facilities shall be separate from the shipyard personnel
           facilities.
      B.   The Contractor shall provide no less than two (2) portable heads,
           immediately upon any deactivation of the vessel’s sewage system.
           Portable heads shall be cleaned out and restocked with supplies on a
           daily basis. Contractor shall be responsible for all labor and
           rigging required to switch portable heads throughout the contract
           period.

7.1.7 Oily Waste/Waste oil Removal
      A.   The contractor shall remove and dispose of approximately 4000
           gallons of waste oil and oily waste.   Allow for connecting,
           disconnecting, and receiving of 4000 gallons throughout the
           performance period. Estimate 3 each separate visits to the ship to
           remove and dispose of waste oil and oily waste.


7.1.8 Sewage
      A.   Provide and maintain a sewage connection for the blackwater system
           throughout the performance period.  This shall include all of the
           necessary disconnections and reconnections associated with vessel
           movements while in the shipyard.



3PSC                                                             Page 32 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



         B.   For bidding purposes, assume 40,000 gallons of blackwater to be
              disposed of throughout the performance period.


7.1.9 Gangway & Lighting
      A.   While the vessel is afloat, the contractor shall provide one (1)
           gangway. Gangway and landing platform shall be a minimum of 3 feet
           in width and be designed and constructed to support a minimum load
           of 75 pounds per square inch. The entire length of the gangway and
           adjacent areas shall be illuminated with weathertight lights,
           shielded to prevent temporary blinding of personnel.
      B.   The contractor shall install safety nets under gangway and platform.
           Safety nets shall extend six (6) feet beyond each side of the
           gangway and platform. Inclination of gangway shall not exceed 45
           degrees.
      C.   During times that the ship is on drydock, two each gangways shall be
           provided by the contractor. This gangway shall be for egress only
           and installed on the bow to the drydock wingwall. The same
           requirements as listed in paragraphs A & B apply for load and
           construction.


7.1.10         Crane and Transportation Service
         A.    Provide crane service of a minimum of ten (10) ton capacity at 50
               feet extension from turning center, along with operator for 40
               hours and riggers for 80 hours for crane and rigger services not
               covered by other items listed elsewhere in these specifications.
               This item will allow for loading and unloading ship’s force,
               Service Representatives, & Sponsor’s material and equipment. The
               Port Engineer will coordinate all crane service requirements.
               Provide a detailed list of all hours used to complete this item.
               Furnish a credit for any unused portion of this item. If the
               requirements exceed those stated, a change order will be issued

8.0      General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 33 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 002      Furnish Port Engineer’s Office & Parking Spaces

1.0    Abstract
        Provide office space, equipment, supplies and secretarial services for
        use by the 3PSC Port Engineers and Secretary during the entire overhaul
        period.

2.0    References/Enclosures:   None

3.0 Item location/description
      3.1   Location: Office spaces shall be conveniently located near vessel.

        3.2     Description: Services shall commence five (5) calendar days before
                arrival of the ship and terminate three (3) days after redelivery
                of the ship. Secretarial services shall commence two (2) days
                before arrival of ship and terminate three (3) days after
                redelivery of the ship.

        3.3     Quantity: One office space (1) for Port Engineer, sized to
                accommodate four (4) personnel and their office equipment, minimum
                1000 square feet.

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services:        None

5.0    Notes:   None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:   None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work - The Port Engineer’s Office shall be independent from
       the MSC and Sponsor Office space.

        7.1 The Contractor shall provide a private office spaces for use by the
            3PSC Port Engineer.
              7.1.1 The Contractor shall provide the 3PSC Port Engineer
                    unobstructed access to the office on a 24 hour, 7 days a week
                    basis for the duration of the contract. Provide four (4)
                    keys for each lock or access door leading into the office
                    spaces.
              7.1.2 Provide office space for three (3) people, plus a secretary.
                    This space shall be separate from the MSC Rep & Sponsor’s
                    space. The 3PSC Port Engineer shall be given an office space
                    that can be separated from other offices within the space(s).
                    The office shall be heated, air-conditioned (to 70 deg.F).
                    Provide services to empty the wastebaskets daily and clean
                    the office two times a week.
              7.1.3 Provide 10 (ten) parking spaces for the Port Engineer and
                    ship’s staff within the confines of the shipyard, no greater
                    than 250 yards from the assigned offices. Spaces shall be
                    reserved with the following label plates affixed at the head
                    of each spot:
                    7.1.3.1 Parking spaces shall be available 24 hours per day,
                            7 days per week.
        7.2 The Contractor shall furnish the office with the following
             equipment:
                   A. Four (4) desks with central drawers and swivel chairs.
                   B. Three (3) four-drawer legal size filing cabinets.


3PSC                                                                Page 34 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                   C. Two (2) supply cabinets
                   D. One (1) dry photo copying machine capable of copying 10
                     pages per minute
                   E. One (1) conference table with eight (8) side chairs
                   F. One (1) cold bottled water dispenser, with a minimum of 20
                     gallons of bottled water supply per week.
                   G. Three (3) 20-gallon wastebaskets
                   H. Sufficient office supplies for four (4) personnel.
                   K. One (1) electric coffee maker with supplies (coffee,
                     filters, creamer, sugar, cups, stirrers)
                   L. One (1) full-size refrigerator
                   M. One (1) microwave
                   N . Miscellaneous Office Supplies ( Including but not limited
                     to: Pens, pencils, paper, Post-Its, Staplers, scissors,
                     Basic calculator, hanging file folders and manila folders
                     (100 each), 3 hole punch, Sharpie pens of various colors)
                   O. One 4’ x 4; dry erase board with erasable colored markers.

       7.3    Provide services to clean the washroom and shower two times a week.
              Provide linen towels, paper products and soap daily.

       7.4   The contractor shall provide safety equipment (i.e. hard hats,
             flashlights, batteries, safety eye shields or glasses, earplugs,
             etc,). Allow for twelve sets of safety equipment.

       7.5 The Contractor shall provide a full-time secretary, five (5) days a
           week, 8 hours a day, supplied with a full outfit of equipment and
           office furniture and supplies. The secretary shall be experienced,
           capable of organizing and running an office, and proficient in
           typing, word processing. The secretary shall be physically located
           in, adjacent to, or just outside the Port Engineer’s office. The
           secretary shall be proficient in Microsoft office applications, such
           as Word, Excel, Power point, and able to scan using Contractor
           furnished scanner and Adobe Acrobat Software.

       7.6 The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain the following
           office equipment for the Port Engineer's office:
               A.   Provide three (3) each complete desktop computers or
                    laptops. The computer shall be a minimum 1.6Ghz
                    microprocessor, 256 mb ram, 80Gb hard disk drive, DVD/CD RW
                    drive, 17” 1280 x 1024 color monitor, 56K fax/modem, 2
                    serial, 1 parallel, and mouse ports, sound cards with
                    speakers, enhanced keyboard, a high resolution mouse with
                    mouse pad, and all interconnecting cables. Loaded software
                    shall include the latest versions of Microsoft office XP,
                    MS-DOS, Microsoft Project, Norton utilities for windows XP
                    and Norton Anti-Virus for Windows XP, Volo View, Adobe
                    Acrobat, and AUTO CAD Light
               B.   Furnish the Port Engineer with the following for his
                    personal laptop:
                    1.   DSL or wireless internet at 11MBPS or greater.
                    2.   17” flat screen monitor
                    3.   Wireless mouse and keyboard
                    4.   Multipurpose color printer capable of printing 20 pages
                         per minute, scanning to either .pdf or .jpg format and
                         faxing




3PSC                                                               Page 35 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                    5.   Spare set of toner cartridges for both black&white and
                         color printouts
               C.   Four (4) printers, HP Laserjet printers capable of printing
                    20 pages per minute, scanning to either .pdf or .jpg format
                    and sending/receiving faxes.
               D.   One (1) facsimile machine, plain paper type with supplies.
               E.   One Wireless 802.11G Broadband Router, LinkSys WRT54G or
                    equal
               F.   Four Wireless 801.11G PCMCIA Cards, LinkSYS WPC54G or equal
               G.   High-Speed Internet Access via Cable or DSL
               H.   Email account for all computers for data transfer
               I.   RW 4.7 GB DVD’s, 100 each
               J.   High Volume Scanner and Adobe Acrobat Software

       7.7 The Contractor shall furnish the most recent ORIGINAL US Code CFR's,
           sections 33 and 46, ABS Rules for Steel Shipbuilding, IEEE
           requirements, and Grainger catalogs.   These items shall be turned
           over at the completion of the performance period

       7.8 The Contractor shall provide and arrange for services of “Federal
           Express”, or equal, overnight mail services for pick up and delivery
           of overnight express mail packages to the United States. For bidding
           purposes, estimate 2 (two) 3lb packages mailed twice per calendar
           week.

       7.9 The Contractor shall provide Federal Express shipping service and
           adequate packaging/boxes for shipping of all office files at the end
           of the contract performance period, as directed by the 3PSC Port
           Engineer.

8.0 General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 36 of 280
                                                4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 003      Shipboard Phone Services

1.0     Abstract
        Provide phone services to the ship for the duration of the overhaul
        period.

2.0    Reference/Enclosures:   None

3.0    Item Location/Description:     None

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment: None

5.0    Notes:   None

6.0 Quality assurance requirements:          None

7.0 Statement of work required

        7.1 Provide various telephone services
                  A. Provide six (6) cellular phones for the duration of the
                     overhaul period to be used by the Captain, Chief Engineer,
                     Mate on Watch, the two (2) MSC Port Engineers, & NAVO SNR.
                     All cellular phones shall be capable of international
                     dialing and shall be activated and available at least one
                     day prior to ship’s arrival and be available for one day
                     after completion of the overhaul period.

                    B. The contractor shall provide three (3) telephone land lines
                       with international dialing capability at the following
                       locations.
                             Master’s office
                             Chief engineer’s office
                             Senior NAVOCEANO rep’s office

        7.2     For bidding purposes, allow for $10,000 in rental and usage.
        7.3     The final price of the phone service shall be provided to the port
                engineer at the end of the performance period. A change order shall
                be issued to cover actual costs.

8.0 General Requirements:      None Additional




3PSC                                                                    Page 37 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 004      Provide Office Space for Sponsor Personnel

1.0    Abstract
             Provide office space, equipment and internet connection for use by
             the NAVO personnel during the entire overhaul period.

2.0    References/Enclosures:   None

3.0 Item location/description

       3.1    Location: Office spaces shall be conveniently located near
              the vessel

       3.2    Description: Services shall commence four (2) calendar days before
              arrival of the ship and terminate three (2) days after redelivery of
              the ship.

       3.3    Quantity: one (1) office space for NAVO Engineers, sized to
              accommodate eight (8) personnel and their office equipment. Office
              space should be a minimum of 1500 square feet.

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment: None

5.0    Notes:   None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:   None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work Required:
        7.1   The contractor shall provide private office spaces for use by
              the 8 NAVO Engineers. The office(s) shall be outfitted for the
              duration of the contract.

                7.1.1 The contractor shall provide the engineers unobstructed
                      access to the office on a 24 hour, 7 days a week basis for
                      the duration of the contract. Provide three (3) keys for
                      each lock or access door leading into the office spaces.

        7.2     The contractor shall furnish the office space with the
                following equipment:

                A. Eight (8) executive desks with central drawers and appropriate
                   chairs.
                B. Five (5) 20-gallon wastebaskets
                C. One (1) mid or full-size refrigerator
                D. One coffee maker with coffee, creamer, sugar and disposable
                   cups sufficient to last throughout the performance period.

        7.3     The contractor shall provide safety equipment (i.e. hard hats,
                flashlights, batteries, safety eye shields or glasses,
                earplugs, etc,). Allow for eight (8) sets of safety equipment.

        7.4     The contractor shall furnish, install and maintain the
                following office equipment within the office.
                7.4.1 One high Speed LAN router with 8 ports located throughout
                       the office space.



3PSC                                                                Page 38 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              7.4.2   Provide one (1) printer / fax / scanner combination
                      complete with paper and appropriate cables connected to
                      the high speed router. The preferred model is a Hewlett
                      Packard 6210. The contractor may provide a substitute of
                      equal capability as long as the software is compatible
                      with the user’s computers.

              7.4.2   One personal computer with monitor, keyboard and mouse
                      connected to the LAN Router. The computers shall be up to
                      date with high speed internet access.

              7.4.3   One package of compact discs. (cd/rw – 50 blanks with
                      cases)

       7.5    The contractor shall provide and maintain a wireless high speed
              internet service connection throughout the office.

       7.6    The Engineer’s laptops, or other computers shall connect directly
              to the contractor furnished internet cable connection using the
              standard computer LAN-ethernet (RJ-45) plugs and contractor
              furnished “CAT-5” cables.

       7.7    A LAN “guest connection” via the shipyard LAN is acceptable,
              provided e-mail and internet access is allowed.

       7.8    The contractor shall provide the services of a computer /LAN
              technician to assist with setup of the system and configuration
              of e-mail / internet access.

       7.9    The contractor shall provide five (5) independently accessible
              parking spaces adjacent to the engineer’s office.

       7.10   The contractor shall provide cleaning services and garbage
              collection for the office at a minimum of twice per week.

       7.11   Telephone service will be direct lines, not through contractor’s
              switchboard. Telephone services will be provided 24 hours per
              day, 7 days a weeks for the duration of the contract period.


8.0    General Requirements:   None additional




3PSC                                                              Page 39 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 005   Storage Of Refrigerated & Frozen Stores & Cleaning Of Lockers

1.0    Abstract
       This item provides storage of refrigerated and frozen stores, temporary
       removal of dry stores, and cleaning of 4 each lockers and associated
       shelving.

2.0 References/Enclosures:   None

3.0 Item Location/Description
      3.1 Locations: Freezer (3-65-4) and refrigerated storeroom (3-65-2)
      3.2 Quantity: Approximately two thousand pounds of refrigerated and
          four thousand pounds of frozen stores to be dealt with.
      3.3 Total square footage of areas is approximately 1000 square feet

4.0 Operator furnished equipment/material/service:     None

5.0 Notes: None

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:   None Additional

7.0 Statement of Work Required
      7.1 The contractor shall arrange for the services to provide
          transportation and storage of refrigerated and frozen stores.
      7.2 Upon arrival of the ship at the contractor’s facility, and prior to
          interruption of services during the drydocking shift, the Contractor
          shall temporarily remove all chill and frozen stores from ship to
          frozen and refrigerated food lockers. This shall be accomplished
          prior to drydocking.
          7.2.1 The refrigerated and frozen food lockers shall be equipped
                with remote temperature readouts & graph log showing
                continuous temperature monitoring.   These logs shall be
                turned in to the Port Engineer on a weekly basis.
          7.2.2 Refrigerated food shall maintained between 35-45 degrees F.
                The frozen food locker shall be maintained between -10 to 10
                degrees F.
          7.2.3 The lockers shall be secured with a pad lock. Keys shall be
                turned over to the Port Engineer.
      7.3 The ship’s chief steward and a contractor’s representative shall
          jointly inventory all stores as removed from refrigerated storerooms
          and loaded aboard refrigerated truck, and shall agree to same.
      7.4 After all stores are removed from ship, the Contractor shall
          temporarily remove all shelving and deck grating from chill and
          frozen lockers, thaw room, and convey to the shop or pier for
          cleaning.
      7.5 Using HP washers (3000psi), warm freshwater, and anti-bacterial
          soaps, wash all shelving and deck grating.
      7.6 Using hot water (min. of 170 deg. F) and foodsafe cleaners, scrub
          and thoroughly rinse inside of lockers. Ensure evaporator coils,
          fans, lights, and insulation are properly masked prior to cleaning
          lockers.
      7.7 Prove coil drain pans and lockers drain clear to satisfaction of
          3PSC Port Engineer.
      7.8 Furnish and install new wooden drain plugs with rope chain for all
          drains in the frozen and refrigerated lockers.



3PSC                                                             Page 40 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.9  After inspection by 3PSC Port Engineer, return shelving and grating
            to vessel and reinstall as per original.
       7.10 Upon completion of all shipyard work, refloating ship, re-crewing
            and start-up of ship’s refrigeration plant, when temperatures of
            refrigerated boxes are pulled down to temperatures safe for holding
            perishable foodstuffs, the contractor shall return, reinventory and
            restow stores to ship as original, within twenty-four hours of
            notification.
            7.10.1     The contractor shall be responsible to replace any
                       refrigerated or frozen stores condemned upon reinventory
                       at his own cost and expense.

       7.11 Furnish the necessary crane services and six laborers, including
            foreman, to assist in loading of ship's new provisions at the end of
            the performance period. Estimate 8 hours of crane service and 60
            hours of labor.

8.0 General Requirements:   None Additional.




3PSC                                                              Page 41 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 006   Receipt, Care, Handling & Shipment of GFM

1.0 Abstract
    This item describes the requirements associated with the care of Government
    Furnished Material (GFM), and Government Furnished Equipment (GFE).

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   Enclosure: Government Shipment Form

3.0    Receipt of Material
       3.1   The Contractor shall receive all GFM/GFE listed in this work
             package whether onboard the ship or delivered to the contractor by
             common carrier or other means.
       3.2   The Contractor shall inspect the GFM/GFE at the time of receipt,
             verify that the material received is the same as that indicated on
             the purchase order, and listed as GFM/GFE in the work package and
             note any damage or other adverse condition. The contractor shall
             notify the 3PSC Port Engineer immediately upon the arrival of
             GFM/GFE at the facility and shall report any observed damage of the
             GFM/GFE.
       3.3   The Contractor shall assume onboard spares are to be stored offsite
             until called upon by the Ship’s Supply Officer or Port Engineer.

4.0    Storage – A minimum of 2500 sf of SECURE storage space WITHIN the
       confines of the shipyard shall be available for the storage of GFE.
       4.1   The Contractor shall provide storage as classified below. (Access
             to storage in all cases shall be limited to authorized personnel):
             4.1.1   Outside storage: Outside storage shall be limited to
                     material not subject to environmental degradation.
                     Protection against physical abuse and theft is required.
                     Outside storage shall require prior approval of the 3PSC
                     Port Engineer.
             4.1.2   Inside storage: Inside storage shall be dry, protected,
                     ventilated and capable of being locked. The storage spaces
                     shall have floor, walls, roof, and lights.
             4.1.3   Heated and Ventilated: Heated and Ventilated storage shall
                     meet the requirements of article 4.1.2, of this item. In
                     addition, it shall be heated and ventilated to maintain
                     temperature at 65 to 85 degrees Fahrenheit year round.
             4.1.4   Environmentally controlled storage: Environmentally con-
                     trolled storage shall meet the requirements of article
                     4.1.2 of this item. In addition, it shall have a controlled
                     environment of 70 plus or minus 5 degrees Fahrenheit, and a
                     relative humidity not to exceed 50 percent.
             4.1.5   Locked: The designation "locked" means the storage has a
                     physical separation from any other storage. The physical
                     separation shall be by means of variable walls or expanded
                     metal, and shall be of such construction and arrangement as
                     to preclude unauthorized access to the material stored.
                     The contractor shall, in the case of locked storage,
                     provide both the security and the specified environmental
                     control.
             4.1.6   Security: The contractor shall be responsible for the
                     security of all classes of storage. Security measures



3PSC                                                             Page 42 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                      shall prevent unauthorized entry to storage area. Means to
                      accomplish security shall include high quality security
                      locks and roving security guards on twenty-four hour watch.
5.0    Protection
        5.1   The Contractor shall at all times protect GFM/GFE and shipboard
              spares from physical or other types of abuse. The Contractor shall
              use care in handling, moving, rigging, and transporting all GFM/GFE
              and shipboard spares. Damage occurring subsequent to receipt shall
              be corrected at the contractor's expense as approved by the 3PSC
              Port Engineer.
6.0    Handling
        6.1   The Contractor shall take delivery of all GFM whether stored on
              board or delivered to the Contractor's plant, and shall store,
              preserve and protect it, the contractor shall provide all labor and
              equipment necessary to deliver the GFM/GFE to the ship when needed.
        6.2   The contractor shall provide all labor and materials to assemble,
              test, and prepare GFM/GFE for installation, and convey all items,
              inclusive of shipboard repair and spare parts from the storage
              facility and place onboard the vessel.

7.0     Shipment of GFE/GFM to the United States of America
        7.1   During this performance period, the Contractor shall be tasked to
              return new and used equipment that is the property of the United
              States of America.
        7.2   The requirement to return shipments shall be called out in
              individual work items, or covered by change order as directed by
              the Port Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare, package and ship
              all materials in accordance with the following:
              A.    All package material shall be wooden crates, suitable for
                    ground shipment via ship, and certified PEST FREE.
              B.    Each package shall be affixed with the Government Shipment
                    Form (Enclosure 2.1) and filled out in its entirety. Form
                    shall be placed on the top of the package and protected from
                    weather and damage by placing it under a clear plastic
                    covering.
              C.    Each shipment form shall have ½” sized lettering.
              D.    Each shipment shall be sent via traceable and trackable means
                    to the United States of America. Examples include DHL and
                    Federal Express.
              E.    Each shipment’s airway tracking bill, bill of lading and any
                    other pertinent information shall be submitted to the Port
                    Engineer in a Report. Failure to provide this information
                    which may lead to lost time in Customs shall be subject to
                    penalty charges for Customs handling at cost.



7.0    Reports
        7.1    Receiving Report
               7.1.1   The Contractor shall prepare a receiving report for all
                       GFM/GFE and shipboard spares/repair parts delivered to the
                       Contractor. The report shall describe the condition of
                       equipment and shall list parts missing or in need of
                       repair. When the equipment is not in serviceable condition
                       as described in the report, the report shall be signed by
                       the 3PSC Port Engineer indicating joint survey. At the 3PSC
                       Port Engineer's direction, the contractor shall provide


3PSC                                                               Page 43 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                      necessary parts and repairs on a reimbursable basis,
                      otherwise, the contractor shall assume all liability for
                      corrective action required to repair the damage.
              7.1.2   The receiving report shall note all data with respect to
                      the GFM/GFE and spares/repair parts (i.e., quantity,
                      number, description, where stored, protection used, and
                      similar data).

       7.2   GFM/GFE Summary List
              7.2.1 The contractor shall prepare and update a summary of GFM/GFE
                    received from the start of the contract. The list shall
                    indicate description, date received, where stored, when
                    installed, condition, etc.

       7.3   Damage Report
              7.3.1 Any damage to GFM/GFE in the contractor's care shall be
                    reported in writing immediately to the 3PSC Port Engineer
                    for joint survey.

       7.4   Shipment Report
              7.3.1 Any packages shipped to the United States of America shall be
                    reported upon by providing the following to the Port
                    Engineer:
                    A.    Copy of Filled out Government Shipment Form (Encl 2.1)
                    B.    Copy of Airway Bill and tracking details
                    C.    Bill of Lading
                    D.    Full style address of receiving authority of shipment




3PSC                                                               Page 44 of 280
                                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




ENCLOSURE 2.1 – GOVERNMENT SHIPMENT FORM

 Country of Manufacture     Description of Goods          Weight (lbs)   Quantity      Unit Value (USD)   Total Value


 United States of America   United States Navy Official                                $                  $
                            Ship’s Parts in Transit




 3PSC                                                                               Page 45 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Item No. 007     Contamination Prevention During Shipyard Period

1.0    Abstract
       Prevent contamination of the ship's equipment and spaces during the
       availability at the contractor's facility.

2.0    References/Enclosures:    none

3.0    Item Location/Description
       3.1   Location: Throughout the ship.

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services: None

5.0    Notes : None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:   None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1 Prevent contamination of ship's equipment and space during abrasive
            blasting, vacuum blasting, scaling and surface cleaning operations
            whether on ship, adjacent piers, drydocks, or adjacent ships in the
            shipyard. The work contained in this item shall be performed upon
            arrival of the vessel at the Contractors facility and shall be
            maintained throughout the availability period. Work shall be
            performed whether blasting is taking place in Contractors facility
            or not.
              7.1.1    Protect and cover all the deck equipment, machinery, and
                       boats with heavy duty canvas; then cover the canvas
                       covering with heavy duty PVC sheets. All protection and
                       covering material shall be fastened onto the equipment,
                       machinery and boats to prevent contamination.
              7.1.2    Plug, blank, wrap, cover or mask openings and port lights
                       to prevent entry of contaminants into machinery,
                       equipment, electronic systems, valves, vents not in use
                       and other openings.

               7.1.3  Install new industrial foam filter material on the intake
                      and exhaust end of ventilation systems which will be in
                      service.
                      7.1.3.1 Renew filtering material once every 7 working
                           days.
             7.1.4    Removal of temporary coverings during the blasting
                      operations shall not be made without permission of the
                      3PSC Rep.
       7.2 Clean all the contaminated surfaces. Remove all the foreign matter,
           blasting material and debris off ship on a daily basis.
       7.3 Inspect the integrity of the protective covering at the beginning of
           each shift of blasting operation to ensure that equipment and
           machinery have not been infiltrated by contaminants. If
           contamination has occurred, notify the 3PSC Rep immediately and in
           writing and reseal to prevent further entry of contaminants. If
           contamination occurs during the clean-up, reconditioning and repairs
           shall be at contractor's expense.
       7.4 Remove protective coverings upon completion of availability and/or
           prior to light off. Inspect for presence of contaminants. Notify the
           3PSC Rep immediately and in writing, if contamination has occurred



3PSC                                                               Page 46 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



           prior to removal of the protective covering. Prior to removing the
           protective covering on machinery and equipment, vacuum clean and
           remove all blasting material and debris off the surfaces of
           protective covers to prevent foreign matter from falling into the
           system, equipment and machinery.

       7.5 SHIPBOARD CLEANING
           7.5.1   Upon arrival into the shipyard, a comprehensive examination
                   of all spaces shall be accomplished with the Shipyard's
                   Designated Representative, the Port Engineer, and the
                   Ship's Master. The purpose of this exam is to document the
                   "as found" condition of the vessel upon arrival.    Use of
                   photographs and video is encouraged, but not required.
           7.5.2   Approximately 5 days prior to the completion of the
                   shipyard period, a follow up tour of all areas examined
                   earlier shall be accomplished.
           7.5.3   The Contractor shall remove all dirt, debris, refuse, trash
                   from the ship. All of the decks and ladderwells shall be
                   swept down. All bulkheads, overheads, hand rails, piping,
                   shall be cleaned using soap and water to rid of all grease,
                   hand prints, etc..
           7.5.4   The contractor shall employ the services of an independent
                   industrial cleaning group consisting of 2 foremen and 8
                   workers for four (4)- 10 hour work days, complete with
                   janitorial supplies, to sanitize all bulkheads, overheads,
                   staterooms, restrooms, & ladderwells and adjacent areas
                   using disinfectants. All dirt and debris generated during
                   this overhaul period shall be removed in its entirety.
           7.5.5   The entire deck exterior, including bulkheads, portholes,
                   decks, etc… shall be freshwater washed using medium
                   pressure washers (2000-3000psi) to rid of all dirt and
                   debris. The Contractor shall take all precautions not to
                   discharge oily waste into the water and not to douse any
                   machinery, electrical outlets, equipment, etc…
                   7.5.5.1      All deck drains that are clogged shall be
                                cleaned out and proven cleared.
           7.5.6   Clean out all containment basins (fuel oil, lube oil, waste
                   oil) of dirt and debris. Drain any water or fluids found
                   in each bin.
           7.5.7   A final follow up examination shall be performed at the
                   conclusion of the cleaning phase. All discrepancies as
                   noted by the Port Engineer shall be attended prior to
                   vessel departure.

8.0    General Requirements:   None Additional.




3PSC                                                             Page 47 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 008      Shipboard Access & Security (Category B)

1.0    Abstract
       Shipboard access requirements and provision of shipboard security.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None Additional

3.0    Item Location/Quantity:    None

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services:       None

5.0    Notes:    None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:    None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1   Shipboard Access
             7.1.1 Prior to the commencement of the performance period, the
                   Contractor shall deliver to the 3PSC Rep a list of all
                   Contractor and subcontractor (including contractor furnished
                   tech reps) personnel who will be involved in the on board
                   performance of the contract.

                7.1.2 The contractor shall have and demonstrate, for approval, at
                      the time of submitting his lists of personnel as per
                      paragraph 7.1.1 above, that an effective employee
                      identification badge/pass and security system exists.

                7.1.3 The Master shall furnish to the contractor a list of all crew
                      members (and changes thereto as they occur), technical
                      representatives and other known visitors. These provided
                      lists shall be the basis for access to the ship.

                7.1.4 The 3PSC Rep may deny access to the ship by contractor
                      personnel if the personnel list required by paragraph 7.1.1
                      is not delivered as required.

       7.2   Shipboard Security
              7.2.1 A guard (firearms not required) shall be stationed at the
                    ship's gangway on a twenty-four hour basis. Guards must be US
                    citizens and have passed a trustworthy clearance. The guards
                    shall be other than full time production workers assigned for
                    this task on a temporary basis.
              7.2.2 The guards shall insure that only authorized personnel are
                    allowed onboard.
              7.2.3 Verification of each individual's identity shall be required
                    by presentation of a valid Contractor issued identification
                    card, Government issued ID card, or drivers license.
              7.2.4 Unannounced visitors not named on the list provided for that
                    shift shall be kept at the gangway area until their identity
                    is confirmed. The guard shall immediately notify the Ship's
                    Master or Mate on Watch.
              7.2.5 The guard shall be required to inspect all packages, suit
                    cases, briefcases, boxes, tools bags, and tool boxes going
                    onboard or ashore for; suspicious looking devices, weapons,



3PSC                                                                  Page 48 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                     explosives, government property and property of the crew, or
                     material not related to the work in progress.
               7.2.6 The guards shall have communications with the local police or
                     security organization in the event of an emergency. A
                     suitable communications device shall either be a mobile phone
                     or VHF radio.
       7.3   Armed Guard Security & Picket Boat – Required when the ship is
             either at layberth or floating drydock only.
             7.3.1   The Contractor shall furnish one each picket boat with armed
                     guard 24 hours per day to transit alongside the ship while
                     afloat or on floating dock.
             7.3.2   Floating booms or markers to designate a SECURE area around
                     the perimeter of the ship shall be employed while the ship is
                     at the contractor’s facility. Actual locations of boom
                     markers shall be agreed upon between the Contractor and
                     Ship’s Master.

8.0    General Requirements:   None Additional.




3PSC                                                                Page 49 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 009     Fire Protection, Gas Free Certification & Ship’s Safety

1.0    Abstract
             Furnish and install temporary fire protection capabilities on board
             ship. Designate a safety inspector (s) responsible for ship's safety
             on daily basis during availability period.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None

3.0    Item location/description
        3.1   Location: Throughout the ship.

4.0 Operator Furnished Material/Equipment/Service:       None

5.0    Notes:   None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:   None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work Required
        7.1 Conduct a fire fighting safety and fire prevention conference
             immediately after the ship arrival conference at the contractor's
             facility. Normally, this can be done in unison with the Arrival
             conference. At the conference, the Contractor shall address and
             familiarize the ship's force with the contractor's procedures for
             fire prevention and fire fighting and with the procedures that will
             be used by municipal fire fighting organizations as well as
             familiarize the contractor and the municipal fire organizations with
             the ship arrangement, shipboard fire prevention and fire fighting
             system, equipment; and organization and familiarize all parties with
             the scope of work and aspects of the work or ship conditions that
             have significance in fire prevention and fire fighting.

        7.2 The Contractor shall install two (2) each separated temporary fire
            water hose valve manifolds on board ship with at least two (2) 1 1/2
            inch, 100 feet hoses in each manifold station. Locations for the
            temporary fire water hose manifolds will be on the fantail and just
            forward of the Captains office on the 02 deck.
            7.2.1   In addition, install a shoreside fire main connection to the
                    deck connection that serves the shipboard firemain system.
                    The hose shall remain charged throughout the performance
                    period. Pressure requirements are 125psig via the 1-1/2"
                    shoreside connection.

        7.3   Provide and implement a procedure for determining whether or not an
              explosive or other dangerous atmosphere exists in spaces aboard the
              ship and for controlling hot work and entry to spaces to preclude
              damage to the ship or injury to personnel.
                7.3.1 Prior to start of any hot work, contractor shall clean and
                      gas free the involved spaces as required by the certified
                      marine chemist(s). Gas free in fuel oil, lube oil, ballast
                      water and potable water tanks shall be covered under separate
                      work items.
                      7.3.1.1 Costs associated for all other work items requiring
                      hot work certification   shall be borne by the Contractor.
                      It is up to the Contractor to include these costs either with
                      the individual work item or within this item.


3PSC                                                                Page 50 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             7.3.2 Provide the services of certified marine chemist to inspect
                   and check the hot work areas and issue marine chemist gas
                   free certificate(s) which specify "safe for people" and
                   “safe for hot work" conditions.
             7.3.3 Post a copy of the marine chemist gas free certificate at a
                   minimum of the following locations onboard the ship. They
                   are:
                   A. All gas free certified sites
                   b. Master’s office door
                   c. Gangway watch stand
                   d. 3PSC Port Engineer’s office
             7.3.4 All hot work spaces shall be rechecked by certified marine
                   chemist(s) and/or competent person. The gas free
                   certificate(s) shall be reissued every 24 hours.
             7.3.5 All the cleaned and gas freed areas/spaces covered under this
                   work item or other separate work items shall be maintained in
                   gas freed condition at all times.
       7.4   Provide and assign fire watch personnel for each welding, brazing,
             burning or other Contractor responsible hot work conditions.
             7.4.1 Fire watch personnel shall be exclusive of personnel
                   performing the actual hot work.
             7.4.2 Fire watch personnel shall be on location prior to the start
                   of hot work and shall remain on location a minimum of 30
                   minutes after the hot work is completed.
                     7.4.2.1    Provide and assign additional fire watch
                                personnel on the opposite side of a structure on
                                which welding, cutting, or heating is being
                                performed such as in shell, decks, overheads and
                                bulkheads plating.
             7.4.3 Fire watches shall be equipped with suitable fire
                   extinguishing equipment to combat and extinguish "A", "B",
                   and "C" class fires depending on the combustible materials
                   within range of the work. Equipment shall be maintained in
                   state of readiness for instant use.
                   Note: The ship's fire extinguishers shall not be used for
                   fire watch.
       7.5 Provide written notice for each job or separate area of hot work
           aboard ship to the 3PSC Port Engineer.
             7.5.1        The notice shall state a description of the work to be
                          done, the specific location of the hot work and
                          compartments adjacent to decks, bulkheads and similar
                          structure upon which work is to be accomplished, the
                          time hot work will commence and current gas free status
                          of the areas, whether the absence or existence of
                          combustible material exists, the action taken to
                          protect material from fire and equipment adjacent to
                          the hot work area from damage, the provision and
                          assignment of the fire watch, and affirmation that
                          conditions at work site (ventilation, temporary
                          lighting, access) permit the fire watch to observe all
                          areas where the hot work constitutes a fire hazard.

             7.5.2       The notice shall be signed by a supervisor specifically
                         designated and responsible for coordination of hot work
                         and fire watch requirements.




3PSC                                                              Page 51 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             7.5.3       The notice shall be effective for 24 hours unless a
                         shorter period is specified in the contract or the gas
                         free status of work area or system change requiring
                         stopping the work. A new notice is required if work is
                         interrupted due to loss of gas free status.

       7.6  Oxygen, acetylene, gas and flammable material shall be secured off
            ship at the end of each working shift.
       7.7 When gas cylinders are required on board ship, they shall be located
            on the weather decks. The number of in-use cylinders shall be
            limited to those which are required for work in progress and which
            have a pressure regulator connected to the cylinder valve. On board
            reserve gas cylinders shall not exceed one-half the number of in-use
            cylinders and shall be located in a remote area of the weather
            decks.
              7.7.1       When not in use, gas cylinders on board shall have
                          lines disconnected, protective cover (cap) in place and
                          shall be secured and in an upright position.
       7.8 In winter and when temperature falls below 30 degrees Fahrenheit,
            contractor shall accomplish the following to prevent freezing
            damage.
              7.8.1       Provide and install temporary space heaters in all
                          machinery spaces. The size and number of heaters in
                          each compartment shall be adequate to maintain the
                          spaces above 60 degrees Fahrenheit with ventilation
                          system secured.
              7.8.2       Provide and install system bleed line or recirculating
                          line on all temporary water hoses, steam hoses and air
                          hoses to prevent freezing and maintain the system in
                          service.
8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 52 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 010       Preparation of Weight & Moment Report

1.0    Abstract
             Prepare a weight and moment report which reflects all the work
             accomplished during the availability having weight and moment
             impact.

2.0 References/Enclosures
    2.1   Weight and Moment Report Form

3.0 Item Location/Description:      None.

4.0 Operator Furnished Equipment/Material/Service:         None.

5.0       Notes:    None.

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:      None Additional

7.0 Statement of Work Required
      7.1 Within fifteen (15) days after completion of the availability, the
          Contractor shall prepare and submit two (2) copies of enclosure
          2.2.1 to the Port Engineer for review and approval.
      7.2 The weight report shall reflect all removals, additions and
          relocations resulting from modifications made during the
          availability to the light ship.
      7.3 Weight shall be in long tons to two (2) decimal places. Vertical,
          longitudinal and transverse levels shall be in feet to two (2)
          decimal places. Moment shall be to the nearest whole number.
          Datums shall be the same as in the trim and stability booklet. The
          data shall be totaled.
      7.4 The weight report shall be typewritten. Three (3) originals shall be
          delivered to the Port Engineer.
      7.5 The weight report shall be prepared by a naval architect or marine
          engineer. It shall contain the following certification in the lower
          right corner:
          “The undersigned certifies that the weight report herein is a true
          representation of the weight and moment effects of all changes made
          to the vessel.”

        7.6 The originals shall be signed and stamped by the certifying
            authority.

8.0 General Requirements:      None Additional




3PSC                                                                 Page 53 of 280
       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




3PSC                           Page 54 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 011 Dock Trial
1.0   Abstract
      Provide labor, material and equipment to accomplish a dock trial.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None

3.0    Item Location/Description:    None.

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Service:        None

5.0.   Notes:      None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:   None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work Required – The dock trial shall take place no later
       than 5 days prior to the completion of this performance period.
       7.1   In conjunction with work performed in repairs to the ships
             equipment as set forth in this specification and all other work
             accomplished by the contractor, a dock trial shall be held.
             7.1.1 All main engines, generators and propulsion motors shall be
                   load tested during this dock trial.
       7.2   The contractor shall furnish the necessary services of qualified
             personnel to accomplish this dock trial.
       7.3   Arrange and furnish additional lines, line handlers, and tugs, if
             found necessary, to be placed alongside during the testing of all
             propulsion systems.   Mooring of the vessel shall be accomplished
             to the satisfaction of the Master and Port Engineer prior to
             conducting dock trials.
             7.3.1 Allow for conducting a dock trial for 6 continuous hours and
                   doubling of all mooring lines to perform run-in on main
                   propulsion motors of up to 500RPM while alongside.
       7.4   After completion of the trial, if any equipment worked on by the
             contractor is found to be defective, corrective measures shall be
             taken to place the equipment in good order prior to sea trial.

8.0 General Requirements:   None Additional.




3PSC                                                                  Page 55 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 012    Sea Trial

1.0    Abstract
        Provide labor, material and equipment to accomplish a sea trial.

2.0 References/Enclosures: None

3.0 Item Location/Description:    None.

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services:
    4.1   Heat Seekers Infrared Imaging Surveyor

5.0. Notes:    None

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:    None Additional

7.0 Statement of Work Required The sea trial shall take place no later than 3
    days prior to the completion of this performance period.
    7.1 The Contractor shall arrange the necessary tugs, pilots, and
         linehandlers to accommodate both departure and arrival in support of
         this sea trial.
    7.2 The sea trial crew shall consist of the following Contractor
         personnel:
             a. One Supervisor, or designated appointee
             b. Mechanical foreman and 1 mechanic
             c. Electrical foreman and 1 electrician (refer to Item 301)
             d. Infrared Imaging Surveyor (Provided by Contractor)
             e. Magnetic Compass Adjuster (provided by Contractor)
             7.2.1 Two spare staterooms shall be furnished to accommodate the
                   Contractor's personnel.
    7.3 The sea trial shall commence with departure at 0700 and the ship shall
         return to meet the pilot at 1800.
    7.4 The sea trial shall take place no later than 72 hours prior to the end
         of the performance period.
    7.5 All systems worked on during the performance period shall be inspected
         during this sea trial. This shall include the operation of both pit
         swords to be lowered and raised while underway.
    7.6 This sea trial shall include the close monitoring of the main
         propulsion motor bearing seal assemblies, checking for leaks, and
         tightening as required.
    7.7 Referencing pg 34 of Notice to Shipping NO.1-2006: "Residual deviation
         of the magnetic compass must be verified to be less than 7 degrees by
         swinging the vessel on various headings. Such verification by a
         recognized calibration authority must have been accomplished, and an
         accurate deviation table issued…
         If necessary, the compass must be adjusted to reduce the observed
         deviation to less than 7 degrees.
    7.8 During the sea trial, the Contractor shall furnish the services of a
         company familiar with adjusting magnetic compasses at sea. The vessel
         shall be swung in such a fashion to accomplish the calibration of the
         magnetic compass. The final deviations noted shall be listed on a
         deviation table furnished by the Contractor and turned over to the
         Master.
           7.8.1   The Service Report, to be furnished by the Contractor, shall
                   list the work performed and the final deviation settings.



3PSC                                                               Page 56 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



8.0 General Requirements:   None Additional.




3PSC                                                             Page 57 of 280
                                               4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 013         Hazardous Waste Management and Disposal (CATEGORY B)

1.0     Abstract
        The Contractor shall be prepared to provide services to remove, handle,
        store, transport, and dispose of any hazardous wastes if they are found
        on the vessel during this availability.

2.0    References/Enclosures
        2.1 References:
              2.1.1 Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
              2.1.2 10 USC 7311
              2.1.3 Applicable hazardous waste manifest form

3.0    Item Location/Description
        3.1 Location: Throughout the ship

4.0 Operator Furnished/Equipment/Services:        None

5.0    Notes:   None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:      None Additional

7.0    Statement Of Work Required

       7.1 Provide all labor, material, special equipment (crane), make all
           removals and restorations, remove and replace interferences, rig and
           unrig, stage and unstage, make all disassemblies and subsequent
           reassembles to accomplish this specification item.
       7.2 Remove, handle, store, transport and dispose of hazardous materials
           created during the performance of repairs, modifications and
           installations.
       7.3 Procedure for initiating work and accounting
           7.3.1   If during the repair, modification or installation of
                   equipment under a work item in this spec, hazardous materials
                   are discovered, the contractor is required to notify the port
                   engineer in writing. The report is to include the material
                   description, quantity and estimated cost for removal and
                   disposal.

             7.3.2     Material is only to be removed, handled, stored, transported
                       and disposed of when authorized in writing by the Port
                       Engineer in the form of a signed memo.

             7.3.3     The contractor is to submit weekly reports itemizing all
                       materials being handled as hazardous waste up to that time.
                       Upon completion of the work package, the contractor shall
                       furnish the 3PSC Port Engineer with an itemized list of all
                       hazardous materials removed, handled, stored, transported and
                       disposed of together with the applicable manifests for each
                       item.

       7.4    Procedure for working with hazardous waste
              7.4.1   The Contractor shall have in place an effective hazardous
                      waste management and control system for the removal,




3PSC                                                                   Page 58 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                      handling, storage, transportation and disposal of hazardous
                      waste.
              7.4.2   The control system shall ensure that all hazardous wastes are
                      removed, handled, stored, transported, and disposed of in
                      accordance with references 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 and all applicable
                      federal, state, and local rules and regulations.
              7.4.3   Remove, handle, store, transport and dispose of all hazardous
                      waste identified in section 3.3 as co-generated. Complete all
                      documentation related to disposal as follows:
                        a.   The contractor shall first complete documentation
                             related to disposal of hazardous waste with an EPA
                             identification number issued to the contractor pursuant
                             to 2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Cite in the remarks block the EPA
                             identification number issued to the navy pursuant to
                             2.1.1 and 2.1.2.
              7.4.4   Hazardous waste as defined by 2.1.1, that is a combination of
                      hazardous waste generated solely by the actions of contractor
                      personnel, where a combination of the hazardous waste cannot
                      be avoided by reasonable hazardous waste management or work
                      practices. Hazardous waste includes materials from the ship's
                      systems, operations, and structure that is first subjected to
                      regulation as a hazardous waste by the actions of the
                      contractor in performing the work specified in this contract.

       7.5 Hazardous waste, as identified in reference 2.1.1, which may or may
           not be expected to be produced during performance of this contract is
           identified below.
           7.5.1 The contractor shall submit a unit price for all work required
                 in this item for each type of hazardous material as per the
                 schedule below.
           7.5.2 The following estimated quantities and hazardous material types
                 are listed at the end of this work item.

       7.6   Ship hazardous waste to a site authorized to accept the identified
             waste. Submit four (4) legible copies of reference 2.1.3 signed by
             owner or operator of disposal facility to the Port Engineer within 48
             hours from receipt from owner or operator of disposal facility.

       7.7   Submit to the Port Engineer four (4) copies of the report listing type
             and amount, and generator assignment of hazardous waste removed during
             performance of this job order.

       7.8   Dispose of contractor hazardous waste in accordance with reference
             2.1.1.

       7.9   Submit four (4) legible copies of reference 2.1.3 signed by owner or
             operator of disposal facility to the Port Engineer.

       7.10 Nothing contained in their work item shall relieve the contractor from
            complying with applicable federal, state, and local laws, codes,
            ordinances, and regulations, including the obtaining of licenses and
            permits, in connection with hazardous waste handling and disposal in
            the performance of this contract.

8.0    General Requirements:   None Additional.




3PSC                                                                Page 59 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




PRICING FORMAT                              UNIT PRICE           TOTAL PRICE
PARAGRAPH / DESCRIPTION                     ( in gallons or
                                            lbs)

A.   BILGE WATER

B.   OIL/WATER

C.   ETHYLENE GLYCOL

D.   CLEANING SOLVENTS

E.   FLUOROCARBONS

F.   OIL (SYNTHETIC)

G.   PAINTS

H.   PAINTS

I.   PAINT STRIPPER

J.   PETROLEUM SLUDGES

K.   SUPER CHLORINATED WATER




OFFERS MUST PROVIDE BOTH A UNIT PRICE AND AN EXTENDED PRICE IN EACH OF THE
BLOCKS. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RENDER YOUR OFFER UNACCEPTABLE.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

TYPE                                QTY


BILGE WATER                         5000 GALLONS
OIL/WATER                           5000 GALLONS
ETHYLENE GLYCOL                     1000 GALLONS
CLEANING SOLVENTS                   50 GALLONS
FLUOROCARBONS                       250 POUNDS
OIL (SYNTHETIC)                     1000 GALLONS
PAINTS                              80 GALLONS
PAINTS                              80 GALLONS
PAINT STRIPPER                      80 GALLONS
PETROLEUM SLUDGES                   300 GALLONS
SUPER CHLORINATED WATER             1000 GALLONS


OFFERS MUST PROVIDE BOTH A UNIT PRICE AND AN EXTENDED PRICE IN EACH OF THE
BLOCKS. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RENDER YOUR OFFER UNACCEPTABLE.




3PSC                                                              Page 60 of 280
                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




100 Series Items - Hull




3PSC                                              Page 61 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 101     Clean, Gas Free, And Pressure Test Various Tanks, Voids And
Spaces (ABS)

1.0    ABSTRACT
       Various ballast, fuel, voids and cofferdams are due for inspection,
       cleaning and pressure testing for completion of the 2nd special survey
       cycle.

2.0    References/Enclosures:
        2.1 The ship's Capacity Plan, NAVSEA drawing number 085 6783017 is
            onboard and available for use.

3.0    Location/Description:

       Ballast tanks & Void Spaces
        Location     Tank Type           Capacity (98%)        Inspection Criteria
                                         in US Gallons
        02-80-0       Anti-roll          34,506 gallons        None at this time
        4-B-0         Ballast            10,137 gallons        Examination
        (forepeak)
        4-24-1        ballast            28,155   gallons      Examination
        4-24-2        Ballast            28,155   gallons      Examination
        4-112-0       Ballast            37,166   gallons      None at this time
        4-120-1       Ballast            27,736   gallons      Exam and hydro as a
                                                               result of vent pipe
                                                               renewal
        4-120-2       Ballast            27,736 gallons        Examination
        4-136-0       Ballast            22,946 gallons        None at this time
        4-136-1       Ballast            7963 gallons          None at this time
        4-136-2       Ballast            7963 gallons          Examination
        4-A-0         Void               2967 gallons          Examination
        4-35-0        Void               23,325 gal            Examination
        4-112-01      void (x connect)   37,685 gal            Examination
        4-112-02      Void (x connect)   37,685 gal            Examination
        4-132-0       void (x connect)   5679 gal              Examination



       Fuel Tanks
        Location      Tank Type          Capacity (98%)        Inspection Criteria
                                         in US Gallons
        4-10-0        Fuel   Oil         12,758 gal            Examination
        4-35-1        fuel   oil         38,838 gal            Examination    &   Hydro
        4-35-2        fuel   oil         38,838 gal            Examination    &   Hydro
        4-54-1        fuel   oil         23,302 gal.           Examination    &   Hydro
        4-54-2        Fuel   Oil         23,302 gal            Examination    &   Hydro
        4-65-1        fuel   oil         20,068 gal.           Examination    &   Hydro
        4-65-2        fuel   oil         20,068 gal.           Examination    &   Hydro
        4-65-3        fuel   oil         16,142 gal.           Hydro
        4-65-4        Fuel   oil         16,142 gal            Hydro
        4-80-1        fuel   oil         17,085 gal.           Examination    & Hydro
        4-80-2        fuel   oil         17,085 gal.           Examination    & Hydro
        4-80-3        fuel   oil         7,228 gal.            Examination    & Hydro



3PSC                                                               Page 62 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       4-80-4          fuel oil           7,228 gal.           Examination & Hydro
       4-91-1          fuel oil           7,161 gal.           Examination & Hydro
       4-91-2          fuel oil           7,161 gal.           Examination & Hydro
       4-101-5         fuel oil service   4,676 gal.           Examination
       4-101-8         fuel oil service   4,676 gal            Examination
       4-104-0         Fuel Oil           32,340 gal           Hydro
       4-104-1         Fuel Oil           21,370 gal           Examination & Hydro
       4-104-2         fuel oil           21,370 gal.          Examination & Hydro
       4-120-3         fuel oil           15,099 gal           None at this time
       4-120-4         fuel oil           15,099 gal           Examination
       01-116-2        EDG Fuel Tank      650 gal              None at this time


       Miscellaneous   Tanks
        Location       Tank Type          Capacity (98%)       Inspection Criteria
        2-136-2        Z Drive Gear Oil   616 Gal              None At This Time
        4-101-4        Hydraulic Oil      2418 Gal             None At This Time
        4-101-2        Oily Waste         2712 Gal             None At This Time
        4-101-3        Waste Oil          4246 Gal             None At This Time
        4-76-0         Sewage Holding     6,123 gal.           Examination & Hydro

4.0      Government Furnished Equipment: None

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements
    6.1   The Chief Engineer shall be present for soundings of all tanks and
          shall attest to the quantity of fuel oil removed in writing.
    6.2   All tanks are to be inspected by the USCG Inspector and ABS Surveyor
          unless listed otherwise in the specification.

7.0 Statement of Work
      7.1 Upon vessel arrival, Contractor shall arrange to have all tanks
          sounded in the presence of the ship’s force.
      7.2 Fuel, Lube, Waste Oil and Oily Waste Tanks - Once the amount of
          fluids to be offloaded has been agreed to by the Contractor and
          Chief Engineer, the Contractor shall commence pumping off all fuel
          into a barge or shoreside storage facility. The normal practice has
          been to remove the access covers and pump direct to the storage
          facility. Use of ship’s fuel transfer system shall not be
          authorized.
            7.2.1 Prior to pumping ashore, the receiving tanks shall be
                  inspected by the Port Engineer for cleanliness.   It is
                  estimated that the ship shall have 170,000 gallons of Marine
                  Gas Oil (MGO) onboard.
            7.2.2 A loss of approximately 3% due to transfer is allowable
                  during both offloading and onloading evolutions.
            7.2.3 Once all of the fuel has been offloaded, soundings shall be
                  taken of the receiving facility and amount stored shall be
                  agreed to by Chief Engineer and Contractor.
            7.2.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning all residual
                  in the fuel tanks and wiping down all bulkheads, ladders,
                  stringers, to permit a thorough inspection of each fuel tank.
                  The tanks shall be dry and free of fuel, water, or sludge.
                  All contaminated oil and sludge shall be disposed of in
                  accordance with Hazardous Waste Disposal Requirements listed


3PSC                                                               Page 63 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                   elsewhere in this specification. Costs for cleaning and
                   disposal within these tanks shall be included in contractor’s
                   price quote for this item.
             7.2.5 The sounding tubes and vent pipes shall be inspected and
                   proven clear.
             7.2.6 During the offloading and onloading of shipboard fuel,
                   continuous drip samples shall be taken and landed ashore for
                   fuel analysis. Three each samples shall be drawn
                   concurrently during the offloading and onloading evolutions.
                   7.2.6.1 One sample shall be turned over to the Chief
                            Engineer, the other shall be held by the Contractor,
                            and the 3rd sample shall be sent ashore for fuel
                            analysis.
                   7.2.6.2 Results of fuel analysis during onload and
                            offloading of fuel shall be submitted to the Port
                            Engineer.
       7.3   Temporarily remove ALL manhole accesses for the tanks, voids, and
             cofferdams. (i.e. some tanks have more than ONE access).
       7.4   BALLAST TANKS - The Contractor shall commence pumping off all
             ballast water and dispose of in accordance with local and federal
             environmental rules and regulations. This includes the Ship’s
             Ballast Water Management Plan Requirements. Each tank shall be
             dried in order to permit a thorough inspection of all bulkheads,
             longitudinals, and sideshell. Any residual left in the tanks shall
             be cleaned by the Contractor so that all areas within the tank are
             dry and ready for inspection.    Costs for cleaning and disposal
             within these tanks shall be included in contractor’s price quote
             for this item.
             7.4.1 The ballast tank internals shall be cleaned by the Contractor
                   so that all dirt, mud, water and debris is removed and shall
                   allow for a visual inspection of the coatings and steel
                   integrity.
             7.4.2 The sounding tubes and vent pipes shall be inspected and
                   proven clear.
       7.5   All ballast tanks shall be cleaned and dried to permit a thorough
             examination by the ABS Surveyor.
       7.6   A certified marine chemist shall be used for all inspections and
             SAFE FOR ENTRY certifications. Certificates signed by the marine
             chemist shall be posted at the gangway, and at any space prior to
             regulatory body and shipboard personnel entering.
             7.6.1 All SAFE FOR ENTRY spaces shall be rechecked by the Marine
                   Chemist and/or the designated Competent person every 24 hours
                   after the original inspection.
                   The daily inspection sheet shall be posted at the gangway and
                   each space, signed and dated.    Contact information of the
                   Competent Person or Marine Chemist shall be listed in the
                   event of a discrepancy as to when the tanks were last
                   inspected/tested.
             7.6.2 After any vessel movement or transfer of fluids, a certified
                   marine chemist shall be required to accomplish the
                   reinspections. NO EXCEPTIONS.
       7.7   Furnish the Port Engineer and the Master with a gas free
             certificate for the entire vessel signed by a certified chemist
             prior to start of each calendar day. The contractor shall also
             post a signed copy of the gas free certificate at the gangway.
       7.8   Tanks, voids and cofferdams shall be left clean and dry and ready
             for inspection. This includes having sufficient ventilation and


3PSC                                                             Page 64 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              safety lighting temporarily installed in each to permit a complete
              inspection by the Port Engineer, ABS Surveyor and USCG Inspector.
              Costs for cleaning and disposal within these tanks shall be
              included in contractor’s price quote for this item.
              7.8.1         Perform an internal visual inspection of all tanks,
                            voids and cofferdams listed in paragraph 3.0 in the
                            presence of the Port Engineer and ABS surveyor
              7.8.2 The tanktop covers shall be ready for reinstallation upon
                     completion of inspection.
       7.9    Hydrostatic Testing: At the conclusion of the internal
              examinations, perform a hydrostatic test using salt or fresh
              water on each ballast tank in the presence of the ABS Surveyor
              and the Port Engineer.
              All fuel tanks shall be pressure tested to 1.5 psi using dry air.
              Each tank shall be held under pressure for approximately 1 hour.
              The Contractor shall allow for inserting blanks in the overflow
              vents, fill and return piping, in order to ensure air tight
              integrity.
              7.9.1 All boundaries surrounding each tank shall be made
                     accessible for the ABS Surveyor and Port Engineer in order
                     to witness during the hydrostatic testing.
              7.9.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the overflow of water from
                     the overflow vents is directed overboard, and NOT onto the
                     decks.
              7.9.3 Prior to filling the tanks, the covers shall be reinstalled
                     and secured using new gaskets and grommets. All threaded
                     fittings shall be wire brush cleaned, and coated with Anti-
                     Seize.
       7.10   Upon successful hydrotesting and inspecting of the tanks, the
              Contractor shall restore the tank levels to the required levels
              to fulfill trim and stability requirements for undocking. Fuel
              Tank Soundings - The soundings as found prior to docking shall be
              followed in order to restore to original condition.
       7.11   Upon completion of all testing/inspections, reinstall all manhole
              covers using new stainless fasteners, new rubber gaskets (ballast
              tanks) and new cork gaskets (fuel tanks) and grommets.
              7.10.1        Wire brush clean using a brass brush and apply a coat
                            of Anti-Seize on all threaded fittings prior to
                            reinstalling.
              7.10.2        All manhole cover rings outfitted with threaded
                            fittings to accept tiedown bolts or screws are to be
                            cleaned of all dirt/debris and tapped to clear
                            threads prior to installing new fasteners.

       7.12   TEST/INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS to be arranged by the Contractor:
              a.   Visual inspection of all tanks, voids and cofferdams listed
                   in paragraph 3.0 by the Port Engineer, ABS Surveyor and USCG
                   Inspector.
              b.   Hydrostatic tests of tanks listed in the presence of the ABS
                   Surveyor and Port Engineer.
              c.   Tank Close out Inspection - ALL TANKS shall be inspected by
                   the Port Engineer prior to final closing. Final closing
                   means that once the Port Engineer has exited the tank for the
                   final time, the tank top cover shall be reinstalled(with new
                   gaskets/grommets, and dressed threads) and secured.
       7.13   REPORTS/DELIVERABLES to be furnished by the Contractor.




3PSC                                                              Page 65 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             a.   Listing of all tanks inspected and hydrostatically tested in
                  the presence of the ABS Surveyor &/or USCG Inspector.
                  NOTE: Signatures and dates attesting to the witnessing
                  thereof shall be included for each tank, void, cofferdam,
                  etc…….
             b.   Fuel Oil Sample Test Results during offloading and onloading
                  evolutions


8.0    General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 66 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 102    Various Hull Gaugings (ABS) – 2nd Special Survey

1.0    Abstract
       Perform non-destructive hull thickness readings in accordance with the ABS
       rules and regulation.

2.0 References/Enclosures
    2.1   The ABS Rules and Regulations for Steel Shipbuilding Inspection
          Requirements are referenced.
    2.2   ABS hull plate thickness report form found in the ABS Rules Part 7,
          Section 6 Report on Thickness Measurement of Bulk Carriers – Non
          Double Skin And General Dry Cargo Vessels, Report Form TM2-BC(ii)
          titled Report on Thickness Measurement of All Shell and Deck Plating
          (one, two or three transverse sections)

3.0    Item Location/Description:
        3.1   3 each belts on 2 ft. Centers at frames 34, 70, and 114
        3.2   Estimate total number of shots at 800

4.0 Government Furnished Material: None

5.0 Notes:
    5.1    An ABS certified ultrasonic gauging facility shall be used for all
           inspections and certifications. NO EXCEPTIONS

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements
      All gauging reports are to be in accordance with ABS Report Form
      Requirements and are subject to review and approval from the ABS surveyor
      and Port Engineer.

7.0 Statement of Work Required
    7.1   Provide the services of an ultrasonic gauging facility to take and
          record steel thickness readings in the locations listed in paragraph
          3.0. Belt gaugings shall be taken on 2 ft centers.
    7.2   Gauging shall commence within 7 days after arrival and be completed
          within 14 days after start date in order to address any possible
          steel wastage that requires immediate attention.
    7.3   Reports
          7.3.1   Furnish three hard copies and one electronic copy (in .pdf
                  format or MS Word format) of a service report listing the
                  following information:
                  7.3.1.1 Gauging facility
                  7.3.1.2 Ship location
                  7.3.1.3 Test dates
                  7.3.1.4 Items list of gauging locations, readings to the
                          thousandth inch, and original plating thickness as
                          per ABS report form
                  7.3.1.5 A schematic of the ship and compartments that
                          identify exact locations of all gaugings.

8.0 General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 67 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 103     Convert Fuel Oil Tanks to Lube Oil Storage Tanks

1.0    Abstract
       This item describes the conversion of two fuel oil tanks to lube oil
       tanks.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   MSC Drawing No. 264-8389768 Fuel Oil to Lube Oil Tank Conversion
       2.2   NAVSEA Dwg No. 541-7400545 Fuel Oil Service & Transfer Diagram
       2.3   NAVSEA Dwg No. 262-7400533 Lubrication Systems Diagram
       2.4   NAVSEA Dwg No. 506-6782842 Vents, Fills and Sounding Diagram

3.0    Item Location/Description
       3.1   Location/Quantity
             3.1.1    Location
                      a.   Main Generator Rm (3-90-0)
             3.1.2    Quantity: 2 fuel tanks
                      a.   Fuel Oil Tank (4-91-1) (6,941 Gallons)
                      b.   Fuel Oil Tank (4-91-2) (6,941 Gallons).

       3.2     Item Description/Manufacturer's Data
               3.2.1 Material/Components, including specific quantities and
                     manufacturer make and model numbers, necessary to
                     accomplish work required by this work item, are included in
                     the Bill of Material List of Reference 2.1 above.

               3.2.2 Quantities specified in the Bill of Material List of
                     Reference 2.1 are considered estimates. The contractor
                     shall provide the exact quantities and additional material
                     such as fittings, weld material, pipe hangers, etc., which
                     are not included in the Bill of Material Lists of Reference
                     2.1.

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment: None

5.0    Notes
       5.1   The contractor shall provide all labor and material to accomplish
             this specification item.
       5.2   The contractor shall provide a Marine Chemist to certify the
             tanks and spaces are gas free and safe for men and safe for hot
             work. The contractor shall be responsible to keep and maintain
             areas free of oil and water and maintained gas free for hot work
             and shall offload and dispose of ship generated slops through the
             end of testing. On each calendar day, the Contractor shall
             furnish the Port Engineer with a gas free certificate for the
             space and tanks. The Contractor shall also post a copy of the
             gas free certificate at the gangway watch station.
       5.3   The contractor and all subcontractors, regardless of tier, are
             advised to review other Work Items under this contract to
             determine their effect on the work required under this Work Item.
       5.4   Minor deviations from drawings are authorized if appearance,
             function, and strength are not impaired.
       5.5   All ships structure, hull insulation, sheathing, paint, etc.
             damaged by this installation shall be repaired similar to the
             original or surrounding materials.



3PSC                                                               Page 68 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       5.6   Prior to starting any pipe work, ensure all affected piping
             and/or components are isolated from the system, depressurized,
             drained, and ready for hot work.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements: All work shall be accomplished to the
       satisfaction of the Port Engineer and attending ABS surveyor.

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK
       7.1   Arrangements/Outfitting: None
       7.2   Structural: None
       7.3   Mechanical/Fluids
             7.3.1    Removals
             a.    The Contractor shall clean and gas free the two fuel oil
                   tanks noted in section 3.1.2. The specified tanks,
                   including air vents, sounding pipes, filling and suction
                   lines shall be thoroughly cleaned. Prior to cleaning of the
                   tanks, the ship’s Engine Department will transfer and strip
                   the fuel oil from the tanks. For bidding and estimating
                   purposes, the Contractor shall assume each tank will have
                   approximately 100 gallons of diesel remaining in the tank
                   and/or residual fuel in the piping.

             b.    Remove existing piping, valves and fittings using Reference
                   2.1 as guidance. Immediately upon removal of piping, cap
                   or seal the openings in the remaining piping to maintain
                   system cleanliness and prevent contamination of surrounding
                   area.

             7.3.2    Installations
             a.    Install new blank flanges on the Fuel Oil Manifold using
                   Reference 2.1 as guidance.
             b.    Install new piping, valves and fittings for the suction and
                   fill lines for tank 4-91-1 using Reference 2.1 as guidance.
             c.    Install new piping, valves and fittings for the suction and
                   fill lines for tank 4-91-2 using Reference 2.1 as guidance.
             d.    Install flange shields on all pipe flanges in accordance
                   with the requirements of MSC GTR 23. Flange spray shields
                   shall be in compliance with ABS and SOLAS Fire retardance
                   requirements.

       7.4   Electrical: None
       7.5   Electronics: None
       7.6   Preparation of Drawings:
             7.6.1 Prepare “red-lined” markups (three hard copies - 11” X 17”
                   or larger as required for clarity, and one electronically
                   scanned copy) of the following drawings showing all new and
                   modified installation accomplished by this work item.
                   Drawings as a minimum shall include:
                       Fuel Oil Service & Transfer Diagram
                       Lubrication Systems Diagram
                       Vents, Fills and Sounding Diagram

       7.7   Inspection/Test
             7.7.1    Preliminary Tests
                   Contractor shall conduct preliminary tests on all completed
                   work before calling for an official test.



3PSC                                                             Page 69 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




             7.7.2      Completion Test
                     The Contractor shall conduct a completion test that
                     verifies that all aspects of the work item have been
                     completed. For compartments, this means all equipment,
                     electrical, overheads, etc. is installed and tested and
                     proves the compartment is complete and ready for service.
                     A completion test may include a series of functional,
                     operational, and structural tightness tests.

             7.7.3      Welding Test
                     Visually test new, modified, or repaired welds in
                     accordance with ABS rules and regulations.

             7.7.4      Clean and Flush Test
                     After all new and modified piping is installed, the
                     Contractor shall clean the affected system by flushing with
                     the service fluid or a medium approved by the Port
                     Engineer, Chief Engineer & ABS Surveyor.

             7.7.5      Hydrostatic Test
                     After cleaning, hydrostatically test all new and modified
                     piping. Test new and modified oil piping to 150% of
                     operating pressure for a period of at least 30 minutes.
                     Visually inspect welded, brazed, and new mechanical joints
                     for leaks. No leaks are permitted.

             7.7.6        Painting Test and Inspection

                     a.    Contractor and Port Engineer or Chief Engineer shall
                           conduct a joint inspection of areas to be prepared and
                           painted before surface preparation begins to ensure
                           that protective measures are implemented.
                     b.    Contractor shall perform inspections after completion
                           of each stage of surface preparation, each coat, and
                           each stripe coat, to verify surface condition, DFT and
                           space cleanliness, and before securing space. At least
                           2 DFT readings shall be taken per 100 square feet.

             7.7.7        Operational Test
                          In the presence of the ABS Surveyor Port Engineer and
                          Chief Engineer, verify that:
                           All work has performed satisfactorily and to the
                             specific instructions and requirements of the work
                             item, manufacturer, and regulatory bodies.
                           The equipment, material, machinery, or system
                             including all flows, levels, temperatures, loads, and
                             alarms complies with manufacturer’s parameters.
                           The equipment, material, machinery, or system
                             performs its intended purpose.

       7.8   Painting
             Paint all new and disturbed surfaces to match surrounding
             surfaces. All paint work shall be performed in accordance with
             GTR No. 7. If original piping was painted with a color scheme




3PSC                                                                 Page 70 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              to indicate service, Paint all new and modified pipe
              installations to match color coding for new service.

       7.9    Markings
              Install name plates, notices, and markings for all new and
              modified systems in accordance with GTR No. 29.

       7.10   Manufacturer Representative:     None

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                                 Page 71 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 104    Prepare, Prime, and Paint Sewage Holding Tank

1.0 Abstract
    The sewage holding tank requires preservation and painting.

2.0 Reference/Enclosure
      2.1 reference: none
      2.2 enclosures:
            2.2.1 msc standard item no. 47, “sewage tanks maintenance recoat”

3.0 Quantity/description/location
     3.1      Location         Capacity          Square Footage
               4-76-0        6248 gallons         Appx. 1000sf

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment
    a. Amercoat 240 white - 10 gallons
    b. Amercoat 240 gray - 10 gallons

5.0 Notes:
    Amercoat 240 is a two part epoxy having a mix ratio of 4:1 resin to cure
    and a volume solids of 87%. It has been approved for use on MSC ships in
    virtually all areas EXCEPT potable water tanks and on Navair certified
    decks. In actuality, Amercoat 240 is a reformulation of Amercoat 235 &
    Amercoat 236 (Bar-Rust 235 and 236 prior to Ameron acquiring those
    products as part of their purchase of Devoe Marine). This reformulation
    reduced the VOC level and improved the cold weather curing.

       Amercoat 240 is surface tolerant and will accept a hand or power tool
       cleaned surface. However, for severe service conditions, for example
       immersion service, abrasive blasting to Near White Metal in accordance
       with SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 and producing a surface profile of 2 – 3 mils is
       recommended. Alternately, provided the required surface profile exists,
       UHP water jetting to a WJ-2L, NV-2 condition in accordance with SSPC-
       SP12/NACE 5 is an acceptable alternative.

       In addition to its almost universal usage, another very attractive
       attribute is its cure at low temperatures. While cure times increase
       steadily as temperatures drop, it will continue to cure down to 0o F
       without additives or alternate curing agents. For example, a 6 mil
       coating will cure hard in 6 hours at 90o F, 13 hours at 50o F, 30 hours at
       32o F and 48 hours at 16o F. Even at 20o F, the cure time to immersion is
       7 days. Yet even with that, the pot life at 80o F is an hour and at 90o F
       it’s 40 minutes which, in production situations should not constitute any
       problem. For ship’s force maintenance applications in high temperatures,
       consideration should be given to ordering more of the one gallon
       packaging that is available.

       Application may be accomplished by spray, roller or brush. For spray
       application airless spray using a (minimum) 45:1 pump and .021” to .025”
       spray tip is recommended. Brush and roller application is fine for
       repair and touch-up work, but remember that brush or roller application
       yields only 2 to 3 mils dft per coat. Multiple coats will be required to
       achieve the recommended 6 mil dft per coat.


6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements


3PSC                                                              Page 72 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       6.1 All work to be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer
           and onsite coatings representative.

7.0 Statement of Work Required
      7.1 Perform all work as delineated in enclosure 2.2.1, with the
          following exceptions/clarifications:
          7.1.1   Estimate 50% of the surface to be scaled to meet SSPC-SP-3
                  surface preparation requirements.
          7.1.2   The tank washdown system is to be thoroughly rinsed clean and
                  all orifices cleared.
          7.1.3   Coating Requirements after achieving proper surface
                  preparation:
                  A.    One stripe coat at 6 mils DFT using Amercoat 240 Gray
                        in way of scaled areas.
                  B.    One full coat at 6 mils DFT using Amercoat 240 White
                        within the entire tank.
                  C.    One full coat at 6 mils DFT using Amercoat 240 Gray
                        within the entire tank.
          7.1.4   Renew all zincs located in this tank. Estimate for 15 each
                  welded zincs weighing 20lbs each.

8.0 General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 73 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



STANDARD ITEM NO. 47, REVISED 2 APRIL 1993
SEWAGE TANKS, MAINTENANCE RECOAT

1. Open tank manhole(s) and clean and gas free the tank and all lines
connected thereto, up to the first isolation valve on each line. Ensure
adequate ventilation to carry fumes from the tank to the exterior of the
vessel. Ensure that proper protective clothing is available and used by
personnel cleaning the tank. Ensure that no hot work is being conducted in
the vicinity of the tank during the gas freeing operations. Cleaning and gas
freeing of the tank, especially with regard to hot work in the surrounding
areas, shall be coordinated with a Certified Marine Chemist. Have the tank
inspected by a Certified Marine Chemist. The tank shall be certified by the
chemist as being Safe For Men, Safe For Hot Work, prior to any other work
being performed in or on the tank. Additionally, the tank shall be
recertified by the Marine Chemist on a daily basis until all work on the tank
has been completed. Three (3) copies of each Chemist's Certificate shall be
delivered to the MSC Port Engineer upon issuance. Further, the tank shall be
re-inspected and a new certificate issued by the Marine Chemist on a daily
basis until all work on or in the tank is completed.

2. Provide and erect all necessary staging required for proper working
conditions and inspections.

3. Provide and maintain adequate lighting, of a suitable nature, during the
course of all surface preparation, coating and inspection activities.

4. Provide ventilation of a suitable size and type to maintain a proper
working environment.

5. During surface preparation and painting activities, use of
dehumidification equipment is discretionary on the part of the contractor.
However, it is expected that the entire tank be presented for inspection at
one time. Piece-meal presentation will not be accepted. If used, as a
minimum, the dehumidification shall accomplish:
      A. Effect a complete air change in the tank at least once every
         fifteen (15) minutes.
      B. Maintain the relative humidity in the tank within the limits set by
         the paint manufacturer for the coating being applied.
      C. Maintain a minimum of 5 deg. F. differential between the temperature
         of the tank and the dew point, with the dew point being the lower
         temperature.
      D. Ducting shall be run so as not to create hazards to personnel
         transiting the areas through which the ducting is run. Ducting
         shall further be maintained airtight and in good repair such that it
         does not contribute to contamination of the vessel's interior or
         equipment with sandblast grit, dust or paint.

6. Prior to initiating work on this item, the contractor shall ensure that
the vessel's equipment is protected from damage caused by dust or dirt
generated by abrasive blasting and painting. Measures to be taken include,
but are not limited to, the following:

       A. All suction, fill and vent lines shall be broken at      the first
          joint off the tank and blanked. Lines which are of all welded
          construction or which do not have a mechanical joint within one (1)
          foot of the tank shall be plugged on the inside of the tank.




3PSC                                                             Page 74 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       B. Valve stems and reach rod universal joints within the tank shall be
          wrapped to protect same from coating.
       C. Tank level indicating devices and float switches   shall be removed
          for protection. Equipment shall be stored in a safe location and
          re-installed upon completion of blasting and coating.
       D. As necessary based upon the location of ventilation and
          dehumidification exhausts, grease and wrap all valve stems and
          exposed portions of hydraulic cylinders. Install filters on all air
          intake vents. Install covers on all fuel tank vents.
       E. Appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure that the vessel's
          interior and its equipment is not subject to contamination from dust
          or paint spray.
       F. Protective covering shall be inspected at regular intervals, but not
          less than at the start of each work prior to the restart of work.
          Contamination of the vessel and its equipment shall be reported to
          the Port Engineer verbally, immediately upon its discovery, followed
          by a written report within four (4) hours of the verbal
          notification. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning the
          contaminated equipment and showing that the contamination has not
          caused damage to same. Cost to repair equipment damaged by such
          contamination shall be borne by the Contractor.

7. All areas of bare metal or coating which is cracked, blistered or
   otherwise deteriorated, shall be prepared in accordance with the Steel
   Structures Painting Council, Surface Preparation Standard SSPC-SP-3, Power
   Tool Cleaning. All paint edges shall be feathered in.

8. Upon completion of surface preparation, all dust and dirt generated by
   this work item shall be removed. All internal tank surfaces shall be
   blown-down with dry, oil free air, at a maximum pressure of 10 psi and/or
   vacuumed clean to remove all residues from surface preparation.

9. Apply a coating system, approved in accordance with COMSCINST. 4750.2,
   Latest Revision, Appendix G, to all prepared surfaces of the tank
   interior.

10.Thinning of the paint will be allowed for viscosity control if        determined
   to be necessary by the paint manufacturer's representative. In        no case
   shall the paint be thinned in excess of 5% by volume. Thinner         utilized
   for viscosity control shall be new and of the type recommended        by the
   manufacturer.

11.Paint material shall be stored within the Paint Manufacturer's recommended
   temperature range. When paint material is being applied, ensure that the
   material's temperature is within the Manufacturer's recommended range, but
   in any case, not less than 70 degrees F.

12. Ensure the following conditions are met prior to painting:

       A. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, free of oil, grease or residue from
          surface preparation.
       B. Air and metal surface temperatures shall be within the range
          published by the paint manufacturer.
       C. The ambient air and metal temperatures register at least 5 degrees
          F. above the dewpoint temperature.
       D. The relative humidity is no higher than 80 percent.




3PSC                                                             Page 75 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



13. Prior to application of any coating, the area to be painted shall be
inspected and approved by the Port Engineer and the Paint Rep. This includes
not only the initial coat of paint, but all subsequent coats as well.

14. Upon completion of all coating activities, all interferences shall be
re-installed and proved operationally. Remove all plugs and blanks and make-
up as original. Remove all protective covering installed for this work item.

15. Prior to closure, a final inspection of the tank interior shall be
conducted by the Port Engineer.

16. Disturbed areas on the exterior of the tank, its connected piping or
equipment shall be cleaned, primed and coated to match the surrounding area.

17.   The contractor shall prepare a paint report and submit same to the Port
Engineer within three (3) days of completing the coating application.   The
report shall include the following data:

       A. Date and time of applications.
       B. Temperature, humidity, and dewpoint, at time of each application.
       C. Dry film thickness readings (ten per 1,000 sq. ft. of surface) for
          each coat of paint.
       D. Manufacturer, Product Identification No. and Batch Nos. for each
          type of paint applied.

18. The square footage of the tank, the paint system to be utilized and
provisions for the manufacturer's representative shall be as set forth in the
basic specification.




3PSC                                                             Page 76 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 105    Prepare, Prime and Paint Sideshell

1.0    Abstract:
       Provide all labor and material required to carry out a complete
       washdown and coating of the sideshell.

2.0    References/Enclosures:
       2.1   Enclosures: MSC standard Item # 24, titled
             “Topside Maintenance Recoat”
       2.2   Enclosure: Paint Product Guide for Applications

3.0    Item location /description:
       3.1   The entire ship’s hull freeboard area from the top of the boottop
             to the top of the bulwarks, including:
             A. Hand rails
             B. Superstructure extending from Main Deck to 01 Deck
             C. Entire exterior outboard surfaces from frames 112-125
                   extending upwards to the 02 deck.
       3.2   The ship’s freeboard area is 14,500 square feet

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Services
       4.1   The following coatings and cleaners for the sideshell are to be
             provided:
             a. Amercoat 240 Haze Gray: 15 gallons
             b. Amercoat 240 Off-White: 15 gallons
             c. Amershield White: 85 gallons
             d. Amershield Black: 5 gallons
             e. Prep 88:    60 gallons
       4.2   3PSC shall arrange for the services of an Independent Paint
             Representative throughout the performance period.

5.0    Notes:   None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:
       6.1   all work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the 3PSC
             P/E and Onsite Paint Representative.

7.0    Statement of Work – Painting shall be done so long as weather
       conditions permit. Applying of paint between the hours of 1800 and
       0700 is not authorized.
       7.1   The ASW overboard shall be in use during this period. The
             Contractor shall be required to install a temporary scupper from
             this overboard to prevent water from interfering with this work.
       7.2   The ship’s force shall lower the anchors to approximately 2 feet
             above the waterline.
       7.3   Perform a HP freshwater wash down (minimum 4500psi) of all areas
             to be worked.
       7.4   Upon completion of the washdown, the Contractor shall ensure that
             the vessel's equipment is protected from damage caused by
             blasting, dust or paint. Measures to be taken include, but are
             not limited to, the following:
             A. Plug open ends of pipes, vents and ducts.
             B. Grease and wrap all valve stems and exposed portions of
                hydraulic cylinders. Install filters on all air intake vents.
                Install covers on all fuel tank vents.



3PSC                                                              Page 77 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              C. In areas to be abrasive blasted and coated, record all ship's
                 markings, including information, size, and color.
              D. Install protective covering on all portlights and windows.
              E. Mask all normally unpainted surfaces such as light globes,
                 label plates, etc..
              F. Protect running rigging (cargo falls, topping lifts, vangs,
                 etc.) and mooring lines which cannot be stowed or removed for
                 the duration of blasting and painting operations, by suitable
                 means to prevent contamination by blasting abrasive, dust or
                 overspray. The lifeboat davits, winches, sheaves and wire
                 ropes shall be sealed off during this entire evolution.
       7.6    Perform a walk through of the areas to be worked with the Port
              Engineer and Paint Representative to identify all areas that
              shall be scaled to bare metal. For estimating purposes, assume
              1500 square feet to be scaled to SSPC-SP-11.
       7.7    Scale the areas in way of rust and mechanical damage and feather
              to tightly adhered paint in accordance with SSPC-SP-11
              requirements. Areas to be worked shall include the following:
              a.     Anchors and the first 40 links of chain per anchor
              b.     Anchor striker plates
              c.     The hawse pipes (estimate 120 sf for both hawse pipes)
              c.     The ASW overboards
              d.     Those areas identified during the walk-through phase after
                     the HP washdown
       7.8    Allow the Paint Representative and Port Engineer to inspect the
              surface prior to painting.
       7.9    Upon acceptance from the Port Engineer, apply two coats of
              Amercoat 240 at 5 mils DFT to all scaled regions.
              7.9.1 The first coat of Amercoat 240 shall be haze gray.
              7.9.2 The second coat of Amercoat 240 shall be off-white for
                     those areas whose topcoat is white.
              7.9.3 The second coat of Amercoat 240 shall be black for those
                     areas whose topcoat is black.
       7.10   Prior to applying Amershield to the entire sideshell, wash the
              areas with Prep 88 cleaner. The cleaner shall be applied via a
              sprayer and high pressure washer at a dilution rate of 1 part
              cleaner: 15 parts water.
              7.10.1       The surface shall remain wet with cleaner at all
                           times, then rinsed off using freshwater. Because the
                           surface must remain wet at all times, cleaning of the
                           sideshell and house shall be done in sections.
       7.11   Allow the Port Engineer and Paint Representative to inspect the
              sideshell after cleaning and prior to painting.
       7.12   Upon acceptance from the Port Engineer, apply the Amershield
              using sprayers at 3 mils DFT.
              7.12.1    Amershield White to those areas in white.
              7.12.2    Amershield Black to anchors, chains, and stenciling.

       7.13   Upon completion of painting, remove all masking and staging and
              perform a final walk-through and close out inspection with the
              Port Engineer and Paint Representative.
       7.14   Tests/Inspections/ Reports/Deliverables – To be accomplished by
              the Contractor with their QA Representative in attendance.
              7.14.1   Inspection: Wrapping and protection of areas prior to
                       scaling and painting.
              7.14.2   Inspection: Surface preparation of SSPC-SP-11 after
                       cleaning and prior to painting


3PSC                                                              Page 78 of 280
                                      4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.14.3      Report: Mil thickness readings of first touch up coat
                   applied after cleaning
       7.14.4      Inspection: Surface preparation of sideshell after
                   applying International 950 Cleaner
       7.14.5      Inspection: Final walk-through after final application
                   and clean up.
       7.14.6      Reports: Daily readings of outside temperature, dewpoint
                   and steel temperature to the Port Engineer.
8.0    General   Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                          Page 79 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Amercoat 240
Amercoat 240 is a two part epoxy having a mix ratio of 4:1 resin to cure and
a volume solids of 87%. It has been approved for use on MSC ships in
virtually all areas EXCEPT potable water tanks and on Navair certified decks.
In actuality, Amercoat 240 is a reformulation of Amercoat 235 & Amercoat 236
(Bar-Rust 235 and 236 prior to Ameron acquiring those products as part of
their purchase of Devoe Marine). This reformulation reduced the VOC level
and improved the cold weather curing.

Amercoat 240 is surface tolerant and will accept a hand or power tool cleaned
surface. However, for severe service conditions, for example immersion
service, abrasive blasting to Near White Metal in accordance with SSPC-
SP10/NACE 2 and producing a surface profile of 2 – 3 mils is recommended.
Alternately, provided the required surface profile exists, UHP water jetting
to a WJ-2L, NV-2 condition in accordance with SSPC-SP12/NACE 5 is an
acceptable alternative.

In addition to its almost universal usage, another very attractive attribute
is its cure at low temperatures. While cure times increase steadily as
temperatures drop, it will continue to cure down to 0o F without additives or
alternate curing agents. For example, a 6 mil coating will cure hard in 6
hours at 90o F, 13 hours at 50o F, 30 hours at 32o F and 48 hours at 16o F.
Even at 20o F, the cure time to immersion is 7 days. Yet even with that, the
pot life at 80o F is an hour and at 90o F it’s 40 minutes which, in production
situations should not constitute any problem. For ship’s force maintenance
applications in high temperatures, consideration should be given to ordering
more of the one gallon packaging that is available.

Application may be accomplished by spray, roller or brush. For spray
application airless spray using a (minimum) 45:1 pump and .021” to .025”
spray tip is recommended. Brush and roller application is fine for repair
and touch-up work, but remember that brush or roller application yields only
2 to 3 mils dft per coat. Multiple coats will be required to achieve the
recommended 6 mil dft per coat.

Amershield
Amershield is a two (2) component polyurethane coating used as a topcoat on
the freeboard, house and other topside structures, and as markings on anchor
chains and anchors. This coating is compliant with the EPA VOC (Volatile
Organic Compounds) limits. Amershield has a mixing ratio of resin to cure of
4:1.

Amershield may be applied by spray, roller or brush. For cosmetic
appearance, spraying is the preferred method of application. For spray
applications, use spray tips .015" to .019" in size. The maximum air and
surface temperature at which this product can be applied is 120o F.

Thinning may be done for viscosity control under the following conditions:

       1. Use Amercoat 65 solvent only.

       2. Add thinner at a rate of one-half (1/2) pint thinner to one (1)
       gallon of coating. If additional thinning is required, do not exceed a
       maximum of one (1) pint of thinner per gallon of coating.

Due to its hard, high gloss finish, unless an existing Amershield surface is
well aged, i.e. approximately 3 years old, it will be necessary to either


3PSC                                                              Page 80 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



abrade the surface by light sanding or treat the surface with Prep 88 to
achieve proper adhesion. If this is not done, peeling will result. Also,
relative humidity during application is a concern. Polyurethanes are
hygroscopic in the uncured state. High humidity levels during application
can cause variance in the shade of the cured product.

Prep 88
Prep 88 is a strongly alkaline (Ph 11.0   to 12.0), biodegradable cleaner
which, when used properly, will promote   adhesion to existing coatings and
reduce/eliminate the need to abrade the   surface in its entirety prior to over
coating. This is especially useful for    the over coating of relatively new
Amershield.

Prep 88 is a water based product and should be cut with clean, fresh water at
a rate of one part Prep 88 to 2 or 3 parts water. The solution should be
applied liberally to wet the surface and may be applied by brush, roller, mop
or garden sprayer. Maintain the surface in a wet condition for 5 to 10
minutes and then rinse clean with a high pressure water wash. It must be
remembered not to allow the Prep 88 to dry on the surface being cleaned.

It is recommended that mechanical cleaning and touch-up of anti-corrosive
coatings be performed on corroded areas and/or damaged coatings prior to
treatment with Prep 88. It should also be noted that if used on side shell,
run-off may cause streaking on the boot topping. Rinsing the boot top with
the high pressure water wash at the same time as rinsing the side shell may
reduce or eliminate the streaking.




3PSC                                                              Page 81 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 106     Prepare, Prime and Paint the Transducer Well Deck and Support
Structures

1.0    Abstract:
       Provide all labor and material required to carry out a complete
       washdown, scaling and coating of the transducer void

2.0    References/Enclosures:
       2.1   Enclosure: Paint Product Guide for Applications
       2.2   As found photos of the deck and stiffeners in way of transducer
             well region.

3.0    Item location /description:
       3.1   Location: Deck of Void 4-35-0, which extends from frames 35-76,
             and includes the ENTIRE transverse members (include top plate
             both sides) and the first 6” of all structures connected to the
             tank, piping, and the immediate 6” of all bulkheads.
       3.2   The total square footage to be dealt with is 2500 sf

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Services
       4.1   The following coatings are to be provided:
             a. Amercoat 240 Buff: 15
             b. Amercoat 240 Red Oxide: 40 gallons
             c. Amercoat 886 Aggregate (50-70Mesh) Grit – 1 full kit

       4.2      3PSC shall arrange for the services of an Independent Paint
                Representative throughout the performance period.

5.0    Notes:    None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:
       6.1   All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the 3PSC
             P/E and Onsite Paint Representative.

7.0    Statement of Work – Painting shall be done so long as weather
       conditions permit. Applying of paint between the hours of 1800 and
       0700 is not authorized.
       7.1   Prior to washing down, the Contractor shall ensure that the
             vessel's equipment is protected from damage caused by blasting,
             dust or paint. Measures to be taken include, but are not limited
             to, the following:
             A. Plug open ends of pipes, vents and ducts.
             B. Grease and wrap all valve stems and exposed portions of
                hydraulic cylinders. Install filters on all air intake vents.
                Install covers on all fuel tank vents.
             C. Wrap all cables with watertight bags and tape seal at each
                end.
             D. Wrap all equipment such as the transducer tube leadscrews, all
                sponsor related equipment, and electronics.
             E. In areas to be abrasive blasted and coated, record all ship's
                markings, including information, size, and color.
             F. Install protective covering on all receptacles, outlets,
                junction boxes and lights.
             G. Mask all normally unpainted surfaces such as light globes,
                label plates, etc..



3PSC                                                                Page 82 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.2   Perform a HP freshwater wash down (minimum 4500psi) of all areas
             to be worked.    Collect all waste water and dispose of in
             accordance with environmental rules and regulations.
       7.3   Perform a walk through of the areas to be worked with the Port
             Engineer, NAVO Representative and Paint Representative to
             identify all areas that shall be scaled to bare metal
       7.4   Scale the areas in way of rust and mechanical damage and feather
             to tightly adhered paint in accordance with SSPC-SP-11
             requirements. For estimating purposes, assume 1500 square feet to
             be scaled to SSPC-SP-11.
       7.5   Thinner wipe clean all scaled and immediate areas using MEK or
             mineral spirits.
       7.6   Contractor shall furnish the necessary equipment to provide
             suitable painting conditions. Forced air and dehumidifiers are
             required to provide suitable conditions for painting.
       7.7   Allow the Paint Representative and Port Engineer to inspect the
             surface as well as paint conditions prior to painting.
       7.8   Upon acceptance from the Port Engineer, apply two coats of
             Amercoat 240 at 5 mils DFT to all scaled regions.
             7.9.1 The first coat of Amercoat 240 shall be Buff.
             7.9.2 The second coat of Amercoat 240 shall be red oxide.
       7.9   Upon acceptance from the Port Engineer, perform a second washdown
             of the entire region and dispose of waste water. Apply the final
             coat full coat of Amercoat 240 Red Oxide mixed with Amercoat 886
             Aggregate to create a non-slip environment over the entire region
       7.10 Upon completion of painting, remove all masking and staging and
             perform a final walk-through and close out inspection with the
             Port Engineer and Paint Representative.
       7.11 Tests/Inspections/ Reports/Deliverables – To be accomplished by
             the Contractor with their QA Representative in attendance.
             7.11.1   Inspection: Wrapping and protection of areas prior to
                      scaling and painting.
             7.11.2   Inspection: Surface preparation of SSPC-SP-11 after
                      cleaning and prior to painting
             7.11.3   Report: Mil thickness readings of first touch up coat
                      applied after cleaning
             7.11.4   Inspection: Surface preparation of sideshell after
                      applying International 950 Cleaner
             7.11.5   Inspection: Final walk-through after final application
                      and clean up.
             7.11.6   Reports: Daily readings of outside temperature, dewpoint
                      and steel temperature to the Port Engineer.
8.0         General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 83 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Amercoat 240
Amercoat 240 is a two part epoxy having a mix ratio of 4:1 resin to cure and
a volume solids of 87%. It has been approved for use on MSC ships in
virtually all areas EXCEPT potable water tanks and on Navair certified decks.
In actuality, Amercoat 240 is a reformulation of Amercoat 235 & Amercoat 236
(Bar-Rust 235 and 236 prior to Ameron acquiring those products as part of
their purchase of Devoe Marine). This reformulation reduced the VOC level
and improved the cold weather curing.

Amercoat 240 is surface tolerant and will accept a hand or power tool cleaned
surface. However, for severe service conditions, for example immersion
service, abrasive blasting to Near White Metal in accordance with SSPC-
SP10/NACE 2 and producing a surface profile of 2 – 3 mils is recommended.
Alternately, provided the required surface profile exists, UHP water jetting
to a WJ-2L, NV-2 condition in accordance with SSPC-SP12/NACE 5 is an
acceptable alternative.

In addition to its almost universal usage, another very attractive attribute
is its cure at low temperatures. While cure times increase steadily as
temperatures drop, it will continue to cure down to 0o F without additives or
alternate curing agents. For example, a 6 mil coating will cure hard in 6
hours at 90o F, 13 hours at 50o F, 30 hours at 32o F and 48 hours at 16o F.
Even at 20o F, the cure time to immersion is 7 days. Yet even with that, the
pot life at 80o F is an hour and at 90o F it’s 40 minutes which, in production
situations should not constitute any problem. For ship’s force maintenance
applications in high temperatures, consideration should be given to ordering
more of the one gallon packaging that is available.

Application may be accomplished by spray, roller or brush. For spray
application airless spray using a (minimum) 45:1 pump and .021” to .025”
spray tip is recommended. Brush and roller application is fine for repair
and touch-up work, but remember that brush or roller application yields only
2 to 3 mils dft per coat. Multiple coats will be required to achieve the
recommended 6 mil dft per coat.




3PSC                                                            Page 84 of 280
       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




3PSC                           Page 85 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 107     Prepare, Prime and Paint the Forward Pump Room and Renew Deck
Grating

1.0    Abstract:
       Provide all labor and material required to carry out a complete
       washdown, scaling, priming, painting of the forward pump room and the
       renewal of the deck grating.

2.0    References/Enclosures:
       2.1   Enclosure: Paint Product Guide for Applications
       2.2   As found photos of the deck in forward pump room.

3.0    Item location /description:
       3.1   Location: Forward Pump Room (3-73-0)deck and adjacent bulkheads
             to the height as found painted in red oxide. All deck grating
             support structure, including all angle iron, both sides.
       3.2   Total square footage to be dealt with appx. 1100sf
       3.3   Total square footage of deck grating to be renewed, appx 250sf.

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Services
       4.1   The following coatings are to be provided:
             a. Amercoat 240 Buff: 10 gallons
             b. Amercoat 240 Red Oxide: 20 gallons
             c. Amercoat 886 Aggregate (50-70Mesh) Grit – 1 full kit

       4.2      3PSC shall arrange for the services of an Independent Paint
                Representative throughout the performance period.

5.0    Notes:    None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:
       6.1   All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the 3PSC
             P/E and Onsite Paint Representative.

7.0    Statement of Work – Painting shall be done so long as weather
       conditions permit. Applying of paint between the hours of 1800 and
       0700 is not authorized.

       7.1      Remove all existing diamond deck plating and dispose of as scrap.
       7.2      Prior to washing down, the Contractor shall ensure that the
                vessel's equipment is protected from damage caused by blasting,
                dust or paint. Measures to be taken include, but are not limited
                to, the following:
                A. Plug open ends of pipes, vents and ducts.
                B. Grease and wrap all valve stems and exposed portions of
                   hydraulic cylinders. Install filters on all air intake vents.
                   Install covers on all fuel tank vents.
                C. Wrap all cables with watertight bags and tape seal at each
                   end.
                D. Wrap all equipment such as the MSD, potable water tanks, halon
                   bottles and associated piping, CHT system, ballast manifold,
                   RO units, receptacles, lighting, junction boxes, etc…
                E. In areas to be abrasive blasted and coated, record all ship's
                   markings, including information, size, and color.
                F. Install protective covering on all portlights and windows.



3PSC                                                                Page 86 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



               G. Mask all normally unpainted surfaces such as light globes,
                  label plates, etc..
       7.3     Perform a HP freshwater wash down (minimum 4500psi) of all areas
               to be worked.    Collect all waste water and dispose of in
               accordance with environmental rules and regulations.
       7.4     Perform a walk through of the areas to be worked with the Port
               Engineer and Paint Representative to identify all areas that
               shall be scaled to bare metal.
       7.5     Scale the areas in way of rust and mechanical damage and feather
               to tightly adhered paint in accordance with SSPC-SP-11
               requirements in way of deck areas, support structures, angles
               (both sides), pipe supports, etc… For estimating purposes,
               assume 600 square feet to be scaled to SSPC-SP-11.
       7.6     Thinner wipe clean all scaled and immediate areas using MEK or
               mineral spirits.
       7.7     Contractor shall furnish the necessary equipment to provide
               suitable painting conditions. Forced air and dehumidifiers are
               required to provide suitable conditions for painting.
       7.8     Allow the Paint Representative and Port Engineer to inspect the
               surface as well as paint conditions prior to painting.
       7.9     Upon acceptance from the Port Engineer, apply two coats of
               Amercoat 240 at 5 mils DFT to all scaled regions.
               7.9.1 The first coat of Amercoat 240 shall be Buff.
               7.9.2 The second coat of Amercoat 240 shall be red oxide.
       7.10    Upon acceptance from the Port Engineer, perform a second washdown
               of the entire region and dispose of waste water. Apply the final
               coat full coat of Amercoat 240 Red Oxide mixed with Amercoat 886
               Aggregate to create a non-slip environment over the entire region
       7.11    Furnish and install fibergrate deck grating (www.fibergrate.com)
               in place of the deck grating removed earlier. Deck grating shall
               have following characteristics:
               A. Yellow color
               B. 2” x 2” grid style
               C. Non-slip covering
               D. Each piece shall be secured in place with CRES 316 brackets
               in a minimum of two locations per piece.
       7.12    Upon completion of painting, remove all masking and staging and
               perform a final walk-through and close out inspection with the
               Port Engineer and Paint Representative.
       7.13    Tests/Inspections/ Reports/Deliverables – To be accomplished by
               the Contractor with their QA Representative in attendance.
               7.13.1   Inspection: Wrapping and protection of areas prior to
                        scaling and painting.
               7.13.2   Inspection: Surface preparation of SSPC-SP-11 after
                        cleaning and prior to painting
               7.13.3   Report: Mil thickness readings of first touch up coat
                        applied after cleaning
               7.13.4   Inspection: Surface preparation of sideshell after
                        applying International 950 Cleaner
               7.13.5   Inspection: Final walk-through after final application
                        and clean up.
               7.13.6   Reports: Daily readings of outside temperature, dewpoint
                        and steel temperature to the Port Engineer.
8.0           General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 87 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Amercoat 240
Amercoat 240 is a two part epoxy having a mix ratio of 4:1 resin to cure and
a volume solids of 87%. It has been approved for use on MSC ships in
virtually all areas EXCEPT potable water tanks and on Navair certified decks.
In actuality, Amercoat 240 is a reformulation of Amercoat 235 & Amercoat 236
(Bar-Rust 235 and 236 prior to Ameron acquiring those products as part of
their purchase of Devoe Marine). This reformulation reduced the VOC level
and improved the cold weather curing.

Amercoat 240 is surface tolerant and will accept a hand or power tool cleaned
surface. However, for severe service conditions, for example immersion
service, abrasive blasting to Near White Metal in accordance with SSPC-
SP10/NACE 2 and producing a surface profile of 2 – 3 mils is recommended.
Alternately, provided the required surface profile exists, UHP water jetting
to a WJ-2L, NV-2 condition in accordance with SSPC-SP12/NACE 5 is an
acceptable alternative.

In addition to its almost universal usage, another very attractive attribute
is its cure at low temperatures. While cure times increase steadily as
temperatures drop, it will continue to cure down to 0o F without additives or
alternate curing agents. For example, a 6 mil coating will cure hard in 6
hours at 90o F, 13 hours at 50o F, 30 hours at 32o F and 48 hours at 16o F.
Even at 20o F, the cure time to immersion is 7 days. Yet even with that, the
pot life at 80o F is an hour and at 90o F it’s 40 minutes which, in production
situations should not constitute any problem. For ship’s force maintenance
applications in high temperatures, consideration should be given to ordering
more of the one gallon packaging that is available.

Application may be accomplished by spray, roller or brush. For spray
application airless spray using a (minimum) 45:1 pump and .021” to .025”
spray tip is recommended. Brush and roller application is fine for repair
and touch-up work, but remember that brush or roller application yields only
2 to 3 mils dft per coat. Multiple coats will be required to achieve the
recommended 6 mil dft per coat.




3PSC                                                            Page 88 of 280
       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




3PSC                           Page 89 of 280
       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




3PSC                           Page 90 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Item No. 108 Prepare, Prime and Paint the Aft Section of Main House and
Renew Staging Bay Door Gasket

1.0    Abstract:
       Provide all labor and material required to carry out a complete
       washdown and painting of the after portion of the main house and renew
       the gasket in the upper section of the staging bay door.

2.0    References/Enclosures:
       2.1   Enclosures: Pictures for reference are enclosed
       2.2   Enclosure: Paint Product Guide for Applications

3.0    Item location /description:
       3.1   The entire ship’s after portion of the house from frames 122-125,
             starting at main deck and extending up to 02 deck, including the
             existing louvers, plenums and interior and exterior of the four
             each van vestibules, and also including:
             A. Hand rails above the after portion of the house
             B. Winch cabin grating extending forward around the winch
                  control cabin, both sides
             C. The crane cab grating extending at the top of the house, both
                  sides.
             D.   Back side of RHIB boat locker.
             E.   Inside of air escape that is exposed/seen from aft deck.
       3.2   Total square footage is approximately 1800 square feet

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Services
       4.1   The following coatings and cleaners for the sideshell are to be
             provided:
             a. Amercoat 240 Haze Gray: 5 gallons
             b. Amercoat 240 Off-White: 5 gallons
             c. Amershield White: 20 gallons
             e. Prep 88:    10 gallons
       4.2   Staging Bay Door Gasket Material – Onboard the Ship (Refer to
             Ship’s Bosun)
       4.3   3PSC shall arrange for the services of an Independent Paint
             Representative throughout the performance period.

5.0    Notes:   None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:
       6.1   All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the 3PSC
             P/E and Onsite Paint Representative.

7.0    Statement of Work – Painting shall be done so long as weather
       conditions permit. Applying of paint between the hours of 1800 and
       0700 is not authorized.
       7.1   Temporarily remove the deck grating surrounding the winch cabin
             and crane cab, and place protective plywood in way of removed
             grating. Rope off area and place CAUTION SIGNS in IMMEDIATE area
             to warn persons of removed deck grating.
       7.2   Erect staging as required to perform this work item. Temporarily
             remove all equipment in the immediate vicinity that may be
             adversely affected by overspray
       7.3   Perform a HP freshwater wash down (minimum 4500psi) of all areas
             to be worked.



3PSC                                                             Page 91 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.4    Upon completion of the washdown, the Contractor shall ensure that
              the vessel's equipment is protected from damage caused by
              blasting, dust or paint. Measures to be taken include, but are
              not limited to, the following:
              A. Plug open ends of pipes, vents and ducts.
              B. Grease and wrap all valve stems and exposed portions of
                 hydraulic cylinders.
              C. Temporarily remove the Install filters on all air intake
                 vents.
              D. Install covers on all fuel tank vents located on the main
                 deck.
              E. Temporarily remove the screen in way of duct plenum
              F. Install temporary seal on other side of vent louvers.
              G. In areas to be scaled or blasted and coated, record all ship's
                 markings, including information, size, and color.
              H. Install protective covering on all portlights and windows,
                 door handles, door joints, plugs, receptacles, bells, alarms,
                 whistles, and any other items that are not to be painted.
              I. Mask all normally unpainted surfaces such as light globes,
                 label plates, etc..
              J. Protect running rigging (cargo falls, topping lifts, vangs,
                 etc.) and mooring lines which cannot be stowed or removed for
                 the duration of blasting and painting operations, by suitable
                 means to prevent contamination by blasting abrasive, dust or
                 overspray. The lifeboat davits, winches, sheaves and wire
                 ropes shall be sealed off during this entire evolution.
       7.5    Perform a walk through of the areas to be worked with the Port
              Engineer and Paint Representative to identify all areas that
              shall be scaled to bare metal. For estimating purposes, assume
              300 square feet to be scaled to SSPC-SP-11.
       7.6    Scale the areas in way of rust and mechanical damage and feather
              to tightly adhered paint in accordance with SSPC-SP-11
              requirements. Included in this region shall be the topside
              gasket region of the staging bay door.
              7.6.1 Remove existing gasket, and clean entire channel to SSPC-
                    SP-11 requirements. Allow the Port Engineer to examine the
                    channel after completion of scaling.
              7.6.2 Apply two coats of Amercoat 240 at 5 mils DFT. Allow to
                    dry.
              7.6.3 Take receipt of GFE gasket material and install in channel.
                    All ends are to be cut at 45’s and dovetailed to the extent
                    practical.
       7.7    Allow the Paint Representative and Port Engineer to inspect the
              surface prior to painting.
       7.8    Upon acceptance from the Port Engineer, apply two coats of
              Amercoat 240 at 5 mils DFT to all scaled regions.
              7.9.1 The first coat of Amercoat 240 shall be haze gray.
              7.9.2 The second coat of Amercoat 240 shall be off-white.

       7.10   Prior to applying Amershield to the entire sideshell, wash the
              areas with Prep 88 cleaner. The cleaner shall be applied via a
              sprayer and high pressure washer at a dilution rate of 1 part
              cleaner: 15 parts water.
              7.10.1      The surface shall remain wet with cleaner at all
                          times, then rinsed off using freshwater. Because the
                          surface must remain wet at all times, cleaning of the
                          sideshell and house shall be done in sections.


3PSC                                                              Page 92 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.11  Allow the Port Engineer and Paint Representative to inspect the
             sideshell after cleaning and prior to painting.
       7.12 Upon acceptance from the Port Engineer, apply the Amershield
             White using sprayers at 3 mils DFT.
       7.13 Upon completion of painting, remove all masking and staging and
             perform a final walk-through and close out inspection with the
             Port Engineer and Paint Representative.
       7.14 Tests/Inspections/ Reports/Deliverables – To be accomplished by
             the Contractor with their QA Representative in attendance.
             7.14.1   Inspection: Wrapping and protection of areas prior to
                      scaling and painting.
             7.14.2   Inspection: Surface preparation of SSPC-SP-11 after
                      cleaning and prior to painting
             7.14.3   Report: Mil thickness readings of first touch up coat
                      applied after cleaning
             7.14.4   Inspection: Surface preparation after applying
                      International 950 Cleaner
             7.14.5   Inspection: Final walk-through after final application
                      and clean up.
             7.14.6   Reports: Daily readings of outside temperature, dewpoint
                      and steel temperature to the Port Engineer.
8.0         General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 93 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Amercoat 240
Amercoat 240 is a two part epoxy having a mix ratio of 4:1 resin to cure and
a volume solids of 87%. It has been approved for use on MSC ships in
virtually all areas EXCEPT potable water tanks and on Navair certified decks.
In actuality, Amercoat 240 is a reformulation of Amercoat 235 & Amercoat 236
(Bar-Rust 235 and 236 prior to Ameron acquiring those products as part of
their purchase of Devoe Marine). This reformulation reduced the VOC level
and improved the cold weather curing.

Amercoat 240 is surface tolerant and will accept a hand or power tool cleaned
surface. However, for severe service conditions, for example immersion
service, abrasive blasting to Near White Metal in accordance with SSPC-
SP10/NACE 2 and producing a surface profile of 2 – 3 mils is recommended.
Alternately, provided the required surface profile exists, UHP water jetting
to a WJ-2L, NV-2 condition in accordance with SSPC-SP12/NACE 5 is an
acceptable alternative.

In addition to its almost universal usage, another very attractive attribute
is its cure at low temperatures. While cure times increase steadily as
temperatures drop, it will continue to cure down to 0o F without additives or
alternate curing agents. For example, a 6 mil coating will cure hard in 6
hours at 90o F, 13 hours at 50o F, 30 hours at 32o F and 48 hours at 16o F.
Even at 20o F, the cure time to immersion is 7 days. Yet even with that, the
pot life at 80o F is an hour and at 90o F it’s 40 minutes which, in production
situations should not constitute any problem. For ship’s force maintenance
applications in high temperatures, consideration should be given to ordering
more of the one gallon packaging that is available.

Application may be accomplished by spray, roller or brush. For spray
application airless spray using a (minimum) 45:1 pump and .021” to .025”
spray tip is recommended. Brush and roller application is fine for repair
and touch-up work, but remember that brush or roller application yields only
2 to 3 mils dft per coat. Multiple coats will be required to achieve the
recommended 6 mil dft per coat.




3PSC                                                            Page 94 of 280
       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




3PSC                           Page 95 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 109       Install Raw Water Overboard Downspout

1.0    Abstract
       The seawater overboard discharge on the port side are in direct contact
       with the recover of the port lifeboat when trying to reconnect the
       lifting ring after launching.

2.0    Reference/Enclosures: None Additional

3.0    Item Description/Location/Quantity
       3.1   Location: Waterline, port side
       3.2   Description/Quantity: 1 each raw water overboard discharge, 6"
             diameter

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services:         None.

5.0    Notes: None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance: None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work Required:
       7.1   This work item shall be accomplished prior the painting of the
             sideshell as listed elsewhere in this specification
       7.2   Using 1/2 " plate as the top plate and sch80 pipe, fabricate and
             install a downspout on the 1 each overboard discharge located
             along the waterline at frame 108 port side.
       7.3   The downspout shall be installed so that the following apply:
             a.   At each location, continuously weld four (4) 2" x 2" pads to
                  the sideshell with a ½" x 2" stud extending from the middle
                  of these foundation pads. These shall be located on the top
                  and bottom of the downspout so that it can be removed in the
                  future.
             b.   The top of the downspout is installed 6" above the top of the
                  overboard discharge cavity and contains a 1" vent in the
                  center.
             c.   The pipe to be used shall be 8" sch80 steel pipe that is
                  centered over the 6" overboard discharge cavity. On the
                  upper and lower most ends of the pipe, install 4 tabs
                  measuring 2" x 2" x ½" that line up with the studs installed
                  in paragraph 7.3.a
             d.   The downspout shall extend 12" below the bottom of the
                  overboard cavity.
       7.4   The ½ pipe cap shall be installed at a 45 degree angle extending
             downwards using ½" steel plate.
       7.5   Prior to installation, apply two coats of Ameron 240 at 5 mils
             DFT on both interior and exterior of the downspout.
             A topcoat of Amershield white shall be applied on the exterior of
             the downspouts.
       7.6   Install using stainless hardware, including washers and lockwire.
       7.7   WORKING DRAWINGS - Submit to the working drawings to the Port
             Engineer for review and approval of the proposed installation
             prior to commencement of work.

8.0    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:    None additional




3PSC                                                                Page 96 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 110   Shop Overhaul of Various Port Lights

1.0    Abstract
       There are various portlights that are leaking and require shop
       overhaul.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   MSC Standard Item No. 98 titled Port Lights Shop Repair

3.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION/QUANTITY
       3.1   Locations :
             A. Gymnasium – 1 each
             B. Officer’s Laundry – 1 each
             C. Stateroom 01-46-4 – 1 each
             D. Stateroom 01-40-1 – 1 each
             E. Stateroom 1-43-2 – 1 each
             F. Stateroom 1-33-1 – 1 each
       3.2   Description : Port lights, fixed
       3.3   Quantity : 6 each, measuring 17 inches diameter.


4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL/SERVICES
       4.1   Amercoat 240 Gray
       4.2   Amershield White

5.0    NOTES: None Additional

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:
       6.1   All work shall be to the satisfaction of the Chief Engineer
             and/or Port Engineer.

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK
       7.1   Provide all labor, material and equipment necessary to perform
             the shop overhaul of the port lights in accordance with enclosure
             2.1.

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 97 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Enclosure 2.1
MSC Standard Item No. 98: Portlight, Shop Overhaul

Portlights and fixedlights, as set forth in the basic specification, shall be
overhauled in the following manner:

1. Remove and replace interferences as necessary in order to perform the
   requirements of this item.

2. The portlight assembly, including the bolted frame, shall be unshipped and
   conveyed to the shop.

3. While the portlight is removed, a temporary closure shall be installed in
   place of the portlight to protect the vessel's interior from the elements
   and to maintain climate controlled conditions within the vessel.

4. Completely disassemble the entire portlight assembly. Remove the gaskets.
   Remove the glass from the frame. Retain the glass for re-use. De-grease
   all components. Remove all paint from and clean the glass free of all
   foreign material.

5. Install protective covering on all machined parts. Abrasive blast the
   metal components to remove all paint, dirt and foreign matter.

6. Upon inspection and approval of the surface preparation by the MSC Port
   Engineer, apply coatings as follows:

       6.1 To steel or bronze parts, apply one (1) coat of epoxy and one (1)
          topcoat. Coatings used shall be COMSC approved in accordance with
          COMSCINST 4750.2, Latest Revision, Appendix B. The color of the
          topcoat shall match the surrounding area.

       6.2 Aluminum parts shall be coated with one (1) coat of wash
          primer, followed by one (1) coat each of epoxy and topcoat. The
          epoxy and the topcoat shall be COMSC approved in accordance with
          COMSCINST 4750.2, Latest Revision, Appendix B. The color of the
          topcoat shall match the surrounding area.

7.    Clean and chase all threaded parts.

8.    Install new neoprene gasket(s) in the recess(es). Gasket shall           be
       properly sized to suit the width and depth of the recess. The          gasket
       shall have only one (1) butt joint. The joint shall be cut at          right
       angles to the length of the gasket material. The gasket shall          be glued
       in the recess and the butt joint shall be glued. No gaps will          be
       allowed.

9.    Re-install the glass with new sealing material as original.

10.    Re-assemble the portlight and deadlight.




3PSC                                                                Page 98 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



11.     Return the portlight assembly to the vessel and re-install same in its
       original location with all new CRES fasteners. Bed the frame in sealing
       compound.

12.     Hose test the Portlights. An 1-1/2 inch hose with not less than 70 PSI
       water pressure shall be directed all around the closure from a distance
       of not more than 10 feet. The water shall be applied from the weather
       deck side of the closure. The stream of water shall be moved slowly to
       ensure that the entire sealing surface, particularly the butt joint, is
       subjected to the full force of the water. No leakage shall be allowed.
       The MSC Port Engineer shall witness and approve the hose test.

13.     Clean, prime and paint all new and disturbed surfaces to match the
       surrounding area.

14.     Clean the work area of all debris resulting from the accomplish ment of
       this work item and leave in a clean and ready for use condition.

15.    All work shall be inspected and approved by the MSC Port Engineer.




3PSC                                                              Page 99 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 111     Miscellaneous Exterior and Interior Deck Repairs

3.0    Abstract
       Provide all labor, material and equipment necessary to repair and/or
       renew various deteriorated exterior and interior deck fittings.

4.0    References/Enclosures: None

3.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION/QUANTITY
       3.1   Location : Throughout the ship

4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL/SERVICES
       4.1   Amercoat 240 – As required
       4.2   Amershield Gray – As required
       4.3   Duplex strainer for Reverse Osmosis (RO) Watermaker

6.0    NOTES:
       5.1    Fire watches shall be maintained during any and all hot work
              operations.

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:
       6.1   All work shall be to the satisfaction of the Chief Engineer
             and/or Port Engineer.

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK
       7.1   Provide all labor, material and equipment necessary to renew
             and/or repair various exterior deck fittings/fixtures.

       7.2     General Work Requirements
               7.2.1   Hot Work – All hot work requests are to be submitted to
                       the Port Engineer 48 hours in advance. Cite the location,
                       type of hot work, duration. During all hot work
                       evolutions, fire watches shall be posted at the site, and
                       on opposite sides of bulkheads or decks being affected.
                       All firewatches shall possess the appropriate means for
                       firefighting onsite.
               7.2.2   Paint – All new, disturbed or affected areas in this
                       specification shall be prepared to SSPC-SP-11 requirements
                       or greater.
                       A.   All areas listed shall be coated with 2 coats of
                            Amercoat 240 at 5 mils DFT. First coat shall be
                            white, followed by gray.
                       B.   Topcoat shall Amershield Gray, unless specified
                            otherwise in the specification.
               7.2.3   All fasteners used for exterior deck fittings shall be
                       CRES 316 material unless stated otherwise within the
                       specification.
               7.2.4   Threaded fittings: Existing threaded fittings shall be
                       tapped and chased prior to securing equipment.
               7.2.5   Clean-up: All areas affected by the performance of this
                       work shall be cleaned up at completion in its entirety.
                       Trash generated shall be disposed of in dumpsters located
                       alongside the ship.

       7.3     Exterior Kick Pipe Replacements



3PSC                                                               Page 100 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             7.3.1     The Contractor shall ensure that all interferences are
                       temporarily removed and reinstalled after all work is
                       accomplished.
             7.3.2     Ensure all equipment is tagged out prior to performing
                       repairs
             7.3.3     Temporarily disconnect, remove and pull the existing
                       cable through the wasted cable kickpipe.
             7.3.4     Crop and renew the wasted kickpipes as listed below
                       using sch80 kickpipes and brass gland nuts as
                       appropriately sized to accommodate the cables.
             7.3.5     List of items to be reworked/repaird

       A.    Kickpipe: Located on the focsle deck alongside the     Quantity – 1
             forward mast, 1 each with ¾” cable. Kickpipe is        each
             detached from the deck.
       B.    Kickpipe: Located on the flying bridge, one each       Quantity – 1
             kickpipe is detached from the deck. This cable is ½” each
             diameter and is connected to solid state antenna
             located on handrail
       C.    Kickpipes. Rescue Boat Davit Controls – All 8 cables Quantity – 8
             connected to the motor controller are to be renewed    each
       D.    Bulkhead Penetration:                                  Quantity – 1
             Scullery at 01-29-0. Repack existing watertight        each
             penetration with RISE Firestop Sealant. Existing
             sealant to be renewed and replaced in its entirety
             with contractor furnished RISE SEALANT.
       E.    Vent Piping Renewal: ABS OUTSTANDING RECOMMENDATION: Quantity – 1
             Crop and renew 5 feet of vent piping from the aft      each section
             pump room seachest using 2” sch80 piping. Section
             of piping to be replaced is located in winch room
             alongside ballast tank vent piping from tank 4-120-
             1.
       F.    Duplex Strainer: Disconnect, remove and replace        Quantity – 1
             original duplex strainer serving RO units 1 and 2      each duplex
             with GFE replacement duplex strainer. Modify           strainer.
             suction and discharge piping (90/10 CuNi) to accept
             the new strainer. Strainer to be secured via
             fasteners to the deck using existing foundation.
             Note: the original is 1.5” piping and the new
             strainer is 2” piping. Allow for modifying the
             piping diameter to suit. Dispose original strainer
             as scrap.
       7.4    Final Test/Inspections
              7.4.1    Upon completion of works listed, the Contractor shall
                       contact the Port Engineer to perform a walk-through of
                       all items.
              7.4.2    All newly installed watertight cable penetrations shall
                       be hose tested using freshwater. These tests shall be
                       accomplished in the presence of the Port Engineer and
                       Chief Engineer.
                       7.4.2.1 Note: Interior penetrations shall be tested
                                using soap and air vice freshwater.

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 101 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Existing RO Suction Strainer as shown.




3PSC                                                             Page 102 of 280
                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




200 Series Items Main Propulsion Machinery




3PSC                                                Page 103 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 201    Disassemble And Clean In Place Generators 1 – 4

1.0 Abstract
      The intent of this item is to clean in place all four (4)         generators.

2.0 References
    2.1   The Baylor Technical Manual Titled: Instruction And Service Manual
    Ac Synchronous Generator Model: G855PUV-372 Is onboard the ship and
    available for use.

3.0 Item Location/Description/Quantity
    3.1    Location: Generator Room 3-80-0
    3.2    Quantity: 4 Each
    3.3    Description
         3.3.1 Mfr: Baylor Electric (now National Oil Well or Siemens)
         3.3.2 Model G855PUV-372
         3.3.3 1825kw, 600vac, 2508 Amps – Generators 1 and 2
         3.3.4 2435kw, 600vac, 3200 Amps – Generators 3 and 4
         3.3.5 Weight: 18,000lbs

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services
    3PSC shall furnish the following materials for each generator through
    National Oil Well Varco (www.nov.com)

       Part No             Description               Qty/Gen        Total
        G51995         Sleeve, Bearing                1            4
        G51230         Sleeve, Bearing Retainer       1            4
        G21134         Seal, Bearing                  2            8
        G20534         Bearing                        1            4
        G20934         RTD                            1            4
        6550-25-0016   Spring                         1            4
        6550-25-0017   Washer                         1            4

5.0 Notes:     None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:
    The ABS Surveyor And Port Engineer Shall Inspect These Generators
    Throughout All Phases Of Repairs And Testing.

7.0 Statement Of Work
    7.1 The Contractor Shall Provide The Services Of An Authorized Baylor
         Generator Service Facility (www.nov.com)to Supervise All Removals,
         Disassemblies, Repairs, Reassemblies, Reinstallation And Testing Of
         The #1 And #2 Generators.
    7.2 Perform the following tests both prior to removal and after completion
         of repairs on both generators:
         7.2.1   Megger test for the stator, rotor, exciter stator, and PMA
                 stator
         7.2.2   Polarization index test for 1 minute @ 10,000mohms
         7.2.3   Polarization index test for 10 minutes @ 80,000mohms
         7.2.4   Air gap readings, generator (both ends) and exciter end

       7.3 Completely disconnect the generators from the EMD engines. pull the
           rotors to allow for complete inspection of the rotors and stators.



3PSC                                                               Page 104 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.4 clean each generator armature and stator using approved solvents and
            warm fresh water. do not exceed 30psi pressure when applying cleaning
            solutions.
       7.5 Rinse thoroughly using freshwater and allow to dry.
       7.6 Apply air dry spray varnish to the stator windings and rotor..
       7.7 Reinstall the rotor assembly and seal the housing. install heaters and
            air dry to 250 degrees f in order to remove all moisture. Take and
            record megger readings on the rotor, stator and field poles every
            hour.
       7.8 Upon completion of drying, re-take and record polarization index and
            insulation resistance readings.
       7.9 Reassemble the generator using Government furnished bearings and
            seals. Machine the hardened steel sleeve to within the tolerances
            listed in reference 2.1 to suit the end bearing.
       7.10 Align the generators using laser alignment instruments and authorized
            service representative . Secure in place. Take and record readings
            listed in paragraph 7.2.
       7.11 Test operate each generator under load for a minimum of 8 hours.
            record the generator temperatures and vibration as required by
            reference 2.1.
       7.12 Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables - Furnish three hard copies
            plus one electronic copy (.pdf format or MS Word) of a report that
            includes the following information:
              A. Before and after megger readings
              B. Before and after PI readings
              C. Before and after air gap readings on the rotor and exciter
              D. Service report of findings
       7.13 Manufacturer’s Representative: The contractor shall provide the
              services of a Manufacturer’s Representative from National Oil Well
              Varco (formerly called Baylor Electric).

8.0 General Requirements:    None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 105 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 202     Replace Main Motor Armatures

1.0 Abstract
    The intent of this item is to replace the two each main motor armatures and
    associated components.

3.0 References
    2.1   The General Electric Technical Manual Number T-AGS60CL-011, titled
          DC Marine Propulsion Motors, is onboard the ship and available for
          use.
    2.2   The Cooper Bearing installation manual is available for use.

3.0 Item Location/Description/Quantity
    3.1   Location:     Main Propulsion Motor Room
    3.2   Quantity:     2 each
    3.3   Type:      CDF 1941
    3.4   HP:        4000
    3.5   RPM:       900
    3.6   Volts:     750
    3.7   Amps:      4175
    3.8   Wound:     Shunt


4.0 Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services
    3PSC shall furnish the following materials and services.

       Part no       Description                Manufacturer       Qty/Motor         Total
                     Armature, Main             General            1                 2
                     Propulsion                 Electric
       01B800EX      Bearing, Aft               Cooper             1                 2
       6336-C3       Bearing, Forward           SKF                1                 2
       P/N 5100-     Retaining Ring for         General            1                 2
       700           Forward Bearing            Electric
                     (spring Clip)
       n/a           Stator Tie Down Bolts,     Various            10                20
                     Steel hex socket head,
                     1”-8, 4” length, grade
                     8. Torque setting:
                     500ft-lbs
       2192          Brushes, Main              Carbone            160               320
                     Propulsion
       4001A1353JP   Brush Holders              General            80                160
       , Grade 1                                Electric
       Grit 100      Garnet Cloth, 200feet      Norton             1 roll of         2 rolls
                                                                   200 feet

    3PSC SHALL PROVIDE A TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE THROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE REPAIR
    PROCEDURE.
5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:
      The ABS Surveyor And Port Engineer Shall Inspect These Propulsion Motors
      Throughout All Phases Of Repairs And Testing.




3PSC                                                                    Page 106 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



7.0 Statement Of Work
    7.1 The Contractor shall work under the supervision of the assigned
         technical representative. Provide machinists, riggers, electricians,
         laborers as required to accomplish all works listed in this item. Two
         each armatures shall be delivered to the shipyard and stored in
         accordance with the GFE Delivery Work Item listed elsewhere in this
         specification.
    7.2 All pieces of equipment removed are to be tagged prior to removal.
         Each tag shall list the work item number and the name of the equipment
         along with listing of PORT or STARBOARD unit.
         7.2.1     The neutral plane on both units shall be matchmarked and
                   photographed for reference when reassembling the main
                   propulsion motors.
    7.3 Temporarily remove all duct work, fire fighting systems, piping,
         lighting, and other interferences that are installed directly overhead
         of the port and starboard propulsion motor.
    7.4 Crop and remove the deck directly overhead of each motor. This shall
         be performed prior to the disassembly of each propulsion motor. Cover
         each motor sufficiently with fire cloth and have proper firewatch on
         station throughout.
           7.4.1   This deck section shall be reused during reassembly. Proper
                   cutting procedures using fine arc is required to ensure
                   proper fitup during reinstallation.
           7.4.2   Install temporary border on main deck using 2” x 4” boards
                   that are glue to the main deck. Fabricate plywood cover to
                   place over the opening and the border. to prevent the ingress
                   of water while the deck section is removed.
           7.4.3   Rope off the immediate area to prevent personnel from walking
                   on the plywood.
    7.5    Uncouple the main propulsion motor from the Z-drive upper gearbox.
           NOTE: This requirement is also called out in the Z-drive inspection
           item.
    7.6    Take and record insulation resistance readings on the motor and
           field windings. Submit in a report to the Port Engineer.
    7.7    Disconnect electrically and mechanically the stator.
    7.8    Temporarily remove the top half of the stator and rig from the ship
           to a machine shop/electrical shop.
    7.9    Disconnect electrically and mechanically the commutator brush holder
           assembly. Rig from ship and place in the machine shop/electrical
           shop.
         7.9.1     Prior to removal, take and record brush holder clearance from
                   the commutator.
    7.10 Disconnect electrically and mechanically the main motor armature and
           land ashore. Protect bearing surfaces.   Temporarily store the
           armatures in a climate controlled environment. These armatures are
           going to be placed in the same crate that the overhauled armatures
           are received in.
           7.10.1 The forward and aft bearings are going to be replaced using
                   GFE spares.
    7.11 Provide electricians to clean both the halves of stator using lint
           free rags. Do not use solvents.
    7.12 Clean the entire air plenum. Temporarily remove the forced air
           strainers and clean using dry compressed air.
    7.13 Take delivery of GFE armature and install in place of both armatures
           recently removed using GFE bearings. The Onsite GFE Service
           Technician shall provide guidance for installation and alignment.




3PSC                                                             Page 107 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.14   The commutator shall be lightly etched using grit paper to allow for
              proper seating of newly installed main motor brushes.
       7.15   After completion of commutator work, install entire commutator brush
              holder using new GFE brush holders and brushes. Each brush holder
              shall be installed so that the clearance is within the tolerances as
              listed in the technical manual.
              7.15.1    The original brush holders (160 each) are to be
                        reassembled, boxed and returned to the Port Engineer.
       7.16   Install the upper half of the stator assembly and secure in place
              using existing dowels.    Tighten and torque to proper specifications
              the GFE tiedown bolts.
       7.17   Reconnect all stator wiring connections and then take insulation
              resistance readings on the main motor armature and field windings.
              Submit a condition report with readings to the Port Engineer.
       7.18   Reconnect and torque to ASTM standards all main motor wiring within
              the motor pothead connections.
       7.19   Reinstall the intermediate shaft section connecting the main
              propulsion motor to the upper gearbox using existing V-seals and GFE
              furnished Shell Rhodina 150 grease.
       7.20   Provide the services of a local firm to perform laser or optical
              alignment of the main propulsion motor to the Z-drive upper gear
              box. Provide report of alignment and recommendations for
              realignment, if required.
       7.21   Reinstall all duct work, lighting, and any other interferences
              temporarily removed in the main propulsion motor room to original
              locations.
       7.22   Reinstall the main deck section in accordance with ABS Rules for
              Steel Shipbuilding. All welders shall be ABS certified and all
              certificates shall be available to the attending ABS Surveyor.
       7.23   The contractor shall allow for the following inspections to be
              witnessed by the ABS Surveyor and Port Engineer:
              A. Fit-up
              B. First pass weld and backgouge.
              C. Final weld
              D. Non-destructive test in way of the welds (Hose test or dye
              penetrant test – It is the contractor’s requirement to perform these
              tests to the satisfaction of the attending Surveyor.
       7.24   All new and disturbed areas shall be painted to match the original
              color scheme. Surface preparation of SSPC-SP-3 shall be required
              prior to painting. For the exterior deck, two coats of Ameron 240
              shall be applied at 5 mils DFT.
       7.25   The main propulsion motors shall be operationally tested and run-in
              under the direct supervision of the attending GFE Service Technician
              and Chief Engineer. These tests shall be performed during the Dock
              trial and sea trial.
       7.26   Disposition of original armatures.
              7.26.1    The contractor shall package and crate the original
                        armatures in the same crates that the new/overhauled
                        armatures arrived.
              7.26.2    All bearing surfaces shall be protected with rubber gasket
                        material.
              7.26.3    The commutator and risers shall be wrapped in protective
                        plastic and sealed water-resistant.
              7.26.4    The boxes shall be labeled as required in the item titled,
                        RECEIPT, CARE, HANDLING and SHIPMENT OF GFM.
              7.26.5    No action shall be taken by the contractor to ship these
                        armatures. The contractor is required to ensure that the


3PSC                                                                Page 108 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                       packaging is suitable to withstand shipment to the USA via
                       ocean freight.
       7.27 Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables - Furnish three hard copies
            plus one electronic copy (.pdf format or MS Word) of a report that
            includes the following information:
              A. Before and after megger readings
              B. Before and after PI readings
              C. Before and after air gap readings for the armature.
              D. Before and after brush holder clearance readings.
              E. Service report of findings

8.0 General Requirements:     None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 109 of 280
                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




300 Series Items   Electrical




3PSC                                              Page 110 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 301 Cathodic Protection System - Inspect & Repair
1.0   Abstract
      This item inspects and repairs the impressed current cathodic
      protection system.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   References are onboard the ship and available for use.
       2.1.1 Navsea dwg. No. 633-6782998, Cathodic Protection System,
             Elementary Wiring Diagram
       2.1.2 Navsea tech manual no. T9633-AJ-OPI-010, CATHODIC PROTECTION
             SYSTEM, available onboard the vessel.

3.0    Item Location/Description
       3.1   Location/Quantity:
             3.1.1 Control unit, generator room 3-80-0; qty: one (1)
             3.1.2 Power supply, generator room 3-80-0; qty: one (1)
             3.1.3 Fwd anodes, low density storeroom 3-40-0; qty: two (2)
             3.1.4 Aft anodes, void 4-132-0; qty: two (2)
             3.1.5 Fwd reference electrode, 4-15-0; qty: one (1)
             3.1.6 Aft reference electrode, 4-112-1; qty: one (1)

3.2    Item Description/Manufacturer’s data
       3.2.1 The manufacturer (US Filter) has a local Singapore technician for
             the inspections and repairs, but it is recommended that the
             contractor contact the USA office for the initial correspondence.
             Robert S. Weddle
             Global Service and Sales Manager, Electrocatalytic
             Siemens Water Technologies Corp.
             2 Milltown Ct.
             Union, NJ 07083
             robert.weddle@siemens.com
             908-851-6928 Office
             908-851-6906 Fax
             www.water.siemens.com

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment
       4.1   Siemens Part number 32622-NG: Reference Cell Kit, quantity: 2
             each

5.0    Notes
       5.1   The control unit and power supply are contained in one assembly.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:
       6.1   All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port
             Engineer.

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1   Under the direction of the Contractor Furnished Manufacturer’s
             Representative, accomplish an inspection and operational test of
             the cathodic protection system automatic controller and power
             supply prior to drydocking the vessel.
             7.1.1 Take and record the Voltage readings at each anode and each
                   reference cell.
             7.1.2 If required, adjust automatic controller and power supply
                   for correct output for each reference cell and anode.



3PSC                                                             Page 111 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             7.1.3 Provide a written condition report to the Port Engineer of
                   all final voltage readings.
       7.2   Under the direction of the manufacturer’s representative,
             accomplish an inspection of the hull shell plating, each anode,
             reference cell and dielectric shield immediately upon drydocking
             of the vessel.
             7.2.1 Inspect anode connection boxes and cofferdams.
             7.2.2 Freshwater wash and clean with rag all anodes and shields.
             7.2.3 Reface the mounting anodes studs with capastic paint.
             7.2.4 Replace the reference cells with GFE spares using new
                   stainless fasteners.
             7.2.5 Provide a written condition report to the Port Engineer.

       7.3   Any repairs or parts required as a result of the inspections in
             paragraphs 7.1 and 7.2 will be the subject of a change order.
       7.4   Install plywood protective covers over anodes and reference cells
             of the cathodic protection system.
             7.4.1 Plywood covers shall remain in place during the entire
                   drydocking period, except while accomplishing work
                   associated with anodes and reference cells. Remove the
                   plywood covers prior to undocking the vessel and carefully
                   remove any paint or contaminants from the anodes and
                   reference cells.
       7.5   After undocking of the vessel and under the direction of the
             manufacturer’s representative, accomplish an operational test of
             the cathodic protection system and certify operation to the
             satisfaction of the port engineer.
             7.5.1 Measure and record the output current readings versus the
                   reference electrode voltage for each anode.
             7.5.2 Provide a written report of readings to the Port Engineer
       7.6   At the completion of testing, SECURE THE SYSTEM in its entirety.
             System shall remain OFF for the first 30 days after undocking due
             to newly applied coating system.
       7.7   Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
             7.7.1 Provide a copy of the manufacturer’s representative’s
                   service report to the Port Engineer.
                   A.    Report prior to docking of the system as found
                   B.    Report of the system as found while on dock.
                   C.    Report of the operational test performed after
                         undocking.

8.0    General Requirements:   None additional.




3PSC                                                              Page 112 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 302 Modify Height of Interphase Coils
1.0   Abstract
      This item calls for lowering the height of the interphase Coils inside
      its enclosure, which causes the top to heat up due to induced flux
      current.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   See enclosed photos for reference.

3.0    Item Location/Description
       3.1   Location/Quantity:
             3.1   Location: Power Conversion Room – 2nd deck aft of EOS
             3.2   Quantity: 2 each Interphase Reactors
             3.3   Description: Aluminum channel supports these units.
                   a)    There are 8 pieces of channel iron per unit to be
                         worked.
                   b)    There are 4 each diagonal pieces per unit to be
                         worked.
                   c)    Twelve sections per unit to be cut in order to lower
                         the coils.


4.0    Government Furnished Equipment; None

5.0    Notes
       5.1   The control unit and power supply are contained in one assembly.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:
       6.1   All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port
             Engineer.

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1   The Contractor shall not commence work without first consulting
             with the Port Engineer to confirm the exact height the interphase
             coils shall be lowered.
       7.2   Ship’s force shall tag out the interphase coils prior to
             commencement of work.
       7.3   The coils shall be supported throughout the repair process either
             by shimming at the bottom to support the weight of the coil and
             enclosure or overhead suspension
       7.3   Cut the existing support structure approximately 3.5 inches to
             allow for a clearance of 3.5 inches between the coils and
             insulating panels.
             7.3.1 Proper protection in way of the coils during all hot work
                   is mandatory.
       7.4   Re-weld the support structure after cropping the 3.5” section.

8.0    General Requirements – None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 113 of 280
                4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Enclosure 2.1




3PSC                                    Page 114 of 280
       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




3PSC                           Page 115 of 280
                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




400 Series – Comms & Navigation Equipment




3PSC                                                Page 116 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 401    Cleaning of C-Band Radome

1.0    Abstract:
       This item provides for cleaning the satcom antenna dome.

2.0     References/enclosures: None Additional

3.0    Item location/description:
       3.1   Location: After Main Mast, upper deck
             Description: Approximately 10’ diameter plastic sheathed radome

4.0    Government furnished material: None

5.0    Notes
       3M Marine and Specialty Vehicle Department
       3M Center, Building 223-IN-13
       St. Paul, MN 55114
       http://solutions.3m.com/wps/portal/3M/en_US/Marine/Home/?WT.mc_id=www.3
       m.com/US/auto_marine_aero/marine/

6.0    Quality assurance requirements:
       6.1 All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the 3PSC
       Port Engineer.

7.0    Statement of work required – This item shall be accomplished between
       February 21 and March 1, 2010
       7.1   The contractor shall provide all labor, staging, and cleaning
             materials required to accomplish this work item.

       7.2     Clean the outer surface of the satcom antenna dome with a non-
               abrasive detergent or soap, soft bristled brushes and fresh
               water. Do not use HP washers to clean the exterior of the
               radome.
               7.2.1 The intent of the cleaning is to remove soot buildup from
                     exhaust stack gases.
       7.3     Apply two coats of 3M Marine Liquid Wax, part number 051131-09027
               to the exterior of the dome after completion of cleaning and
               wiping dry.
       7.4     Upon completion of cleaning and waxing, allow the Port Engineer
               and NAVO Rep inspect for cleanliness.

8.0    General Requirements:   None additional




3PSC                                                                Page 117 of 280
                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




500 Series Auxiliary and Machinery Repairs




3PSC                                                Page 118 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 501     Cleaning of Heat Exchangers

1.0 Abstract
    Clean various system salt water coolers.

2.0 References: None Additional

3.0 Item location/description/quantity
    3.1   Locations: Throughout the ship
    3.2   Description:
          3.2.1 – quantity (2) each – A/C Coolers
          3.2.2 – quantity (2) each - Refrigeration coolers
          3.2.3 – quantity (2) each - Main propulsion motor coolers
          3.2.4 – quantity (2) each - Steering system coolers
          3.2.5 – quantity (2) each - Thruster lube oil coolers
          3.2.6 – quantity (4) each - EMD jacket water coolers

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment: None Additional

5.0 Notes:
    5.1    Goodway Tube Cleaner, www.goodway.com

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:
    all work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer and
    Chief Engineer.

7.0 Statement of work
    7.1     The Contractor shall contact the Chief Engineer prior to starting
            any work to ensure that the valves are secured and seawater system
            is drained

       7.2     Temporarily disconnect the necessary piping, heads and manifolds in
               order to allow for inspection of the coolers listed in paragraph
               3.0.
                     7.2.1 Allow the Chief Engineer and Port Engineer to inspect
                           the coolers prior to cleaning.

       7.3   Cleaning:
              7.3.1 Condenser/Heat Exchanger Heads
                    A.    Clean each head for each condenser by conveying ashore
                          and scaling to SSPC-SP-3.
                    B.    Apply two coats Apexior #3 epoxy along internals of
                          each head.
                    C.    Clean all gasket mating surfaces and polish to accept
                          new gaskets.
                    D.    Renew zincs using contractor furnished pencil types.

               7.3.2 Condenser/Heat Exchanger Piping Tubes
                     A.    Contractor shall procure a GOODWAY tube cleaner as well
                           as the appropriate sized nylon brushes to clean each
                           condenser.
                     B.    Each tube bundle shall be cleaned using nylon bristle
                           brushes set in a coil, wrapped around a wear resistant
                           polymer core.



3PSC                                                               Page 119 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                   C.    Furnish and install nylon tube savers measuring 6”
                         length on the inlet sides of the main motor and air
                         conditioning condensers.
                         i.    Allow P/E to inspect new tube savers prior to
                               installation.
                   D.    Turn over the tube cleaner and brushes to the Chief
                         Engineer at the completion of work.
             7.3.3 Heat exchanger piping cleaning – EMD engines 1-4
                   A.    The contractor shall temporarily disconnect and remove
                         the check valve on the discharge side of the raw water
                         pump providing cooling to the heat exchanger. Clean
                         the entire length of pipe from the check valve to the
                         head of all zebra mussels and fouling using tube
                         cleaners and scalers.
                   B.    Allow the Chief Engineer to inspect each piping section
                         after cleaning and prior to reinstalling check valve
                         and head.
       7.4   At the completion of cleaning, the Contractor shall notify the P/E
             in order to schedule an inspection for both the heads and tubes.
       7.5   After inspection and approval by the Port Engineer, reassemble the
             units as per original installation using new gaskets, new zincs
             where required and stainless steel fasteners.
       7.6   upon completion of all work accomplished, conduct a leak test using
             system pressure. Allow the chief engineer and Port Engineer to
             inspect for leaks. Repair all leaks as required.
       7.7   Clean up all dirt and debris generated, and wipe down the imeediate
             and adjacent spaces to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer and
             Chief Engineer.

8.0 General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 120 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 502     Recondition Anchor Windlass

1.0 Abstract:
    Provide all material, labor, and services required to recondition and
    overhaul the anchor windlass.

2.0 References/enclosures:
      2.1 References:
          The unit technical manual is available onboard for contractor use:
          book number 0910-LP-606-4900

3.0 Item location/description:
      3.1 Location: 01-11-0
      3.2 Description:    Anchor Windlass
                          Mfg.: McElroy
                          Model: MDW-193-LBH

4.0 Government Furnished material /services
      4.1 Amercoat 240 White – 3 gallons
      4.2 Amercoat 240 Gray – 3 gallons
      4.3 Amershield Gray – 2 gallons
      4.4 Gear Oil – Shell Omala 150 – 50 gallons

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality assurance requirements:
    All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and, inspections shall be to
    the satisfaction of the ABS surveyor and Port Engineer.

7.0 Statement of work:
      7.1 Disconnect and temporarily remove the entire anchor windlass
          assembly from the ship and convey to shop for overhaul.
            7.1.1 Scale the following areas in their entirety:
                  7.1.1.1 Anchor windlass mounting flange
                  7.1.1.2 Fixed anchor windlass foundation in its entirety.
            7.1.2 Perform freshwater washdown of area using degreasers as
                  required. Perform final wash down prior to applying paint
                  and prove all drain holes clear
            7.1.3 Apply two coats of Amercoat 240 on all prepared areas and
                  adjoining deck.
      7.2 The gear box and wildcat drives shall be opened, cleaned, and
          inspected. Submit a condition report of findings to the Port
          Engineer.
            7.2.1 Each wildcat drive fork shall be cleaned and dressed and made
                  free on its shaft slide.
            7.2.2 Allow for inspection of the drive gears and shaft by the 3PSC
                  Port Engineer and ABS surveyor
      7.3 Each band brake shall be removed and the brake lining / friction
          pads renewed with contractor-furnished material.

          Note:
          The dimension of each brake pad is 13mm " x 150mm" x 3.5m'.

               7.3.1 All operating and control linkages, operating lead screws,
                     and brake-band hinges shall be disassembled, cleaned,



3PSC                                                               Page 121 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                    inspected and refurbished. At a minimum, all mating and
                    riding surfaces are to be dressed to provide a smooth
                    properly fitted surface.
              7.3.2 All bearings and bearing surfaces of the hand operating lead
                    screw are to be cleaned and inspected.
              7.3.3 The lead screw shall be fully removed, cleaned and inspected.
                    The entire length of the threads shall be dressed and de-
                    burred. The lead screw shall be measured for trueness.
                          7.3.3.1.1 If required, each shall be straightened to
                                    within 0.01 of an inch.

               7.3.4 Each brake drum shall be fully removed, landed, and
                     transported to the contractor's facility for inspection and
                     overhaul. Each drum shall be cleaned, inspected, and
                     measured for wear and trueness.
               7.3.5 The friction pad riding area of each drum shall be
                     Skim cut to remove surface pitting and to provide a smooth
                     and proper seating surface.
               7.3.6 Allow for the abs surveyor and port engineer to inspect upon
                     completion.
       7.4    The devils claw / chain stopper of each chain shall be fully
                    removed, cleaned and inspected.
               7.4.1 Each assembly shall be freed up to allow proper movement.
               7.4.2 The profile of each claw, where they engage the chains
                     Shall be built up by welding to restore metal loss.
                     Following welding, each claw shall be ground to restore the
                     original profile.
       7.5   The entire anchor windlass shall be reassembled using anti-seize
             compound on all fasteners.
               7.5.1 The contractor shall grease and lubricate all mechanisms,
                     linkages, and grease fittings, following reassembly.
               7.5.2 Following satisfactory overhaul and testing, the entire unit
                     shall be prepared (removing any rust areas to bare metal, sp-
                     3), spot primed, and top coated with coatings provided by the
                     vessel.
       7.6   Return the anchor windlass assembly and reinstall using new
             stainless fasteners.
       7.7   Prove the proper operation of the unit during dock trials, or sea
             trials in the presence of the port engineer and abs surveyor.   The
             system shall be operated under power as well as free fall to
             demonstrate proper operation.

8.0 General requirements:    None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 122 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 503   Annual Servicing of Liferafts

1.0    Abstract
       The liferafts are due for their annual servicing.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   List of USCG approved liferaft service facilities as found on the
             USCG website. www.cgmix.uscg.mil

3.0    Locations/Description
       3.1   6 each 20-person liferafts manufactured by Zodiac on various
             decks.
       3.2   2 each 6-person liferafts manufactured by SWITLIK located on each
             HSL.

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Materials: None

5.0    Notes
       5.1   The Contractor shall coordinate delivery dates to/from the ship
             with the Port Engineer and with the liferaft service facility.
       5.2   Rafts last hydro-tested in 2009.
       5.3   Pamarine Private Limited
             10 Chia Ping Road
             Singapore 619978
             Telephone 65 6264 0823
             Facsimile 65 6261 4887
                   or
             YOKOHAMA TSUSHO CO., LTD
             3-7-24, Shinyamashita, Naka-ku
             Yokohama, Japan
             TEL: 81 45 6218588/FAX: 81 45 6218662
             Email:ohta@yokotsu.co.jp

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements: All work shall be accomplished in
       accordance with USCG and CFR servicing requirements.

7.0    Statement of Work – Work shall start immediately after vessel arrival.
       The hydrostatic tests shall be done as soon as practical in order to
       confirm that all rafts passed the 5-year hydrostatic test.
        7.1 The Contractor shall temporarily remove the liferafts from the ship
            and convey to the nearest available USCG approved liferaft facility
            for the annual inspection/servicing. Reference 2.1 provides a
            listing of approved facilities for Zodiac liferafts. The contractor
            shall confirm in advance that the company chosen to perform the
            service is still a USCG approved testing/service facility.
        7.2 The rafts are to be placed on wooden pallets and strapped in place
            to prevent shifting in transit.
        7.3 The Contractor shall bear the cost to subcontract with the approved
            service facility to perform the required annual servicing and 5-year
            hydrostatic testing in the presence of the USCG Inspector. Costs for
            expired items found within the rafts or any incidental repairs shall
            be covered by a change order.




3PSC                                                             Page 123 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.4 Scale the existing cradle supports to bare steel. Apply two coats of
           White Epoxy paint at 5 mils DFT.   Furnish and install new foam
           matting measuring ¼” thick along the cradle supports. Glue in place
           using Armorflex 520 Adhesive or equivalent.
       7.5 Upon completion of servicing, the Contractor shall return the rafts
           to the ship and reinstall in their original locations.   The ship's
           force shall reconnect the hydrostatic releases.
       7.6 REPORTS/TESTS/INSPECTIONS/DELVERABLES: Along with the liferafts,
           there shall be liferaft service certifications. Originals and 1 set
           of copies shall be delivered to the Port Engineer.

8.0         General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 124 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 504   Weight Tests on Mission Related Deck Equipment (MRDE)

1.0 Abstract:
    Accomplish weight tests on mission related deck equipment.

2.0 References/Enclosures:
    2.1   Tech manuals are onboard the vessel and shall be made available
          upon request.

3.0 Item/Description:
    3.1   Location: Main Deck
    3.2   Description:
          3.2.1   stern U-frame: SWL - 15,000 lbs
          3.2.2   starboard U-frame: SWL – 10,000 lbs
          3.2.3   articulated davit: SWL – 4000 lbs

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment: None

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements: None Additional

7.0 statement of work required:
      7.1 Provide the necessary labor, material, and equipment to accomplish
          this work item. This shall include crane services, test weights,
          rigging, etc.

       7.2 Stern “U” frame - The Contractor shall relocate the stern U frame
           from is stowed position to its working position on the stern.
           Furnish 16 each 1” tiedown bolts, grade 8 stainless steel to secure
           the fram e place.
             7.2.1 Suspend a load of 18,750 lbs (8500kg) from the stern “U”
                   frame in the full outboard position.
             7.2.2 Move the load inboard as far as it will go until the
                   hydraulic rams are fully extended, then return the loaded
                   frame to an approved intermediate position and hold for five
                   (5) minutes without creeping.
             7.2.3 At the conclusion of testing, return the stern frame to its
                   stowed location. Tiedown bolts shall be tagged, bagged, and
                   turned over to the Port Engineer.

       7.3   Starboard “A” frame – 2 separate tests
              7.3.1 Test 1: Suspend a load of 12,500 lbs (5675kg) from the center
                    sheave located between the frames on the starboard “A” frame
                    while in the in the full outboard position.
              7.3.2 Move the load inboard as far as it will go until the
                    hydraulic rams are fully extended, then return the loaded
                    frame to an approved intermediate position and hold for five
                    (5) minutes without creeping.
              7.3.3 Test 2: Suspend a load of 5000 lbs (2270) from the cantilever
                    arm extending forward from the A-frame.
              7.3.4 Move the load inboard as far as it will go until the
                    hydraulic rams are fully extended, then return the loaded
                    frame to an approved intermediate position and hold for five



3PSC                                                               Page 125 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                   (5) minutes to check for any deflection in way of where the
                   davit arm is welded to the A frame.

       7.4 Articulated Davit
             7.4.1 suspend a load of 5,000 lbs (2270kg) from the articulated “J”
                   davit in the full outboard position.
             7.4.2 Move the load inboard as far as it will go until the
                   hydraulic rams are fully extended, then return the loaded
                   frame to an approved intermediate position and hold for five
                   (5) minutes without creeping.

       7.5 Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
           7.5.1   Report - Provide a written report to the Port Engineer
                   attesting to the completion of subject weight tests and
                   include the following:
                   A. Name of Contractor performing tests
                   B. Ship’s Representative onsite during testing
                   C. Type of weight used (fixed or water)
                   D. Date of testing.
           7.5.2   Deliverable – New tiedown bolts for stern U frame are to be
                   turned over to the Port Engineer.

8.0    General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 126 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 505   Repair the RHIB Boat Inflatable Collar (HZV09051)

1.0 Abstract
    The Zodiac RHIB boat collar is leaking and in need of repair.

2.0 References/Enclosures:
    2.1   Tech manuals are onboard the vessel and shall be made available
          upon request.

3.0 Item/Description:
    3.1   Location: Main Deck
    3.2   Description:  Zodiac Model 590

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment: None

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements: None Additional

7.0 Statement of work required:
      7.1 Provide the necessary labor, material, and equipment to accomplish
          this work item.
      7.2 Temporarily remove the RHIB from the ship and transport to a
          shoreside staging facility that is under cover. The area where the
          RHIB shall be stored MUST be climate controlled (20deg C minimum)
      7.3 Freshwater wash the interior and exterior of the RHIB boat.
      7.4 Inflate the RHIB collar. Spray the exterior with soap and water and
          closely examine the inflatable collar for leaks. Check all seams
          and fill/relief valves.
      7.5 Provide condition report of findings to the Port Engineer of all
          leaks detected. Repairs shall be covered via change order.

       7.5 Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
           7.5.1   Report - Provide a written report to the Port Engineer of the
                   leaks discovered during pressure testing of the inflatable
                   collar.

8.0    General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 127 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item no. 506    ASW Cooling Isolation Valve Renewals & Repairs

1.0     Abstract
        Replace various valves in main motor cooling water system with
        Contractor furnished replacements. Overhaul various valves in the main
        motor cooling water system.

2.0     References/Enclosures
        2.1   MSC Standard Item: Overhaul Miscellaneous Valves

3.0     Item location/Description
        3.1   Propulsion motor room (2-136-0)
        3.2   Six(6)- 4 inch wafer type butterfly valves, bronze bodied and
              bronze discs to be replaced with contractor furnished spares.
              There are 3 each wafer valves for the main motor cooling water
              supply/discharge.
        3.3   Four(4)- 4 inch globe valves are to be overhauled.

4.0    Government Furnished Material:   None

5.0    Notes: None Additional

6.0    Quality assurance requirements – None Additional

7.0    Statement of work required
        7.1   The contractor shall provide all labor and miscellaneous material
              required to remove and install six (6) wafer type butterfly
              valves for the propulsion motor air cooler.
        7.2   Temporarily remove four (4) globe valves from the main motor
              cooling system and perform a shop overhaul on the 4” valves in
              accordance with enclosure 2.1.
        7.2   Upon completion of shop overhaul, reinstall the valves using
              contractor furnished gaskets and stainless steel fasteners.
        7.3   Test – Operationally test the entire seawater cooling system in
              the presence of the Chief Engineer. Repair all leaks as required.

8.0    General requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 128 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Enclosure 2.1: Overhaul Miscellaneous Valves
Disconnect valves, mark/label all valves removed to insure correct location
for reinstallation and convey to Contractor's shop for repairs. Hard blank
all openings as a result of removals to prevent contamination. Work shall be
accomplished such that normal ship operations may be maintained.

Match mark valve parts for reassembly. Completely disassemble, clean and
examine all valve parts for defects in the presence of the MSC REP. and
Regulatory Bodies. Submit a condition report to the MSC REP. listing all
parts requiring repair that are beyond the scope of this item and those that
require replacement, these items will subject of a Change Order.

Repair valves as follows:
Straighten stems to within 0.002 inch total indicator reading. Polish stem to
a 32 Root-Mean-Square (RMS) finish in way of packing surface and remove
raised edges and foreign matter. Chase and tap exposed threaded areas.
Dress and true gasket mating surfaces.

Machine, grind or lap and spot-in gate to seat or disc to seat to obtain a
360 degree continuous contact.

Verify contact using the blueing method. For gate valves transfer line shall
not exceed 3/16 inch in width and shall appear within the lower 75 percent of
the gate seating surface. For globe valves, transfer line shall not exceed
1/16 inch in width.

Reassemble valves installing new gaskets, fasteners and packing in accordance
with manufacturer's specifications.

Hydrostatically test valves at design test pressure and prove tight in the
presence of the MSC REP. and Regulatory Bodies.

Test valve body with valve in the open position for 10 minutes. Allowable
leakage: None.

For Globe valves test for seat tightness in the direction tending to open the
valve.

For gate valves test for seat tightness alternately on each side of the gate
with the opposite side open for inspection.

Tests shall be continued for a minimum of 3 minutes if there is no evidence
of leakage, or in the event of visible leakage, until an accurate
determination of leakage can be made. Maximum allowable leakage: 10 cubic
centimeters (cc) per hour, per inch of nominal pipe size. Valve sizes one
inch or less may be 10 cc maximum per hour.

Return valves to ship, remove all blanks and reinstall in respective original
locations with new gaskets and fasteners. Clean and refinish flanges as
required. Test and prove tight. Correct any deficiencies found. Restore
insulation and lagging as original.




3PSC                                                            Page 129 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




ITEM NO. 507   HSL Engine Servicing, Hull Painting And Waxing

1.0    Abstract
       The Contractor shall furnish the services of a Caterpillar engine and
       Northern Lights service representative to inspect and service the HSL
       engines.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None Additional

3.0    Item Locations/Quantity
       3.1   Locations: Main Deck, 2 each HSL’s, Nos. 10 and 11
             Full Load Weight of 16,900lbs (7700kgs)
       3.2   Quantity: 2 each main propulsion engines
             Manufacturer: Caterpillar
             Model: 3208
       3.3   Quantity: 2 each A/C Generator Engines
             Manufacturer: Northern Lights
             Model: M843N
             12kW
       3.4   Hour readings as of October 27, 2009
             HSL 11: Caterpillar 2774 hrs, N/Lights…3760.
             HSL 12: Caterpillar 3185, N/Lights…3907.

4.0    Government Furnished Material
       4.1   Ship shall provide new engine/transmission oil as required.
       4.2   Amercoat 240 – Black: 5 gallons
       4.3   Amercoat ABC3 Anti-fouling: 5 gallons
       4.3   Bulkhead Liners – NAVOCEANO furnished.

5.0    Notes: None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements: None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1   The Contractor shall temporarily remove the HSL’s from their
             cradles and perform a harbor run with the ship’s force in
             attendance.   The Contractor Furnished Technical representatives
             performing the service on the Caterpillar and Northern Lights
             Engines shall be onboard during this harbor run.
             7.1.1 After completion of the harbor run, take and record
                   cylinder firing pressure readings and submit to the Port
                   Engineer.
       7.2   The use of ship’s davits for launching is acceptable. However, if
             the inboard HSL is over land and cannot be launched, then the
             contractor shall provide necessary lifting slings to remove the
             HSL from its cradle.   HSL’s weigh 16,900#, full load
       7.3   Upon completion of harbor run, land the HSL’s in cradles
             alongside the ship or nearby sheltered facility. Cradles shall
             provide for full support of HSL’s and be configured to match the
             same footprint as found on the shipboard cradles.
             EXTREME CARE SHALL BE TAKEN NOT TO CONTACT THE UNDERWAY SURVEY
             SONAR LOCATED ALONG THE KEEL OF THE HSL.
             7.3.1 Do not place HSL’s in cribs without advanced approval from
                   the Port Engineer and Senior Navo Rep. Inspection of
                   proposed cradle shall be performed in advance.



3PSC                                                             Page 130 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             7.3.2 Provide ladders to access the HSL’s from their respective
                   cradles.
             7.3.3 Furnish freshwater hook up via the HSL freshwater
                   connection for each HSL.
             7.3.4 Furnish electric power to each HSL via the Viking connector
                   outfitted with each HSL.
                   7.3.4.1 Electrical power requirements are 110VAC, 100
                            Amps, Single Phase
             7.3.5 Furnish a 20’ container box with lock and keys so that
                   Navoceano Engineers can temporarily remove equipment from
                   each HSL. Turn the keys over to the SNR Navo
                   Representative.
             7.3.6 Each HSL shall be covered with a canvas tarp or tented to
                   prevent damage from weather while the boats are opened and
                   worked upon.
                   7.3.6.1 Preferred course is for HSL’s to be housed in a
                            warehouse, but this is not mandatory.

       7.4   Underwater Hull Repairs/Preservation
             7.4.1 High pressure freshwater wash (3500PSI) the entire house
                   and hull for each HSL.
             7.4.2 Mask off the areas above the rub rail using tape and cloth.
                   Protect the hull transducers, grounding bars, shafts and
                   rudders by sealing with rubber or canvas cloth.
             7.4.3 Using lite scotch brite pads, lightly sand the underwater
                   hull from the rail down to the keel.
             7.4.4 After completion of sanding, perform a second freshwater
                   washdown.   Allow the Paint Rep to inspect the surface
                   profile after washdown to confirm the surface is suitable
                   for painting.
             7.4.5 Apply one coat of Amercoat 240 black at 5 mils DFT using
                   appropriately sized airless sprayers.
             7.4.6 After the Amercoat 240 has dried, but not fully cured,
                   apply a topcoat of ABC3 antifouling black at 4 mils Dft.
             7.4.7 For all areas above the waterline, apply two coats of 3M
                   Marine Liquid Wax, part number 051131-09027 to the entire
                   underwater hull and house.
             7.4.8 Remove all masking materials after all painting has been
                   completed.
       7.5   HSL Overhead Leaks/ Repair and Seal.
             7.5.1 Perform a leak test on the overhead of the HSL using
                   freshwater. Remain inside the HSL to detect leaks in way
                   of overhead fasteners that may have penetrated the
                   overhead.
             7.5.2 Temporarily remove the overhead hand grabs, 3 each per HSL.
                   Replace the existing wooden blocks (3 per boat) supporting
                   the overhead grab rails with contractor furnished wooden
                   blocks. Blocks are to be made from hard wood (oak or
                   maple) and cut to match existing blocks.
             7.5.3 Reinstall the handgrabs using new CRES 316 material.
             7.5.4 Perform a leak test using freshwater in way of the
                   handgrabs. Allow the NAVO SNR to witness this test.

       7.6   Interior Bulkhead Repairs
             7.6.1 The existing bulkhead joiner material is worn and requires
                   replacement. Disconnect and remove the panel bulkhead.
             7.6.2 Clean the bulkhead of all rust and blistered paint.


3PSC                                                             Page 131 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              7.6.3 Rinse using thinner.
              7.6.4 Apply one coat of interior paint on the exposed steel
                    areas.
              7.6.5 Take delivery of the GFE panels. On the sides of the Main
                    Cabin, temporarily remove the teak wood strips from the
                    sideshell of the main cabin which surrounds the black
                    acoustic insulation.    Remove the black acoustic insulation
                    that is glued to the sideshell of the Main Cabin.
              7.6.6 Install the GFE furnished acoustic insulation in place of
                    the removed insulation. Glue in place using polyurethane
                    premium wood glue or equal and a heat gun.
              7.6.7 Reinstall the teak strips around the edges of the acoustic
                    insulation.
       7.7    Engine Service - Scheduled service shall include the following
              for both the Caterpillar and Northern Lights Engines installed
              within each HSL, as applicable:
              7.7.1 Drain the engine and transmission sumps of fluid. Removed
                    oil shall be disposed of in accordance with local
                    environmental rules and regulations. Do not dump fluids
                    into the bilges.
              7.7.2 Remove and replace engine and transmission filters with
                    contractor furnished spares.
              7.7.3 Replenish each sump with GFE oil.
              7.7.4 Flush fuel lines for each engine.
              7.7.5 Replace fuel filters with contractor furnished spares.
              7.7.6 Replace air intake filters with contractor furnished
                    spares.
              7.7.7 Caterpillar Engines - Open and clean the airboxes on the
                    Caterpillar engines. Accomplish visual inspection and
                    provide condition report to the Port Engineer.
              7.7.8 Accomplish both cold and hot engine tune-up on the engines.
                    Inspect valve lash settings, turbocharger efficiency and
                    fuel injector timing.
       7.8    HSL Lifting Hooks and Ring – Non destructive testing
              7.8.1 Using an approved means of non-destructive testing
                    (preferably dye penetrant), perform NDT testing on the
                    lifting hooks, the lifting hook base plates and the lifting
                    rings on the HSL davits
              7.8.2 These tests are to be performed in the presence of the Port
                    Engineer and SNR.

       7.9    At the completion of all works, return the HSL’s to their
              respective cradles onboard ship.
       7.10   Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
              7.10.1      Inspection – Surface preparation of underwater hull
                          after light sanding and prior to painting.
              7.10.2      Inspection – Surface of hull after painting.
              7.10.3      Test – Leak test of overhead in the presence of the
                          Port Engineer (call out in advance).
              7.10.4      Test – Non-destructive test of the HSL lifting hooks,
                          base plates, and rings in the presence of the Port
                          Engineer.
              7.10.5      Reports - Upon completion of all engine servicing,
                          provide a service report in hard copy and
                          electronically (MS Word and .pdf format) to the Port
                          Engineer that includes, at a minimum, the following:
                          - Engine Model And Serial Number


3PSC                                                              Page 132 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                         -   Running Hours
                         -   Inspections Accomplished And Results
                         -   Repairs Accomplished
                         -   Outstanding Recommendations
                         -   Recommended Repairs

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 133 of 280
       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




3PSC                           Page 134 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 508       Allied Crane Servicing and Cargo Gear Testing

1.0    Abstract
       The Allied crane requires scheduled maintenance and quadrennial testing
       for the renewal of the ABS cargo gear certificate. The Contractor
       shall provide all necessary industrial assistance to accomplish the
       works listed below under the guidance of the Allied Crane
       Representative.

2.0    References/Enclosures: Technical manual no. T-AGS60CL-019 titled Crane,
       Allied TB 80-80 is onboard the vessel and available for use.

3.0    Item Location/Description:
3.1    Location: 02-125-0
3.2    Description: Pedestal Crane
       Manufacturer: Allied Systems
       Model: TB 80-80

4.0    Government Furnished Material
       4.1   3PSC shall furnish the services of a MFR representative to
             perform the repairs with shipyard assistance.
       4.2   Wire rope
       4.3   Hydraulic Oil - 110 gallons of Shell Tellus 46 to replenish sump.

5.0    Notes: None Additional

6.0    Quality assurance requirements
       All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the 3PSC Port
       Engineer.

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1   The contractor shall provide all of the labor, material, and
             services (unless specifically called out otherwise) to assist the
             onsite technical representative and service the Allied crane.
       7.2   Test operate the crane prior to performing any repairs. After
             completion of testing, park the crane in its respective stowage
             rack and stage to allow for access on all points of the crane.
       7.3   Freshwater wash using HP (3500psiClean off the entire crane
             assembly using hp freshwater and degreasers. Wipe off all
             oil/grease/dirt in way of lube fittings, seals, hoses, piping,
             etc…
       7.4   Remove the operating stand floor plates in order to inspect the
             directional valves, control valves, and piping. Clean the sump of
             hydraulic oil.
       7.5   Hydraulic system inspection/repairs
             7.5.1 Inspect the power pack and piping for leaks, damaged hoses,
                   and damage to the hydraulic tank, electric motor, pump and
                   coupling.
             7.5.2 Start up the unit and test operate the crane in all
                   respects, raise/lower, slew, and operate the winch.
                   Inspect hydraulic rams for scoring, pitting. Inspect the
                   ram seals for leakage. Provide a condition report of
                   findings to the Port Engineer.




3PSC                                                             Page 135 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              7.5.3 Inspect all hydraulic fitting and hoses for damage or
                    leakage. And tighten all leaks. Submit a condition report
                    of findings for any hose, fitting or o-ring that is damaged
                    or leaking and cannot be corrected by proper tightening.
              7.5.4 Secure the hydraulic system and drain the hydraulic
                    reservoir. Open and clean the tank using lint free rags.
                    Clean out the suction strainer and renew in-line filters.
              7.5.5 Renew the hydraulic oil with GFE Shell Tellus T-46.
              7.5.6 Disconnect and remove the hydraulic control block and
                    control stands. Cap all open ends. Convey blocks to the
                    shop for overhaul
                    7.5.6.1     Completely disassemble the valve blocks. Shop
                                blast externals and coat with 2 coats Amercoat
                                385.
                    7.5.6.2     Thoroughly clean and all internal ports with
                                oil and wipe clean using lint free rags.
                    7.5.6.3     Renew all oils seals, backup rings and gaskets.
                                Renew external fittings and fasteners using 316
                                CRES material.
                    7.5.6.4     Reassemble valve blocks. Reconnect control
                                handles using new CRES 316 fasteners.
                    7.5.6.5     Return blocks to the ship and reinstall.

       7.6     Slewing Ring Bolt Inspections
               7.6.1 Temporarily remove 50 each of the turret bolts from the
                     slewing ring assembly. There are a total of 200 bolts
                     securing the crane on two separate slewing rings. Each ring
                     has 100 bolts.
                     NOTE 1: Only one bolt ring pattern at a time shall be worked.
                     NOTE 2: Every fourth bolt shall be removed. That equates to
                             25 bolts per ring.
                     NOTE 3: Torque wrench to measure the load required to
                             uncouple these bolts shall be required in order to
                             properly re-torque these bolts in place.
                             Documentation to reflect the torque ratings of bolts
                             shall be submitted by the contractor.
             7.6.2   Each bolt shall be cleaned thoroughly and examined by non-
                     destructive testing methods. These bolts are to be made
                     available for inspection by both the Port Engineer and ABS
                     Surveyor.
             7.6.3   Once the bolts have been inspected and certified safe for re-
                     use, the tops and bottoms of each bolts are to be stenciled
                     with the year 2010 on each.
             7.6.4   Return the bolts to their respective bolt ring, and torque to
                     the same tightness as found during removal.
             7.6.5   Repeat the process for the second bolt ring set.

       7.7    General service and lubrication – All greasing requirements shall
              be accomplished using MOBILITCH SHC 460 synthetic grease, unless
              stated otherwise.
              7.7.1   Lubricate the swing bearing through the lube fitting
                      located on the bearing. Rotate the crane in 30 degree
                      increments through its entire swing arc between
                      applications. Rotate the crane after lubrication to
                      distribute the lubricant. Use only MOBILTAC 375 gear
                      lubricant.




3PSC                                                               Page 136 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             7.7.2   The swing gear is located on the underside of the turret.
                     Distribute lubricant around the outside face of the gear.
                     Use only MOBILTAC 375 gear lubricant. Visually inspect the
                     gear and pinions for excessive wear or damage. Also, check
                     that the pinion retaining caps and capscrews are secure.
             7.7.3   Lubricate the sheave pins though the lube fittings.
             7.7.4   Lubricate the hook block swivel and trunnion through the
                     lube fittings. Inspect the block swivel and trunnion for
                     damage.
             7.7.5   Lubricate the cylinder pivot pins through the lube
                     fittings located at both ends of each cylinder.
             7.7.6   Lubricate the boom pivot pins.
             7.7.7   inspect the swing drive gear assembly for leaks. Drain
                     the oil reservoir and replenish using contractor furnished
                     HD 80W-90 multipurpose gear oil.
             7.7.8   Inspect the crane mounting bolts for tightness.

       7.8   Lifting Cable Renewal
             7.8.1   Disconnect, remove the wire rope and dispose of a scrap.
                     Clean the drum and sheaves of all used oil, dirt and
                     debris.
             7.8.2   Install new GFE cable and lubricate with Dynagard Blue
                     Wire Rope Lubricant while the new cable is passing through
                     the sheave.
             7.8.3   GFE cable specifics:
                     WIRE ROPE - Diameter: 3/4", No. of strands: 8, Number of
                     wires per strand: 19, Lay: Spin resistant, Quality: Extra
                     Improved Plowsteel, Load of sample break: 51,800lbs, Safe
                     Working load: 10,360lbs - 900 feet length

       7.9   Weight Test – Proof load test (125% of the SWL)
             7.9.1 Weight test – 5 year cargo gear testing: Proof Weight (2
                   sets of tests) The contractor shall furnish the weights and
                   rigging equipment to perform these tests.
             7.9.2 With the boom fully extended to 80 foot range, and the boom
                   angle at 60 degrees, a weight test using 25,000lbs shall be
                   performed. NOTE: SWL is 20,000#. The weights are to be
                   certified as such in the presence of the ABS Surveyor. At
                   this point, the weight shall be raised via the winch, then
                   slewed, and then the boom shall be raised to 75 degrees. At
                   this point, the weight shall be suspended for 5 minutes
                   without creeping.
             7.9.3 At the completion of the test, the weight shall be lowered
                   using the winch. At no point shall the boom angle be
                   lowered less than 60 degrees.
             7.9.4 The second test shall involve lowering the boom to zero
                   degrees and retracting the extension cylinder so that the
                   entire length of the boom is 60 feet.
             7.9.5 Provide and connect 18,750lbs (SWL is 15,000lbs with 60
                   feet reach at 0degree boom angle). The weight shall then
                   be raised via the boom from 0 degrees to 30 degrees. Then
                   the weight shall be slewed about. Finally, the winch shall
                   be used to raise the weight and suspend at 30 degrees for 5
                   minutes without creeping.
             7.9.6 At the completion of the test, the weight shall be lowered
                   to the deck using the winch. At no point shall the boom
                   angle be lowered to less than zero degrees.


3PSC                                                             Page 137 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              7.9.7 At the completion of testing, inspect the following for any
                    deformations resulting from the proof load test:
                    A. foundation
                    B. Sheaves
                    C. Hook
                    D. Slewing assembly and bolting arrangements

       7.10   At the completion of all tests, scale the crane boom and house to
              SSPC-SP-3 requirements. Freshwater rinse the boom and house, and
              thinner wipe dry.
              7.10.1       Apply one touch up coat of Ameron 240 White in way of
                           scaled regions at 5 mils DFT.
              7.10.2       Apply second coat of Ameron 240 Gray in way of scaled
                           regions.
              7.10.3       Apply top coat of Amershield gray to the entire crane
                           boom and cab.
              7.10.4       Replace the existing boom angle indicator placard and
                           angle arm with contractor furnished stencil made from
                           316 CRES. Install in place of original and secure
                           using marine grade adhesive.
              7.10.5       Fabricate 3 each placards showing the lifting
                           capabilities of the crane at various angles using 316
                           CRES sheet metal and stenciled as per sample Lifting
                           Chart for this TB 80-80 crane. Affix the placards on
                           both sides of the boom and place the remaining
                           placard in the cab of the crane.
       7.11   Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
              7.11.1 Test – Full operational test prior to disassembly
              7.11.2 Test – Non-destructive test on the lifting hook and
                      slewing ring bolts
              7.11.3 Report – Non-destructive test report on the lifting hook
                      and slewing ring bolts
              7.11.4 Test – Proof Load Weight test in the presence of the ABS
                      Surveyor and Port Engineer.
              7.18.5 Inspection – Post weight test inspection of the crane in
                      its entirety.
              7.18.6 Inspection – Surface preparation prior to painting of the
                      hook block and the crane assembly after scaling to SSPC-
                      SP-3 Requirements.
              7.18.7 Deliverable – Service report from the MFR’s representative
                      in hard copy and electronically (.pdf or MS Word format)on
                      all works performed, test results, and outstanding work
                      requirements to be addressed at a later point in time.

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 138 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 509 Various Labor Requirements in Support of Technical Service
Representatives

1.0    Abstract
       Provide shipyard labor and crafts to support onsite Technical
       Representatives.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None

3.0    Item Location/Description: None

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment
       4.1 MSD Book Cell, entire unit: 1 each
       4.2 Lifeboat Hook Release Mechanisms: 4 each

5.0    Notes: None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:   None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1 The Port Engineer shall require various crafts and materials to
            support the onsite technical representatives working on various
            systems.
       7.2 The systems that the contractor shall assist with repairs are:
            A.      Ship’s Sewage Treatment System
            B.      Ship’s Lifeboats and Davits
            C.      Ship’s air conditioning and refrigeration systems
            D.      Ship’s Main Propulsion Engine Service

       7.3 The Contractor shall provide all crane and rigging support to onload
           all tools, repair parts, and materials in support of repairs on
           various shipboard equipment.
       7.4 Sewage Treatment System Repairs
             7.4.1 The Contractor shall accomplish the following under the
                   direct supervision of the attending technical representative.
             7.4.2 The contractor shall dispose of all effluent and
                   washing/rinsing compounds used to sanitize the system.
             7.4.3 The contractor shall scale, prime and paint the V1 and V2
                   tank to SSPC-SP-11 standards. Total square footage is 100
                   square feet.
                   7.4.3.1 The contractor shall apply two full coats of
                           Amercoat 240 (ships supply) to the freshly scaled
                           areas.
             7.4.4 Disconnect and remove the existing book cell on the V2 tank
                   and dispose of as scrap.
             7.4.5 Take delivery of GFE book cell and install in way of original
                   using all new contractor furnished Stainless fasteners.
             7.4.6 Crop and renew the existing vent piping on the V2 tank
                   tanktop using sch80 piping and steel isolation valves.

       7.5   Lifeboat Servicing
             7.5.1 The Contractor shall accomplish the following repairs under
                   the direct supervision of the attending technical
                   representative.



3PSC                                                               Page 139 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              7.5.2 The contractor shall temporarily remove the lifeboats and
                    place them alongside the ship in cribs that support the full
                    weight of the boat. Provide all necessary laborers, slings,
                    riggers to remove each boat. Note: estimated weight of each
                    boat is 11,000lbs.
              7.5.3 The contractor shall provide staging and ladders in order to
                    access inside the boat and also furnish staging at the
                    release gear to allow the Technical Representative to take
                    measurements on the hooks.
              7.5.4 The contractor shall remove the existing release gears and
                    dispose of as scrap. Take delivery of GFE release gears and
                    install under the direct guidance of the GFE Technical
                    Representative.
              7.5.5 The contractor shall assist the Technical Representative by
                    temporarily removing the davit winch gearbox covers, draining
                    and disposing of oil, and replenishing the sump with ship
                    furnished oil.
              7.5.6 The contractor shall assist in performing a harbor run with
                    each lifeboat by providing crane services, riggers and
                    linehandlers to launch and recover each lifeboat. Two
                    contractors shall be onboard during each harbor run for each
                    lifeboat.
              7.5.7 The contractor shall grease all of the sheaves and grease
                    points found on each lifeboat davit assembly.
              7.5.8 The contractor shall return the lifeboats to their respective
                    cradles after all works have been completed.

       7.6   Service Ship’s Air Conditioning Systems
              7.6.2 The Contractor shall accomplish the following repairs under
                    the direct supervision of the attending technical
                    representative.
              7.6.3 The contractor shall dispose of existing compressor oil (10
                    gallons) and dispose of locally. Clean each sump of oil
                    using lint free rags.
              7.6.4 Temporarily disconnect and remove the suction strainers and
                    clean thoroughly
              7.6.5 The contractor shall provide 250kgs of R-134a to recharge the
                    air conditioning systems.

       7.7   EMD Engine Service
              7.7.1 The Contractor shall support the attending EMD Technicians as
                    called out in this work section.
              7.7.2 Provide one mechanic to clean the airboxes for all 4 EMD
                    engines. Furnish 150lbs of lint free rags as required to
                    clean each air box. The mechanic shall be tasked to clean air
                    boxes, valve covers, regasket the crankcase doors, assist in
                    power pack removals and reinstallations.   Estimate the
                    machinist to work sixteen (16) 10-hour work days, Monday –
                    Saturday.
              7.7.3 Provide two chain falls rated for 1 ton and various size
                    slings to remove and reinstall power packs and
                    turbochargers.
              7.7.4 Provide crane and rigging services to lift on 24
                    cylinder/piston power packs, 2 turbochargers, and
                    miscellaneous pumps and special tools.




3PSC                                                              Page 140 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             7.7.5 Provide crane and rigging services to package the used power
                   packs, turbochargers, pumps into the boxes that the new parts
                   arrived in and seal for overseas shipment.
             7.7.6 The contractor shall provide ground shipment support to the
                   airport and label all boxes as USNS BRUCE C. HEEZEN, SHIP’s
                   SPARES in TRANSIT in preparation for return to the
                   continental USA.
             7.7.7 At the completion of the repairs on the engines, provide
                   two laborers to wipe down the engines, deck plates and
                   immediate bilge regions at the completion of the repairs
                   performed on the EMD engines.
                   A.    Provide two laborers for three days, working 10 hours
                         per day.
                   B.    Laborers shall provide their own mops, buckets,
                         cleansers, and rags.
                   C.    The laborers shall assist in pulling the deck plates
                         to ensure the bilges are free from rags, debris and
                         other materials that could clog the bilge piping
                         system.
             7.7.8 Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
                   A.    Reports – The contractor shall submit time sheets on
                         a daily basis for all work performed to the Port
                         Engineer. Each time sheet shall reference the
                         following information:
                         a.    Work Item #
                         b.    Service Rendered as called out in the
                               specification
                         c.    Hours worked
                         d.    Date of Work


       8.0 General Requirements – None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 141 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 510     Supplemental Labor

1.0    Abstract
       This item describes the supplemental labor, material, services and
       equipment required to support and assist various service engineers,
       classification surveys, and ship force jobs not already discussed
       elsewhere in this specification package.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None Additional

3.0    Item Location/Description: Various

4.0    Government Furnished Material: None

5.0    Notes:
       5.1    This work item shall be NOT worked as a “TIME AND MATERIAL” item.
              For these purposes, direct production man-hours are for technical
              engineers, skilled laborers at the journey level expended in
              direct production, as exemplified by the following functions:
              weldings, burning, lagging, rigging, crane service, staging,
              scaffolding, tank cleaning, machinists, electric work, pipe-
              fitting, engineering, fire watch, transportation, electronic
              work, etc…

       5.2     Necessary support functions shall be considered to be included in
               THE CONTRACTOR’s fully burdened rate for direct production man-
               hours. Examples of support functions include: testing, planning,
               material handling/warehouse, administration, purchasing,
               supervision, security, lofting, surveying and other direct
               support.
       5.3     The fully burdened quoted labor rate and material mark-up, plus
               growth work shall apply.
       5.4     All work, labor, services and equipment under this work item will
               be at the direction and request of 3PSC Port Engineer. Under no
               circumstances shall THE CONTRACTOR utilize hours from this work
               item without written consent from the 3PSC PORT ENGINEER.
       5.5     THE CONTRACTOR shall furnish THE 3PSC PORT ENGINEER with weekly
               listing of man-hours expended on this work item.
       5.6     Any unused hours shall be credited to the owner via Change Order.
       5.7     Laborers shall be equipped with the necessary tools and materials
               ready for work on the jobs delineated by THE PORT ENGINEER.

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:
       6.1   All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of THE 3PSC
             PORT ENGINEER.

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK:
       7.1   THE CONTRACTOR is to provide the necessary labor and material to
             support the vessel’s needs as directed by THE PORT ENGINEER.
       7.2   CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall provide the labor rates and
             their material mark-up that will be used through-out this
             specification. For evaluation purposes the following estimates
             will be used:
             7.2.1 Three thousand (3000) straight time hours for
                   $______________



3PSC                                                                Page 142 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




             7.2.2 Two thousand (2000) overtime hours for $_________________

             7.2.3 Provide the material burden to be added to the cost of the
                   material (for bidding purposes $25,000 is to be used, for
                   the amount of material to be provided), ________% mark-up.

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 143 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 511 Calibrate Special Tools, Gauges and Test Equipment (Category B)

1.0    Abstract
       All shipboard gauges and meters on board ship are due for calibration.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1 References: none
       2.2 Enclosures:
            2.2.1  Calibration – gauge/meter list
            2.2.2  Measuring and test equipment list

3.0    Item Location/Description:   Throughout the ship

4.0    Government furnished equipment/material/services: none

5.0    Notes:

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements:
       6.1 Pressure gauges - verify accuracy of gauges at various (maximum of
            4, minimum of 3) points over full range. Record data on table 1 as
            required.
       6.2 Thermometers - verify accuracy of thermometers at various (maximum
            of 4, minimum of 3) points over full range. Record data on table ii
            as required.
       6.3 Meters - verify accuracy of electrical meters at various (maximum of
            4, minimum of 3) points over full range. Record data on table iii
            as required.
       6.4 Tank Level Indicators (TLI’s): verify the accuracy over the 4-20mA
            range at 3 different points.

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1   The Contractor shall furnish certified test calibration equipment
             and personnel to accomplish this work item.
       7.2   All gauges and meters shall be temporarily removed from their
             original position and calibrated in a test stand aboard ship or
             alongside the ship. Consult with the Chief Engineer prior to
             removing any gauges on equipment that is currently in service.
             7.2.1 Calibration of the gauges in place is an acceptable
                   procedure. It is the Contractor’s discretion to
                   temporarily remove or calibrate in place.
             7.2.2 Any gauges that are must be landed ashore and offsite for
                   calibration must be cleared in advance through the Port
                   Engineer. The contractor shall submit in writing via email
                   those gauges that are to be landed ashore and include the
                   proposed return date to the vessel.
       7.3   Gauges on Enclosure 2.1 that are identified as requiring
             replacement or are missing shall be replaced by the Contractor.
             Costs for replacement and installation are to be included in the
             Contractor’s quoted price. These same gauges shall be new and not
             require calibration. Do not include in your quote the cost to
             calibrate the broken or missing gauges and their respective
             replacements.
       7.4   All gauges and meters listed in Enclosure 2.1 shall be calibrated
             in accordance with ANSI/Z540-1-1994 and ISO
             9001:2000, and meet a test accuracy ratio of 4:1. Margin of
             acceptable error after calibration shall be +/- 3%.


3PSC                                                              Page 144 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.5   Any defective gauges and meters that are beyond repair shall be
             listed separately.
             7.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish a separate list of defective
                   gauges, and furnish a price quote to furnish and install a
                   calibrated replacement.
                   NOTE: The only labor charges that are allowable are for
                   those gauges where new fittings or tubing modifications are
                   required, or if the bracket and housing require
                   modification.
             7.5.2 Those gauges found to be beyond calibration and in need of
                   replacement shall be labeled with a REJECTED sticker and
                   dated. Do not remove these gauges UNTIL the replacement
                   gauges are received and installed in their place.
       7.6   Upon completion of gauge calibration or replacement, remove the
             existing gauge calibration sticker. Affix a new label denoting
             the name of the testing facility, calibration date, and due date
             for the next calibration (which is 36 months from the date of
             calibration). NOTE: If there isn’t sufficient space on the face
             of the gauge without interfering with the ability to read the
             gauge, affix the label alongside the gauge.
             7.6.1 All new gauges to be installed as a result of those found
                   defective shall be affixed with a calibration sticker.
       7.7   REPORTS - Upon completion of gauge calibrations, a comprehensive
             report listing all gauges calibrated shall be furnished to the
             Port Engineer, both in hard copy (3 copies) and MS Excel format,
             and include the following information:
             A. Equipment Served
             B. Location
             C. Gauge Type (pressure, temperature, kw, etc..)
             D. MFR
             E. Measuring Range
             F. Mount type

8.0 General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 145 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                       Calibration - gauges/meters list

 NO.     LOCATION                                   DESCRIPTION

  1    02 LEVEL      SLACK TENSIONER
  2    02 LEVEL      SLACK TENSIONER INBOARD ACC
  3    02 LEVEL      SLACK TENSIONER OUTBOARD ACC
  4    PROP MTR RM   STBD Z DRIVE POWER PACK HYDRAULIC
  5    PROP MTR RM   STBD Z DRIVE RESERVOIR OIL
  6    PROP MTR RM   STBD Z DRIVE RETURN FILTER
  7    PROP MTR RM   STBD Z DRIVE SUPPLY FILTER
  8    PROP MTR RM   STBD Z DRIVE STEERING PUMP #1 (AMPS)
  9    PROP MTR RM   STBD Z DRIVE STEERING PUMP #2 (AMPS)
 10    PROP MTR RM   STBD Z DRIVE LUBE OIL PUMP
 11    PROP MTR RM   STBD Z DRIVE LUBE OIL
 12    PROP MTR RM   STBD Z DRIVE LUBE OIL PUMP (AMPS)
 13    PROP MTR RM   STBD PROPULSION MOTOR COOL WATER
 14    PROP MTR RM   STBD PROPULSION MOTOR MAGNELIC (INCH)
 15    PROP MTR RM   PORT Z DRIVE POWER PACK HYDRAULIC
 16    PROP MTR RM   PORT Z DRIVE RESERVOIR OIL
 17    PROP MTR RM   PORT Z DRIVE RETURN FILTER
 18    PROP MTR RM   PORT Z DRIVE SUPPLY FILTER
 19    PROP MTR RM   PORT Z DRIVE STEERING PUMP #1 (AMPS)
 20    PROP MTR RM   PORT Z DRIVE STEERING PUMP #2 (AMPS)
 21    PROP MTR RM   PORT Z DRIVE LUBE OIL FILTER
 22    PROP MTR RM   PORT Z DRIVE LUBE OIL
 23    PROP MTR RM   PORT Z DRIVE LUBE OIL PUMP (AMPS)
 24    PROP MTR RM   PORT PROPULSION MOTOR COOL WATER
 25    PROP MTR RM   PORT PROPULSION MOTOR MAGNELIC (INCH)
 26    PROP MTR RM   Z DRIVE BRAKE AIR
 27    WINCH RM      TRACTION WINCH RETURN MANIFOLD
 28    WINCH RM      TRACTION WINCH RETURN HEADER
 29    WINCH RM      TRACTION WINCH RETURN FILTER STOWAGE
 30    WINCH RM      TRACTION WINCH RETURN FILTER TRACTION
 31    WINCH RM      TRACTION WINCH SYSTEM A
 32    WINCH RM      TRACTION WINCH SYSTEM B
 33    WINCH RM      TRACTION WINCH DOUBLE DRUM STW SYSTEM A
 34    WINCH RM      TRACTION WINCH DOUBLE DRUM STW SYSTEM B




3PSC                                                                 Page 146 of 280
                                              4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 35    WINCH RM       TRACTION WINCH SINGLE SYSTEM A
 36    WINCH RM       TRACTION WINCH SINGLE SYSTEM B
 37    WINCH RM       TRACTION WINCH CHARGE
 38    WINCH RM       TRACTION WINCH DD STW WINCH CHARGE
 39    WINCH RM       TRACTION WINCH SINGLE STOWAGE CHARGE
 40    WINCH RM       TRACTION WINCH LEVELWIND SYSTEM
 41    WINCH RM       A & C FRAMES POWER PACK
 42    AFT PUMP RM    AUXILIARY SEAWATER PUMP #1
 43    AFT PUMP RM    AUXILIARY SEAWATER PUMP #2
 44    AFT PUMP RM    BILGE PUMP DISCHARGE
 45    AFT PUMP RM    FIRE/BILGE/BALLAST PUMP DISCHARGE
 46    AFT PUMP RM    BILGE/BALLAST PUMP DISCHARGE
 47    AFT PUMP RM    AFT BILGE MANIFOLD SUCTION
 48    STAGING BAY    DOOR HYDRAULIC POWER PACK
 49    STAGING BAY    S/S AIR REGULATOR
 50    BIO/CHM LAB    S/S AIR REGULATOR
 51    AFT DMG CTL    WATER HEATER RECIRCULATING PUMP #3
 52    FN R 1-73-1    WATER HEATER RECIRCULATING PUMP #2 FN R 1-73-1
 53    FN R 1-54-3    WATER HEATER #2 FN R 1-54-3
 54    FN R 1-54-3    WATER HEATER #3 FN R 1-54-3
 55    BOSUN STRM     ANCHOR WINDLASS SYSTEM
 56    BOSUN STRM     BOW THRUSTER STEERING PUMP #1 (AMPS)
 57    BOSUN STRM     BOW THRUSTER STEERING PUMP #2 (AMPS)
 58    BOSUN STRM     LUBE OIL PUMP MOTOR (AMPS)
       BOW   THRSTR
 59                   STEERING PUMP HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
       RM
       BOW   THRSTR
 60                   STEERING PUMP SUPPLY FILTER DIFFERENTIAL
       RM
       BOW   THRSTR
 61                   STEERING PUMP RETURN FILTER DIFFERENTIAL
       RM
       BOW   THRSTR
 62                   STEERING RESERVOIR
       RM
 63    LOWER BT RM    BOW THRUSTER LUBE OIL
 64    LOWER BT RM    UNCONTAMINATED SEAWATER
 65    MAIN LAB       S/S AIR REGULATOR
 66    WRKSHP STWG    FUEL OIL VALVE ACTUATOR AIR RECEIVER
 67    WRKSHP STWG    FUEL OIL VALVE ACTUATOR AIR REGULATOR
 68    WORKSHOP       TEST PANEL AC (AMPS)
 69    WORKSHOP       TEST PANEL AC (VOLTS)
 70    WORKSHOP       TEST PANEL DC (AMPS)



3PSC                                                                  Page 147 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 71    WORKSHOP      TEST PANEL DC (VOLTS)
 72    SCR RM        PROPULSION MOTOR #1 FIELD DR 12 (AMPS)
 73    SCR RM        PROPULSION MOTOR #1 FIELD DR 11 (AMPS)
 74    SCR RM        PROPULSION MOTOR #2 FIELD DR 15 (AMPS)
 75    SCR RM        PROPULSION MOTOR #2 FIELD DR 14 (AMPS)
 76    MN CNTRL RM   FLUME TANK PHASE ANGLE METER (DEGREES)
 77    MN CNTRL RM   FLUME TANK LEVEL METER (FEET)
 78    MN CNTRL RM   CONSOLE FIREMAIN
 79    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD S/S TRANSFORMER #2 (AMPS)
 80    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD S/S TRANSFORMER #2 (WATTS)
 81    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD S/S TRANSFORMER #2 (VOLTS)
 82    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD S/S TRANSFORMER #1 (AMPS)
 83    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD S/S TRANSFORMER #1 (WATTS)
 84    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD S/S TRANSFORMER #1 (VOLTS)
 85    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD SHORE POWER (AMPS)
 86    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD SHORE POWER (HERTZ)
 87    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD SHORE POWER (WATTS)
 88    MN CNTRL RM   480 SWBD SHORE POWER (VOLTS)
 89    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #2 POWER FACTOR
 90    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #2 AC (VOLTS)
 91    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #2 AC (AMPS)
 92    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #2 (WATTS)
 93    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #2 (KVAR)
 94    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GEN GENERATOR #2
 95    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #2 (HERTZ)
 96    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #2 (SYNCHROSCOPE)
 97    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #4 POWER FACTOR
 98    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #4 AC (VOLTS)
 99    MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #4 AC (AMPS)
 100   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #4 (WATTS)
 101   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #4 (KVAR)
 102   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GEN GENERATOR #4
 103   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD BUSS AC (VOLTS)
 104   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD SHORE POWER AC (VOLTS)
 105   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD SHIP/SHORE (HERTZ)
 106   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD SHIP/SHORE (WATTS)




3PSC                                                                 Page 148 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 107   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD SHIP/SHORE (KVAR)
 108   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD SHIP/SHORE (SYNCHROSCOPE)
 109   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #3 POWER FACTOR
 110   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #3 AC (VOLTS)
 111   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #3 AC (AMPS)
 112   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #3 (WATTS)
 113   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #3 (KVAR)
 114   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GEN GENERATOR #3
 115   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #1 POWER FACTOR
 116   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #1 AC (VOLTS)
 117   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #1 AC (AMPS)
 118   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #1 (WATTS)
 119   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GENERATOR #1 (KVAR)
 120   MN CNTRL RM   600 SWBD GEN GENERATOR #1
 121   A/C MACH RM   REFER #1 HEAD
 122   A/C MACH RM   REFER #1 SUCTION
 123   A/C MACH RM   REFER #1 OIL
 124   A/C MACH RM   REFER #1 OIL
 125   A/C MACH RM   REFER #1 SEAWATER SUPPLY
 126   A/C MACH RM   REFER #1 SEAWATER RETURN
 127   A/C MACH RM   REFER #1 LIQUID
 128   A/C MACH RM   REFER #1 SUCTION
 129   A/C MACH RM   REFER #2 HEAD
 130   A/C MACH RM   REFER #2 SUCTION
 131   A/C MACH RM   REFER #2 OIL
 132   A/C MACH RM   REFER #2 OIL
 133   A/C MACH RM   REFER #2 SEAWATER SUPPLY
 134   A/C MACH RM   REFER #2 SEAWATER RETURN
 135   A/C MACH RM   REFER #2 LIQUID
 136   A/C MACH RM   REFER #2 SUCTION
 137   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 HEAD
 138   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 SUCTION
 139   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 OIL
 140   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 OIL
 141   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 LIQUID
 142   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 SUCTION




3PSC                                                               Page 149 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 143   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 CHILL WATER SUPPLY
 144   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 CHILL WATER RETURN
 145   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 SEAWATER OUT
 146   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 HEAD
 148   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 SUCTION
 147   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 OIL
 149   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 OIL
 150   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 LIQUID
 151   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 SUCTION
 152   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 CHILL WATER SUPPLY
 153   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 CHILL WATER RETURN
 154   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 SEAWATER OUT
 155   A/C MACH RM   CHILL WATER PUMP #1
 156   A/C MACH RM   CHILL WATER PUMP #2
 157   A/C MACH RM   CHILL WATER EXPANSION TANK
 158   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 JACKETWATER LEFT BANK
 159   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 JACKETWATER RIGHT BANK
 160   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 FUEL OIL PUMP
 161   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 FUEL MANIFOLD
 162   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 AIR MANIFOLD
 163   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 RAW WATER
 164   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 LUBE OIL
 165   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 START AIR
 166   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 CRANKCASE
 167   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 JACKETWATER
 168   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 JACKETWATER TO ENGINE
 169   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 PRELUBE OIL
 170   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 PRELUBE PUMP
 171   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 FILTER
 172   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #1 JACKETWATER LEFT BANK
 173   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #1 JACKETWATER RIGHT BANK
 174   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #1 FUEL OIL PUMP
 175   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #1 FUEL MANIFOLD
 176   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #1 AIR MANIFOLD
 177   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #1 RAW WATER
 178   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #1 LUBE OIL




3PSC                                                                 Page 150 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 179   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #1 START AIR
 180   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #1 CRANKCASE
 181   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #1 JACKETWATER
 182   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #1 JACKETWATER TO ENGINE
 183   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #1 PRELUBE OIL
 184   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #1 PRELUBE PUMP
 185   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #1 FILTER
 186   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 JACKETWATER LEFT BANK
 187   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 JACKETWATER RIGHT BANK
 188   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 FUEL OIL PUMP
 189   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 FUEL MANIFOLD
 190   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 AIR MANIFOLD
 191   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 RAW WATER
 192   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 LUBE OIL
 193   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 START AIR
 194   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 CRANKCASE
 195   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 JACKETWATER
 196   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 JACKETWATER TO ENGINE
 197   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 PRELUBE
 198   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 PRELUBE PUMP
 199   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #2 FILTER
 200   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 JACKETWATER LEFT BANK
 201   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 JACKETWATER RIGHT BANK
 202   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 FUEL OIL PUMP
 203   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 FUEL MANIFOLD
 204   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 AIR MANIFOLD
 205   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 RAW WATER
 206   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 LUBE OIL
 207   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 START AIR
 208   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 CRANKCASE
 209   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 JACKETWATER
 210   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 JACKETWATER TO ENGINE
 211   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 PRELUBE
 212   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 PRELUBE PUMP
 213   ENGINE RM   GENERATOR #4 FILTER
 214   ENGINE RM   OILY WATER PUMP DISCHARGE




3PSC                                                               Page 151 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 215   ENGINE RM    OILY WATER PUMP SUCTION
 216   ENGINE RM    LUBE OIL TRANSFER PUMP
 217   ENGINE RM    OILY WASTE TRANSFER PUMP
 218   ENGINE RM    STANDBY FUEL OIL PUMP
 219   ENGINE RM    FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMP
 220   ENGINE RM    LUBE OIL PURIFIER TO HEATER
 221   ENGINE RM    LUBE OIL PURIFIER FROM HEATER
 222   ENGINE RM    LUBE OIL PURIFIER DISCHARGE
 223   ENGINE RM    LUBE OIL PURIFIER BOWL
 224   ENGINE RM    LUBE OIL PURIFIER FUEL
 225   ENGINE RM    FUEL OIL PURIFIER DISCHARGE
 226   ENGINE RM    FUEL OIL PURIFIER BOWL
 227   ENGINE RM    FO PURIFIER POTABLE WATER TO PURIFIER
 228   ENGINE RM    FUEL OIL PURIFIER MOTOR (AMPS)
 229   ENGINE RM    LUBE OIL PURIFIER MOTOR (AMPS)
 230   ENGINE RM    START AIR MANIFOLD
 231   ENGINE RM    AFT START AIR RECEIVER
 232   ENGINE RM    FWD START AIR RECEIVER
 233   ENGINE RM    S/S AIR RECEIVER
 234   ENGINE RM    S/S AIR LAUNCHER
 235   ENGINE RM    S/S AIR REGULATOR
 236   ENGINE RM    AIR COMPRESSOR #1 OIL
 237   ENGINE RM    AIR COMPRESSOR #2 OIL
 238   ENGINE RM    CATHODIC PROTECTION (VOLTS)
 239   ENGINE RM    CATHODIC PROTECTION (AMPS)
 240   1ST PLTFRM   WALK-IN REFER
 241   1ST PLTFRM   WALK-IN FREEZER
 242   1ST PLTFRM   WALK-IN COOLER
 243   FWD PMP RM   POTABLE WATER #1 TANK
 244   FWD PMP RM   POTABLE WATER #2 TANK
 245   FWD PMP RM   POTABLE WATER #1 PUMP
 246   FWD PMP RM   POTABLE WATER #2 PUMP
 247   FWD PMP RM   HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PUMP
 248   FWD PMP RM   WATER HEATER
 249   FWD PMP RM   MACERATOR PUMP OVERLOAD DISCHARGE
 250   FWD PMP RM   MSD DC (AMPS)




3PSC                                                                 Page 152 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 251   FWD PMP RM     MSD DC (VOLTS)
 252   FWD PMP RM     MSD AIR REGULATOR OUTLET
 253   FWD PMP RM     MSD AIR REGULATOR INLET
 254   FWD PMP RM     MSD EFFLUENT PUMP #1
 255   FWD PMP RM     MSD EFFLUENT PUMP #2
 256   FWD PMP RM     EVAC VACUUM
 257   FWD PMP RM     BROMINATOR SUCTION
 258   FWD PMP RM     BROMINATOR DISCHARGE
 259   FWD PMP RM     BROMINE WATER
 260   FWD PMP RM     FIRE PUMP DISCHARGE
 261   FWD PMP RM     FWD BILGE MANIFOLD
 262   FWD PMP RM     WATER MAKER #1 HIGH
 263   FWD PMP RM     WATER MAKER #1 BOOSTER PUMP
 264   FWD PMP RM     WATER MAKER #1 MEDIA FILTER
 265   FWD PMP RM     WATER MAKER #1 CARTRIDGE FILTER
 266   FWD PMP RM     WATER MAKER #2 HIGH
 267   FWD PMP RM     WATER MAKER #2 BOOSTER PUMP
 268   FWD PMP RM     WATER MAKER #2 MEDIA FILTER
 269   FWD PMP RM     WATER MAKER #2 CARTRIDGE FILTER
 270   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY GENERATOR (VOLTS)
 271   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY GENERATOR (WATTS)
 272   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY GENERATOR (HERTZ)
 273   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY GENERATOR (AMPS)
 274   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY GEN BATTERY CHARGER (AMPS)
 275   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY SWBD BATTERY CHARGER #1 (AMPS)
 276   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY SWBD BATTERY CHARGER #2 (AMPS)
 277   EMERG GEN RM   S/S AIR REGULATOR
 278   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY GENERATOR FILTER
 279   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY GENERATOR WATER
 280   EMERG GEN RM   EMERGENCY GENERATOR OIL
 281   01 LVL AFT     DAMPER SOLENOID AIR REGULATOR
 282   GALLEY         COLD SERVER
 283   GALLEY         DISHWASHER WASH CYCLE
 284   GALLEY         DISHWASHER RINSE CYCLE
 285   GALLEY         BOOSTER HEATER
 286   TRSH CMP RM    HOT POTABLE WATER




3PSC                                                                 Page 153 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 287   CREWS' MESS   REACH-IN REFER
 288   OFFRS' MESS   REACH-IN REFER
 289   02 LEVEL      DECK LOCKER WATER HEATER #4
 290   02 LEVEL      DECK LOCKER HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PUMP
 291   02 LEVEL      DECK LOCKER SEWAGE AIR EDUCTOR
 292   02 LEVEL      DECK LOCKER SEWAGE AIR EDUCTOR REG INLET
 293   02 LEVEL      DECK LOCKER SEWAGE AIR EDUCTOR REG OUTLET
 294   PILOT HOUSE   FIREMAIN PILOT HOUSE CONSOLE
295A   GALLEY        GAYLORD HOOD
295B   GALLEY        GAYLORD HOOD
 296   03 LEVEL      PYROTENIC LOCKER
 297   03 LEVEL      CRANE BOOM
 298   03 LEVEL      CRANE SYSTEM
 299   03 LEVEL      CRANE HAND PUMP
 300   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #1 SYSTEM A
 301   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #1 SYSTEM B
 302   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #1 CHARGE
 303   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #1 LEVELWIND
 304   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #1 CLUTCH RELEASE
 305   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #1 OIL
 306   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #2 SYSTEM A
 307   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #2 SYSTEM B
 308   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #2 CHARGE
 309   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #2 LEVELWIND
 310   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #2 CLUTCH RELEASE
 311   02 LEVEL      HYDROGRAPHIC WINCH #2 OIL
 312   MAIN DECK     MAGNETOMETER WINCH SYSTEM A
 313   MAIN DECK     MAGNETOMETER WINCH SYSTEM B
 314   MAIN DECK     MAGNETOMETER WINCH CHARGE
 315   MAIN DECK     MAGNETOMETER WINCH AUXILIARY
 316   MAIN DECK     MAGNETOMETER WINCH OIL
 317   MAIN DECK     MAGNETOMETER WINCH CLUTCH RELEASE
 318   MAIN DECK     GENERAL PURPOSE WINCH OIL
 319   MAIN DECK     GENERAL PURPOSE WINCH SYSTEM
 320   MAIN DECK     GENERAL PURPOSE WINCH CHARGE
 321   MAIN DECK     GENERAL PURPOSE WINCH LEVELWIND




3PSC                                                              Page 154 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 322   MAIN DECK     GENERAL PURPOSE WINCH LEVELWIND CHARGE
 323   MAIN DECK     GENERAL PURPOSE WINCH DISC BRAKE
 324   MAIN DECK     TOWING CRANE HYDRAULIC
 325   MAIN DECK     TOWING CRANE SWING DAMPING
 326   A/C MACH RM   REFER #1 SUCTION
 327   A/C MACH RM   REFER #2 SUCTION
 328   A/C MACH RM   A/C #1 SEAWATER IN
 329   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 SEAWATER IN
 330   MAIN DECK     AFT STBD AIR STATION REGULATOR
 331   MAIN DECK     AFT C/L AIR STATION REGULATOR
 332   MAIN DECK     DARK ROOM COOLER
 333   MAIN DECK     DARK ROOM POTABLE WATER
 334   ENGINE RM     OILY WATER SEPARATOR
 335   MAIN DECK     BIO-LAB AIR STATION REGULATOR
 336   MAIN DECK     BIO-LAB AIR STATION REGULATOR
 337   MAIN DECK     WET LAB AIR STATION REGULATOR
 338   GALLEY        SINK
 339   GALLEY        UPRIGHT FREEZER
 340   GALLEY        UPRIGHT REFRIGERATOR
 341                 WHISTLE RECEIVER
 342   FWD SCR       FIELD DRIVE (AMP)
 343   ENGINE RM     SEAWATER BEFORE STRAINER

 344   ENGINE RM     SEAWATER AFTER STRAINER

 345   A/C MACH RM   A/C #2 SW COOLER TANK

 346   ENGINE RM     AFT FUEL OIL MANIFOLD
 347   ENGINE RM     FWD FUEL OIL MANIFOLD

 348   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #3 FILTER

 349   ENGINE RM     O W S TANK

 350   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #4 FILTER

 351   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #1 FILTER
 352   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #2 FILTER
 353   ENGINE RM     O W TRANSFER PUMP SUCTION
       BOW THRSTR
 354                 BOW THRUSTER AIR BOX
       RM
       BOW THRSTR
 355                 BOW THRUSTER L/O PUMP
       RM
 356   ENGINE RM     GENERATOR #4 LUBE OIL REPEATER




3PSC                                                                 Page 155 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



 357   ENGINE RM      GENERATOR #3 LUBE OIL REPEATER
 358   ET SHOP        AIR REGULATOR
 359   EMERG GEN RM   OIL PRESSURE
 360   ENGINE RM      FWD FUEL OIL PURIFIER
 361   ENGINE RM      FWD LUBE OIL PURIFIER
 362   ENGINE RM      LUBE OIL REPEATER PRESSURE GENERATOR #2
 363   ENGINE RM      LUBE OIL REPEATER PRESSURE GENERATOR #1
 364   AFT PMP RM     4-80-2 TLI AFT PUMP ROOM
 365   ENGINE RM      4-80-1 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 366   ENGINE RM      4-91-1 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 367   ENGINE RM      4-91-2 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 368   ENGINE RM      4-104-0 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 369   ENGINE RM      4-104-1 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 370   ENGINE RM      4-104-2 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 371   ENGINE RM      4-120-3 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 372   ENGINE RM      4-120-4 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 373   ENGINE RM      FOSVCTK STBD ENGINE ROOM
 374   ENGINE RM      FOSVCTK PORT ENGINE ROOM
 375   ENGINE RM      FOSVCTK EDG ENGINE ROOM
 376   ENGINE RM      4-10-0 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 377   ENGINE RM      4-35-1 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 378   ENGINE RM      4-35-2 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 379   ENGINE RM      4-54-1 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 380   ENGINE RM      4-54-2 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 381   ENGINE RM      4-65-1 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 382   ENGINE RM      4-65-2 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 383   ENGINE RM      4-65-3 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 384   ENGINE RM      4-65-4 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 385   ENGINE RM      4-80-4 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 386   ENGINE RM      4-80-3 TLI ENGINE ROOM
 387   AFT PMP RM     4-24-1 TLI AFT PUMP ROOM
 388   AFT PMP RM     4-24-2 TLI AFT PUMP ROOM
 389   AFT PMP RM     4-112-0 TLI AFT PUMP ROOM
 390   AFT PMP RM     4-120-1 TLI AFT PUMP ROOM
 391   AFT PMP RM     4-120-2 TLI AFT PUMP ROOM
 392   AFT PMP RM     4-136-0 TLI AFT PUMP ROOM
 393   AFT PMP RM     4-136-1 TLI AFT PUMP ROOM
 394   AFT PMP RM     4-136-2 TLI AFT PUMP ROOM




3PSC                                                              Page 156 of 280
                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




600 Series Items   Habitability




3PSC                                              Page 157 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 601    Stateroom Carpet Cleaning and Carpet Renewal

1.0    Abstract
       Provide the services to clean carpet and furniture.

2.0    References/Enclosures:   None Additional

3.0    Item Location/Description: Various Staterooms throughout the ship

4.0    Government Furnished Material: None Additional

5.0    Notes: None Additional

6.0    Quality assurance requirements -
       The carpeting to be installed shall meet the consumer product safety
       commission fire safety requirements by passing a methanamine pill test (16
       CFR 1630).

7.0    Statement Of Work Required:
        7.1   Provide carpet shampooing and cleaning for the following
              locations:
              •     24 staterooms
              •     Total area of carpet cleaning – 3100 sq ft
        7.2   Provide furniture cleaning in the following locations:
              •     Captain’s office and stateroom – (2) sofas, (1) chair.
              •     Chief Engineer’s office and stateroom - (1) sofa, (1)
                    chair.
              •     SNR’s office and stateroom. – (1) sofa, (1) chair.
              •     Officer’s lounge – (6) sofas
              ∙     NAVO Main Lab & ET Shop Chairs – 20 each
        7.3   Cleaning of stateroom carpets shall be accomplished
              approximately 5 days prior to vessel departure.
        7.4   Coordinate all entry into the staterooms with the Chief Mate.
        7.5   The contractor shall be responsible for the temporary removal of
              all chairs, sofas, tables, and other loose gear in way of those
              carpets to be cleaned.
        7.6   After the carpets have dried, contractor shall return all loose
              equipment to their original locations.
        7.7   The Contractor shall replace the carpet in the NAVOCEANO conference
              room (1-59-1 Size: 22’-03” X 14”-05”) and one NAVOCEANO stateroom
              (S/R 01-37-2 Est.: 12’ X 12”).
              7.7.1   Remove the existing carpet and cove molding and discard.
                      Prepare the bulkheads by removing original glue to ensure
                      smooth surface for new molding installation.
              7.7.2   The new carpet shall be applied without an underlying pad
                      by a tackless procedure or cementing with a water-based
                      adhesive. Widest lengths of carpet available (15 feet)
                      shall be used in order to minimize the number of seams to
                      be dealt with.
              7.7.3   Install new cove molding, black in color and 6” in height,
                      once carpet has been installed.
              7.7.4   Vacuum the new carpet to remove all lint and fuzz. Install
                      heavy paper on carpeting to prevent foot traffic from
                      staining the newly installed carpet.
8.0    General Requirements: None Additional



3PSC                                                               Page 158 of 280
       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




3PSC                           Page 159 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item no. 602   Clean and Flush Vacuum Sewage System

1.0    Abstract:
       1.1 Provide contractor services to chemically clean the vacuum sewage
            system in its entirety

2.0    References/Enclosures: The following are onboard and available for use.
       2.1 Navsea drawings - Sewage and Plumbing Drains Diagram
       2.2 Envirovac Phosphoric Treatment Application (enclosed)

3.0    Item location/description:
       3.1 Locations: Various
       3.2 Description: 1500 linear feet of 1.5”, 2”, and 2.5” sched 80 piping

4.0    Government Furnished Material:   None Additional

5.0    Notes
       WWW.HERCPROD.COM
       The contractor shall meet with the Port Engineers to discuss the chemical
       treatment of the sewage system. Only industry approved chemicals will be
       allowed for circulation.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer.

7.0    Statement of work Required:
       7.1 Using references 2.1, 2.2 as guidance, the contractor shall clean out
           the entire sewage system. The current condition of the pipe has been
           reduced to less than 1" ID or less due to calcified buildup.
       7.2 The contractor shall circulate an approved chemical solution
           through the entire vacuum sewage system in a closed loop method.
       7.3 The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all jumpers,
           piping, hoses and other material to close the loop and create the
           circulating system.
       7.4 Each toilet shall be removed and all open pipe ends capped.
       7.5 Accesses for cleaning include the cleanouts listed on reference 2.1
           for each individual toilet.
       7.6 Prove all lines clear from each toilet and cleanout extending to the
           sewage holding tank.
       7.7 Temporarily remove the valves and manifold end plates in the sewage
           room and clean all piping.
       7.8 Discard all sewage in accordance with local environmental rules and
           regulations.

8.0    General requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 160 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Enclosure 2.3       Envirovac Phosphoric Treatment Procedures


Removal of deposits from piping
Dilution ratios

Often the pipes in both conventional and vacuum sewage systems become clogged
with deposits. A relatively simple, but nevertheless highly effective,
method for this removal is described below.

Phosphoric acid (h3po4), which is widely available is 85% solution, normally
is used. For use as described below, it must be diluted to 20% to 40%
solution as appropriate. Mix as follows to obtain the desired concentration
(percentage weight), starting with 85% phosphoric acid concentration:

Solution strength                                dilution ration

            20%          add 3 liters phosphoric acid to 18 liters water.
            40%          add 6 liters phosphoric acid to 12 liters water.
            50%          add 8 liters phosphoric acid to 10 liters water.

Caution:   always add the acid to the water – not the reverse.
                if water is added to acid, the acid may cause
               splattering and lead to injury.



Treatment method I
This method is a preventive procedure. Each week, flush half a liter of 20%
phosphoric acid solution through the toilet bowl situated at the farthest end
of the branch to be treated.



Treatment method II
If deposits 5 to 10 mm thick are observed, the affected pipes should be
flushed two or three times with 24 hr with 20 liters of 40% to 50% phosphoric
acid solution. Choose times when other flushings are infrequent. Pour the
solution straight into the toilet bowl that is situated farthest away from
the collection tank on the branch to be treated after first closing off the
water supply to the toilet and flushing it “dry” a few times. Continue the
flushing action while the acid solution is pored into the bowl, thereby
ensuring that the solution will spread to as much of the pipework as
possible. Do not forget to re-open the water supply to the toilet after the
treatment is completed.

The 50 to 60 liters of phosphoric acid solution are added during a 24-hr
period. The solution in the piping should be neutralized by using 100 liters
of 40% caustic soda solution. This solution should be poured in the tank
after treatment. The sewage treatment authorities should be informed before
treatment is started, and you should follow all local regulations.



3PSC                                                             Page 161 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Treatment method III
In cases where deposits leave only a very small cross-sectional flow area, a
40 to 50% solution of phosphoric acid should be employed. Shut off, or if
possible, bypass the pipe or section that is to be treated. Fill it with
acid solution and allow the solution to remain in the pipe for approximately
24 hr.

If the pipe being treated is a riser (or, lift pipe), any toilets at a lower
level that are on the same branch must be isolated. The easiest way to
isolate the pipe is to cut the pipe above the level of the toilet bowl. Then
fit a shut-off valve on the pipe in conjunction with a rubber pipe for the
collection of the acid solution after the treatment.

To prevent dangerous effects when emptying the sewage tank after treatment of
the sewage lines, neutralization should be made using 100 liters of 40%
caustic soda solution. This solution should be poured in the tank after
treatment.




3PSC                                                            Page 162 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 603       Clean Gray Water Drain Piping

1.0    Abstract:
       1.1 Provide contractor services to mechanically clean the gray water
            piping

2.0    References/Enclosures: The following are onboard and available for use.
       2.1   Navsea drawings - Sewage and Plumbing Drains Diagram

3.0    Item location/description:
       3.1   Locations: Various
       3.2   Description: 1600 linear feet of 1.5”, 2”, and 2.5” sched 40 drain
             piping to be cleaned

4.0    Government Furnished Material:   None Additional

5.0    Notes

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer.

7.0    Statement of work Required: Do not commence work on this item without
       first consulting with the Chief Engineer.
       7.1   Using references 2.1 for guidance, the Contractor shall
             mechanically clean the gray water piping from the sinks in the
             galley all the way to the respective holding tank or overboard.
       7.2   Each drain lines S or P trap shall be temporarily disconnected in
             order to clean the remainder of the piping system.
       7.3   Each S or P trap shall be cleaned thoroughly and reinstalled after
             completion of the rest of the piping system.
       7.4   The contractor shall use high pressure “snake” rotary cleaners that
             utilize high pressure air and mechanical scrubbers to clean the
             drain lines.
             7.4.1 Allow for providing the services of a plumbing company or
                   using shipyard pipe fitters to line clean the gray water
                   piping for five (5) continuous 10 hour work days, complete
                   with all cleaning equipment and supplies.
       7.5   All contaminants, cleaning water, and buildup developed as a result
             of this item shall be disposed of in accordance with environmental
             rules and regulations.
       7.6   Prior to reinstalling the S or P traps, the Contractor shall notify
             the Port Engineer in order to accomplish a visual inspection/test
             of the cleaned piping system.
       7.7   All dirt and debris and generated as a result of this work item
             shall be cleaned and restored to original condition.


8.0    General Requirements – None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 163 of 280
                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




700 Series Items   Sponsor Equipment – Category B




3PSC                                              Page 164 of 280
                                              4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 701         Main Lab Modifications

1.0    Abstract

       This item describes modifications to the Main Lab including removals of
       equipment racks, furniture and their foundations, removal of power and
       signal cables, and the installation of new equipment racks and
       foundations, and the installation of new power and signal cables.

2.0    References/enclosures

       2.1     References: none
       2.2     Enclosures
               2.2.1 NAVOCEANO DWG, “ Rack-Foundation Removals”
               2.2.2 Intercompartment Signal Cable Removal List
               2.2.3 Intercompartment Signal Cable Installation List
               2.2.4 NAVOCEANO DWG, “Rack Foundation & Countertop Fab Details”
               2.2.5 NAVOCEANO DWG, “Main Lab Cable Tray, Lights And MCT
                     Modifications”
               2.2.6 NAVOCEANO DWG, “HDTV Monitor Bracket”
               2.2.7 NAVOCEANO DWG, “ Computer Bracket”

3.0    Item Location/Description

       3.1     Various

4.0    Government Furnished Material

       4.1     Lonmat Sheet Vinyl Flooring, Qty 3600 Square Feet
       4.2     Rubber Deck Cove Molding, Qty 500 Feet
       4.3     Roxtec Multi Cable Transit, Qty 6
       4.4     Cable Tray Cross Sections, Qty 4
       4.5     Cable Tray Tee Sections, Qty 4
       4.6     Cable Tray 45 Degree Sections, Qty 2
       4.7     Cable Tray 12 Feet Straight Sections, Qty 6
       4.8     Equipment Rack, 22 Inch W X7 2 Inch High, Qty 35
       4.9     Ground Cable, Qty 35
       4.10    Counter Top Brackets, Qty 12
       4.11    Junction Box, Qty 35
       4.12    Power Strip, 15 Amp, Qty 70
       4.13    Power Cable, LSTSGU-4, Qty 2500 Feet
       4.14    Belden 8307 Cable, Qty 600 Feet
       4.15    Cat-6 Cable, Yellow, Qty 2000 Feet
       4.16    Cat-6 Cable, Green, Qty 1000 Feet
       4.17    Cat-6 Cable, Red, Qty 150 Feet
       4.18    Belden 9504 Cable, Qty 600 Feet
       4.19    RG-58 Cable, Qty 1000 Feet
       4.20    RDI Cable, Qty 350 Feet
       4.21    M62bk0610r Cable, Qty 400 Feet
       4.22    IMU Cable, Qty 200 Feet
       4.23    LDF4-50 Cable, Qty 600 Feet
       4.24    POSMV Cable, Qty 150 Feet
       4.25    Phone Cable, Qty 250 Feet
       4.26    FSS2 Hydrophone Cable, Qty 1200 Feet



3PSC                                                                  Page 165 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       4.27 Fluorescent Lights, Qty 4
       4.28 Light Switch Qty 1
       4.29 Cypher Locks, Qty 3
5.0    Notes:

       5.1   All contractor furnished material shall be new, and mil/shop
             primed.
       5.2   This item is required to be completed ten(10) days prior to
             the end of the shipyard availability.
       5.3   Installation of the new equipment racks and the surrounding
             deck and overhead repairs is required to be completed twenty
             (28) days prior to the end of the shipyard availability.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements

       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
             representative.

7.0    Statement Of Work Required


       7.1   Remove for scrap thirty-five equipment racks, two rack sway braces,
             one computer desk, one table top (91” x 30”), and one countertop
             (88”l x 18”w) from the Main Lab.

       7.2   Remove for scrap the two equipment deck foundations and modify one
             foundation as shown on enclosure 2.2.1.

       7.3   Remove for scrap approximately 2500 feet of power cables. Cables
             run in the overhead from power panels located within the Main Lab
             to the racks removed in paragraph 7.1.

       7.4   Remove for scrap approximately 7400 feet of signal cables listed in
             enclosure 2.2.2. Cables run from the Main Lab to various
             compartments throughout the ship. Repack all deck and bulkhead
             multi-cable transits affected by these removals.

       7.5   Remove all junction boxes and power strips from all of the
             equipment racks removed in paragraph 7.1. Turn over to the
             NAVOCEANO representative.

       7.6   Fabricate and install three equipment rack foundations to the deck
             of the Main Lab, using enclosure 2.2.4, sheet 3 as guidance.

       7.7   Install new high density “floating floor” insulation and new deck
             steel panels in way of the rack foundations removed in paragraph
             7.2 and the new rack foundations installed in paragraph 7.6.

       7.8   Replace deck vinyl sheet flooring from frame 55 to frame 114 in the
             Main Lab, using item 4.1. Temporarily remove various furniture to
             facilitate installation of new flooring.

       7.9   Replace rubber deck cove molding using item 4.2.




3PSC                                                             Page 166 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.10   Using enclosure 2.2.5, install two multi-cable transit, item 4.3,
              in the inboard bulkhead of the Main Lab, at frame 75, one in the
              forward bulkhead of the Main Lab at frame 55, two multi-cable
              transit in stairwell 3-65-1, at frame 72, and one in the aft
              bulkhead of the Main Lab at frame 114. Exact location to be
              determined by the NAVOCEANO representative.

       7.11   Using enclosure 2.2.5 as guidance, install new cable tray sections,
              items 4.14 thru 4.7, into the existing cable trays. Install welded
              tee supports from the overhead as required. Paint new sections to
              match existing.

       7.12   Install ten cable access holes in the ceiling panels to allow cable
              installations to the new racks. Provide rubber grommets around the
              perimeter of each hole to prevent chafing of cables. Exact
              location of holes to be determined by the NAVOCEANO representative.

       7.13   Install thirty-five equipment racks, items 4.8, to the new and
              existing foundations. Racks shall be bolted to the foundations and
              to each other. Contractor to provide all necessary hardware and
              spacers to secure racks to foundations.

       7.14   Install ground cable, item 4.9 from each rack installed in
              paragraph 7.13 to the steel foundations.

       7.15   Fabricate and install two plastic laminate counter tops using
              enclosure 2.2.4, sheet 4 as guidance. Countertop dimensions,
              design and laminate color to be approved by the NAVOCEANO
              representative prior to fabrication. Install countertops using
              support brackets, item 4.10.

       7.16   Using enclosure 2.2.6 as guidance, fabricate a HDTV monitor mount
              and install it on a table top within the Main Lab. Paint monitor
              mount a flat black.

       7.17   Install thirty-five power junction box, item 4.11 and seventy power
              strips, item 4.12, one each in each of the new equipment racks.
              Install three cable glands in each junction box.

       7.18   Install approximately 2500 feet of power cable, item 4.13, from
              power panel circuits located within the Main Lab to the junction
              boxes and power strips installed within the new equipment racks.

       7.19   Install approximately 8550 feet of signal cable listed in enclosure
              2.2.3, items 4.14 thru 4.26. The cables run from the Main Lab to
              various compartments throughout the ship.

       7.20   Perform a cable resistance test and functional test on all new
              power and signal cables installed.

       7.21   Replace plastic laminate material on all top surfaces of
              workstations in the Main Lab. And drafting room. For estimating
              purposes, surface area is approximately 160 sq-ft. Material design
              and color to be approved by NAVOCEANO representative.

       7.22   Refurbish all top surfaces of wood-workbenches located in the Main
              Lab and drafting room by sanding and applying two coats of clear


3PSC                                                              Page 167 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              polyurethane. For estimating purposes, surface area is
              approximately 140 sq-ft.

       7.23   Install a 10 feet section of cable tray, item4.7, in the overhead
              of drafting room as directed by NAVOCEANO representative.

       7.24   Relocate one copier machine located in the Main Lab from frame 79
              to frame 65.

       7.25   Install four recessed fluorescent lights, item 4.27 in the overhead
              of the Main Lab, three approximately at frame 78 and one at frame
              87.

       7.26   Install one light switch, item 4.28, in the inboard bulkhead of the
              Main Lab.

       7.27   Install power cable, item 4.13, from lighting panel l103, located
              in the main passage way to the light switch and fluorescent lights.

       7.28   Using enclosure 2.2.7, fabricate and install twelve brackets to
              secure computers to workstations in the Main Lab.

       7.29   Replace the three existing cipher door locks with item 4.29. Two
              locks are located at the Main Lab doors, and one is located in the
              Drafting Room door.

       7.30   Install embossed aluminum cable tags on   all new cable
              installations. Tags shall be installed    every 25 feet, on either
              side of a bulkhead or deck penetration,   and at each end of the
              cable run. Cable designations shall be    provided by the NAVOCEANO
              representative.

       7.31   Repair all openings/holes in the Main Lab overhead ceiling panels
              and bulkhead joiner panels left as the result of equipment
              removals.

       7.32   Paint all new and disturbed surfaces to match surrounding areas.



8.0      General Requirements:   None




3PSC                                                              Page 168 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 702         Low Density Storeroom modifications

1.0     Abstract
        This item describes the relocation of storage cabinets and racks, the
        installation of foundations for sonar equipment, the installation of
        expanded metal bulkheads, the removal of a manhole, and the relocation of
        a pipe conduit, all within the low density storeroom.

2.0     References/enclosures
        2.1   References: none
        2.2   Enclosures
              2.2.1 NAVOCEANO DWG, Low Density Storeroom MBSS Arrangement
              2.2.2 NAVOCEANO DWG NO. 0418132, Low Density MBSS Security Cage
                    Arrangement And Details

3.0     Item Location/Description
        3.1   Fuel Oil Tank 4-35-2
        3.2   Void 4-35-0
        3.3   Low Density Storeroom, 3-40-0

4.0    Government Furnished Material
       4.1   EM 120 Pre-Amp Cabinet, Qty 1
       4.2   EM 120 Transceiver Cabinet, Qty 1
       4.3   EM 170 Transceiver Cabinet, Qty 1
       4.4   SBP 120 Transceiver Cabinet, Qty 1
       4.5   EA 600 Cabinet, Qty 1
       4.6   EM 120 Junction Boxes, Qty 2
       4.7   SBP 120 Junction Box, Qty 1
       4.8   Equipment Rack, 19 Inch X 26 Inch, Qty 1
       4.9   Roxtec Multi Cable Transits, Qty 2
       4.10 Florescence Light Fixture, 24 Inch Long, Qty 4

5.0    Notes
        5.1    All contractor furnished material shall be new, and mil/shop
               primed.
        5.2    Fuel oil tank 4-35-2 shall be certified gas free as called out
               elsewhere in this specification.
        5.3    This item is required to be completed 18 days prior to the end of
               the shipyard availability.

6.0      Quality assurance requirements
        6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
              be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
              representative.
        6.2   All welding, fit-up, and installations shall be IAW the
              requirements of the attending abs surveyor, USCG inspector, and
              adhere to applicable classifications rules and requirements.

7.0     Statement of work required
        7.1   Temporarily remove loose supply items (cable reels, monitors,
              boxes, tools, etc) that are stored in open racks within the low
              density storeroom. Store these items in a secure environmentally
              controlled space, approximately 200 square feet.




3PSC                                                               Page 169 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.2    Using enclosure 2.2.1 as guidance, relocate four vidmar stowage
              within the low density storeroom. Modify existing foundations to
              fit new location.
       7.3    Relocate the remaining four vidmar stowage cabinets and their
              foundations to a location within the main lab. Exact location to
              be determined by the NAVOCEANO SDR.
       7.4    Using enclosure 2.2.1 as guidance, relocate two open shelf stowage
              units within the low density storeroom.
       7.5    Remove one 15 inch x 18 inch bolted manhole, located at FR 43 in
              the deck of the low density storeroom. Install a flush deck insert
              plate in way of the removed manhole, in accordance with abs
              requirements.
       7.6    Modify the existing 4 inch cable conduit by rerouting the bottom
              three feet section from the aft end of the stairtower to the port
              side of the stairtower. Relocate the conduit junction box to the
              new conduit location.
       7.7    Relocate two overhead light fixtures, and install three new light
              fixtures, item 4.10, in the overhead of the low density storeroom.
              Exact location to be determined by the NAVOCEANO representative.
       7.8    Modify the existing HVAC supply vent by removing approximately five
              of duct. Reinstall the supply register cover.
       7.9    Using enclosure 2.2.2, as guidance, install approximately 34 linear
              feet of expanded metal bulkheads within the low density storeroom.
              The bulkhead extends from the deck to the bottom of the overhead
              stiffeners and must enclose all vents, cable ways, piping or other
              structural members passing through the bulkhead.
       7.10   Using enclosure 2.2.2, as guidance, install one 36 inch expanded
              metal door into the expanded metal bulkhead. Install a hasp and
              staple to accommodate a combination lock.
       7.11   Using enclosure 2.2.2, as guidance, install five separate
              foundations for the electronic cabinets, items 4.1-4.5, within the
              low density. Two of the foundations are welded to the stair tower
              bulkhead and the remaining three foundations are incorporated into
              the expanded metal bulkhead. Drill approximately sixteen bolt
              holes per foundation, using each cabinet as a template, to mount
              the cabinets. Mount each cabinet using stainless steel hardware.
       7.12   Using enclosure 2.2.2, as guidance, install two foundations and
              install three cable junction boxes, item 4.6-4.7, on the bulkhead
              of the low density storeroom. Exact location to be determined by
              the NAVOCEANO representative.
       7.13   Install one foundation, made from 2 inch steel angle, for a 19 inch
              equipment rack to the deck of the low density storeroom. Install
              one 19 inch equipment rack, item 4.8, to the foundation using
              stainless steel hardware. Install a sway brace to the adjacent
              bulkhead.
       7.14   Install two multi-cable transits, item 4.9, between the low density
              storeroom deck and void 4-35-0.
       7.15   Install approximately thirty, two-tier cable hangers on the
              bulkhead and in the overhead of the storeroom. Exact location to
              be determined by the NAVOCEANO representative.
       7.16   Install a three foot section of 3 inch diameter pipe behind the
              equipment rack to hold 98 transducer cables.
       7.17   Conduct required watertight integrity test on the deck insert plate
              in way of the removed manhole by performing vacuum box or other ABS
              approved means of testing. Final testing requirements shall be
              subject to the approval of the Port Engineer.




3PSC                                                              Page 170 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.18   Paint the expanded metal bulkhead, electronic cabinet foundations,
              and all other new or disturbed surfaces with two coats of epoxy
              anti-corrosive coatings.
       7.19   Clean all areas of the low density storeroom, including all shelves
              and storage cabinets to remove all construction debris and dust.
       7.20   Replace the items temporarily removed in paragraph 7.1.
       7.21   Repair or replace all disturbed overhead and bulkhead lagging.

8.0      General Requirements:   None




3PSC                                                              Page 171 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 703               Transducer Power Distribution System Installation

1.0    Abstract
       This item describes the installation of a power panel and distribution
       system for the Multibeam Sonar System.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   References: None
       2.2   Enclosures:
             2.2.1 NAVOCEANO DWG, Multibeam Power Distribution System, Low
                   Density Strm, Rev (A)

3.0    Item Location/Description
       3.1   Main Passage, 1-24-1
       3.2   Low Density Storeroom, 3-40-0

4.0    Government Furnished Material
       4.1   Circuit Breaker, 2 Pole, 90 Amp, Qty 1
       4.2   Transformer, Dongan 61-3470sh, Qty 1
       4.3   Power, Panel, Siemens, P1A30ML125CTS, Qty 1
       4.4   Electrical Cable, LSDSGU-50, Qty 180 Feet
       4.5   Electrical Cable, LSTSGU-50, Qty 100 Feet
       4.6   Circuit Breaker, 2 Pole, 40 Amp, Qty 1
       4.7   Circuit Breaker, 2 Pole, 15 Amp, Qty 5
       4.8   Circuit Breaker, 1 Pole, 15 Amp, Qty 2
       4.9   Receptacle Boxes, Qty 6
       4.10 Receptacle, 15a-250v, Qty 5
       4.11 Receptacle, 50a-250v, Qty 1
       4.12 Electrical Cable, LSTSGU-14, Qty 50 Feet
       4.13 Electrical Cable, LSTSGU-4, Qty 300 Feet
       4.14 Junction Box, Qty 1
       4.15 Power Strip, 15 A-120v, Qty 2
       4.16 Ground Fault Meter, Qty 1
       4.17 Current Transformer, Qty 1
       4.18 Electrical Cable, LSTSGU-3, Qty 25 Ft

5.0    Notes
       5.1     This item is required to be completed 18 days prior to
               the end of the contract performance period.
6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
             representative.

7.0    Statement Of Work Required

       7.1     Install one circuit breaker, item 4.1, into power panel CP200,
               located in the main passage.

       7.2     Install one transformer, item 4.2 in stairtower 3-44-2.

       7.3     Using enclosure 2.1.1 as guidance, install one power panel, item
               4.3 on the bulkhead in the Low Density Storeroom, at frame 50.



3PSC                                                               Page 172 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




       7.4     Install power cable, item 4.4, from the new circuit breaker in
               power panel CP200, to the new transformer.

       7.5     Install power cable, item 4.5, from the new transformer to the
               new power panel.

       7.6     Install eight circuit breakers, items 4.6 thru 4.8, into the new
               power panel.

       7.7     Install six receptacle boxes, item 4.9, on the bulkhead of the
               Low Density Storeroom. Exact location to be determined by the
               NAVOCEANO representative.

       7.8     Install receptacles, items 4.10-4.11, in the new receptacle
               boxes.

       7.9     Install power cable, item 4.12, from the 40 amp breaker to the 50
               amp receptacle.

       7.10    Install power cable, item 4.13, from five 15 amp breakers to the
               five 15 amp receptacles.

       7.11    Install one small junction box, item 4.14, and two power strips,
               item 4.15, in the equipment rack located within the Low Density
               Storeroom.

       7.12    Install cable, item 4.13, between the 15amp breaker (single pole)
               and the junction box and power strips within the equipment rack.

       7.13    Install a ground fault meter, item 4.16, on the bulkhead adjacent
               to the new power panel.

       7.14    Install a current transformer, item 4.17, within the new power
               panel.

       7.15    Install electrical cable, item 4.18, from the power panel ground
               bar, through the current transformer, and to the ground fault
               meter.

       7.16    Perform a cable resistance test and functional test on all new
               power cables.

       7.17    Install embossed aluminum cable tags on    all new cable
               installations. Tags shall be installed     every 25 feet, on either
               side of a bulkhead or deck penetration,    and at each end of the
               cable run. Cable designations shall be     provided by the NAVOCEANO
               representative.

       7.18    Paint all new and disturbed surfaces to match surrounding areas.

8.0          General Requirements:   None




3PSC                                                                Page 173 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 704             MBSS Target Fabrication

1.0    Abstract
       The contractor shall fabricate two 2-meter steel framed cube shaped sonar
       targets.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   NAVO dwg, MBSS targets

3.0    Item Locations/Quantity: Various

4.0    Government Furnished Material
       4.1   Concrete board, ½” thick, qty 160 square feet

5.0    Notes: none additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements: None Additional

7.0    statement of work required
       7.1   Using enclosure 2.1 as guidance, fabricate two 2 meter steel cubes
             from steel angle.
       7.2   Install expanded metal on all six sides of the cube.
       7.3   Paint surfaces with one coat of anti-corrosive epoxy primer. Use of
             Ameron 240 from ship’s supply is acceptable.
       7.4   Attach concrete board, item 4.1 to each side of the steel cubes.

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 174 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 705         SSSV & Biolite System Modifications


1.0.   Abstract
       This item replaces the Sea Surface Sound Velocimeter (SSSV) tank, and
       refurbishes the SSSV strainer and sea water intake and discharge piping
       as well as the biolite suction piping in the bowthruster room.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None

3.0    Item Location/Description:
       3.1   Forward pump room (3-73-0)
       3.2   Bowthruster room (4-10-0)

4.0    Government Furnished Material :
       4.1   Stainless Steel SSSV Tank, 18”x30”x18”, QTY 1

5.0    Notes: None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or his
             representative.

7.0    Statement Of Work Required
       7.1   Remove for scrap, the existing SSSV tank (18” x 30” x 18”) .
       7.2   Renew the tank foundation by removing all rust and scale and
             recoating with anti-corrosive paint.
       7.3   Temporarily remove the SSSV strainer and refurbish all interior
             parts and paint exterior surfaces.
       7.4   Install new tank, item 4.1.
       7.5   Reinstall refurbished SSSV strainer.
       7.6   Chemically clean SSSV tank suction and discharge piping from the
             underhull intake to the overboard discharge, with phosphoric
             acid.
       7.7   Chemically clean clean the biolite suction piping from the
             underhull intake to the sea valve located in the bowthruster
             room. Length of the pipe is approximately 20ft and measures 3”
             diameter.
       7.8   Conduct a hydro test of all new and modified components at 90PSI.
       7.9   Replace or repair damaged tank and pipe lagging.
       7.10 Paint all new and repaired surfaces to match surrounding.

8.0       General Requirements:    None




3PSC                                                               Page 175 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 706       Moving Vessel Profiler System Installation

1.0.   Abstract
       This item describes the installation of the moving vessel profiler
       winch, system cables and an exterior camera.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None
       2.1   Deck Location Sketch
       2.2   Moving Vessel Profiler Sketch

3.0    Item Location/Description
       3.1   Various

4.0    Government Furnished Material
       4.1   Moving Vessel Profiler, Qty 1
       4.2   Pipe Couplings, 2 Inch SST, Qty 6
       4.3   Pipe Nipples, 2 Inch SST, Qty 6
       4.4   Roxtec Cable Packings Rs-50, Qty 3
       4.5   Signal Cable, Qty 270 Ft
       4.6   Circuit Breaker, 50 Amp, Qty 1
       4.7   Power Switch Box, Qty 1
       4.8   Power Junction Box, Qty 2
       4.9   Power Cable, Qty 250 Ft
       4.10 Camera, Qty 1
       4.11 Siamese Cable, Qty 500 Ft
       4.12 Signal Cable, Qty 500 Ft
       4.13 Towfish Stand, Qty 1

5.0    Notes:
       5.1    All contractor furnished material shall be new, and mil/shop
              primed.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
             representative.

7.0    Statement Of Work Required
       7.1   Using enclosure 2.1 as guidance, fabricate and install four steel
             plates measuring ½ inch x 30 inch x 30 inch to the main deck grid
             at frame 150. Bevel plate edges 45 degrees. Drill four ¾” holes
             in each deck plate to match the main deck grid.
       7.2   Using enclosure 2.2 as guidance, install the MVP, item 4.1, to
             deck plates.
       7.3   Install six pipe couplings, item 4.2, in the deck, three port and
             three starboard, for the MVP. Exact location to be determined by
             temporarily positioning the MVP winch in each location.
       7.4   Install three pipe nipples, item 4.3, and the three packings,
             item 4.4 into the three port pipe couplings.
       7.5   Install two data cables, item 4.5, one each from the port and
             starboard MVP locations through the new penetration to rack 7 at
             frame 75 in the Main Lab using existing cable trays.
       7.6   Install one circuit breaker, item 4.6, in power panel P405
             located in the High Density Storeroom.




3PSC                                                             Page 176 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.7     Install one power switchbox, item 4.7, in the overhead of the
               Propulsion Room.
       7.8     Install two power junction boxes, item 4.8, in the overhead of
               the Propulsion Room, port and starboard.
       7.9     Install electrical cables, item 4.9, from the new circuit breaker
               to the new power switchbox, and from the power switchbox to each
               new power junction boxes. Terminate all power cables with ring
               lugs and attach to terminal strips in each junction box.
       7.10    Install the winch power cable from the winch to the port power
               junction box.
       7.11    Install one camera, item 4.10, onto ship's superstructure at fr
               124.
       7.12    Install two cables, item 4.11 and item 4.12, from the camera to
               rack 7 in the Main Lab.
       7.13    Install one towfish stand, item 4.13, on the fantail of the Main
               Deck. Modify stand deck plate, as necessary to match deck bolt
               holes.
       7.14    Tests – All new penetrations and sealed penetrations shall be
               tested via vacuum box or high pressure water test in the presence
               of the Port Engineer or Senior Navoceano Representative.
       7.15    Upon completion of successful integrity test, repair all damaged
               lagging.
       7.16    Upon completion of successful integrity test, paint new and
               disturbed surfaces to match surrounding.

8.0          General Requirements:   None




3PSC                                                                Page 177 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 707       HSL Modifications

1.0    Abstract
       This item describes various upgrades to the two 34’ Hydrographic Survey
       Launches (HSLS) stowed in the boat davits on the aft deck. This work
       shall be accomplished AFTER the work on the HSL engines, hull, and
       interior is completed as delineated in a work item listed elsewhere in
       these specifications.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None

3.0    Item Location/Description: HSLs 9 And 10

4.0    Government Furnished Material
       4.1   GFE Water Pressure Regulator, Qty 2
       4.2   Stainless Steel SSSV Tank Lid (10” X 21” X ¼”), Qty 2
       4.3   Lexan Divider, Qty 2
       4.4   Starboard A/C Duct, Qty 2
       4.5   Starboard A/C Elbow, Qty 2
       4.6   Port A/C Duct, Qty 2
       4.7   A/C Duct Trim Strips, Qty 8
       4.8   Canopy Roller And Supports, Qty 2
       4.9   Overhead Liner Sections, Qty 2 Sets
       4.10 Wood Screws (For Overhead Liners), Qty 2 Sets

5.0    Notes: This work shall be accomplished AFTER the work on the HSL
       engines, hull, and interior is completed as delineated in a work item
       listed elsewhere in these specifications.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
             representative.

7.0    Statement of work required
       Note: All work described is for two boats.

       7.1 Disconnect water supply to the boat. Install GFE water pressure
           regulator (item 4.1) on the ¾” supply line. Connection shall be
           between the bottom of the ¾” elbow on the inside of the aft
           bulkhead of the main cabin and the ¾” hose. Reconnect water supply
           to the boat and test the new water pressure regulator. Note:
           ship’s force shall assist with testing by varying pressure supplied
           to the boat.

       7.2 Remove the existing lexan lid on the SSSV tank under the deck of
           the main cabin in the HSL. Match drill approximately 24 each 9/32
           dia holes in the GFE stainless steel tank lid (item 4.2). Remove
           the brass vent and cable gland from the existing tank lid and
           install on the new tank lid. Install the new SSSV tank lid on the
           SSSV tank. Test tank to ensure that there are no water or air
           leaks.




3PSC                                                             Page 178 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.3 Install GFE starboard a/c duct (item 4.4) to the aft side of the
           starboard a/c housing in the main cabin of the HSL. Horizontal
           portion of duct shall connect to the existing vent and then run
           approximately 3 feet along the starboard bulkhead until it ends
           into the vertical portion. The vertical portion of the duct shall
           be mounted to side of the bulkhead with small 316 stainless steel
           wood screws.   Note: horizontal portion of duct is a 4” flexible
           tube. Vertical portion of duct is approximately 8”w x 3”d x 4’h.

       7.4 Cut a hole in the top aft portion of the starboard a/c housing and
           seal the GFE starboard a/c elbow to the top of the housing using 3m
           5200 sealant or equal. NAVOCEANO representative shall determine
           exact location and positioning of elbow.

       7.5 Temporarily remove the light fixture on the port side of the main
           cabin. Temporarily remove the plastic velcro strips between the 2
           windows on the port side. Relocate the a/c control unit on the
           port a/c housing several inches aft. Fabricate and install an
           angle to support the aft end of the relocated control unit.
           Install the GFE port a/c duct (item 4.6) above the port a/c housing
           by mounting it to the port bulkhead with small 316 stainless steel
           wood screws. Cut a hole in the top of the port a/c housing to
           match the inside dimension of the new duct. Mount the GFE a/c duct
           trim strips (item 4.7) around the bottom of the a/c duct on top of
           the housing using small 316 stainless steel wood screws. Fabricate
           a new angle bracket for the light fixture and install to the port
           bulkhead just aft of the new a/c duct. Reinstall the plastic
           velcro strips to the side of the a/c duct ensuring that the window
           shades can reach them.   Note: a/c duct is approximately 8”w x 3”d
           x 4’h.

       7.6 Temporarily remove the existing roll-out canopy roller and canopy
           from the cockpit of the HSL. Remove the supports for the canopy
           and patch the holes with fiberglass resin. Install the GFE canopy
           roller and supports (item 4.8) to the forward bulkhead of the
           cockpit in the location specified by the NAVOCEANO representative.
           Install existing canopy to the new canopy roller and the at frame.
           Ensure canopy roller is tightened properly by extending a-frame.

       7.7 Temporarily remove the handrail, vhf radio, and chart bag attached
           to the overhead liner in the main cabin of the HSL. Remove the
           overhead liners and attached teak strips. Install 3 sets of 1” x 2”
           wood in the overhead spanning the width of the cabin to support the
           gaps between the new overhead liners. Attach velcro to the new
           wood strips. Mount the 4 new GFE overhead liner sections using the
           GFE wood screws to the overhead. Reinstall the handrail, VHF
           radio, and chart bag to the overhead.

       7.8 Prime and paint new and disturbed surfaces to match surrounding.

8.0      General Requirements:   None




3PSC                                                            Page 179 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 708         Main Mast Safety Rail

1.0.   Abstract
       This item installs a handrail section on the upper mast deck.

2.0    Enclosures
       2.1   See enclosed photo for reference

3.0    Item Location/Description
       3.1   Upper Mast

4.0    Government Furnished Material: None

5.0    Notes: None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
             representative.

7.0    Statement Of Work Required
       7.1   Fabricate and install a two foot section of three tier handrail
             using 2” and 1 ½” schedule 40 pipe. Top height of handrail is
             42”.

       7.2     Weld handrail section to the deck of the upper mast adjacent to
               the deck scuttle.

       7.3     Paint new and disturbed areas to match surrounding in way of
               handrail and inside mast.

8.0    General Requirements:    None


Enclosure 2.1




3PSC                                                                 Page 180 of 280
       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




3PSC                           Page 181 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 709          NAVO General Labor and Assistance


1.0.   Abstract
       The contractor shall provide various materials, labor, services and
       equipment required to support and assist various NAVOCEANO
       requirements. All work, labor, services and equipment under this work
       item will be at the direction and request of the 3PSC port engineer.

2.0    References/Enclosures: None

3.0    Item Location/Description: Various

4.0    Government Furnished Material : None

5.0    Notes: None

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
             representative.

7.0    Statement Of Work Required
       7.1   General/various crafts, trades, labor and services. The 3PSC
             Port Engineer shall require various crafts, labor trades,
             services and materials to support various NAVOCEANO requirements.
             The contractor shall furnish a price quotation that allows for
             providing the following labor, material and services throughout
             this performance period. Laborers shall be equipped with the
             necessary tools, materials and equipment customary to the
             specific trade, craft or service, as follows:

               (A)    200 man-hours (straight time) of any trade, service or
                      craft. (example: electrician, electrical, mechanics,
                      machinist, rigging, crane, hull or pipe fitter, etc)
               (B)    $4000 in materials

       7.2     Only the 3PSC Port Engineer is authorized to draw man-hours,
               material or services against this work item. Under no
               circumstances shall the contractor utilize hours from this work
               item without written consent from the 3PSC Port Engineer.

8.0          General Requirements:   None




3PSC                                                                Page 182 of 280
                   4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




800 Series Items




3PSC                                       Page 183 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 801   Air conditioning and Refrigeration Systems Repairs

1.0 Abstract
    Provide two (2) Carrier Refrigeration engineers to accomplish
    various air conditioning and refrigeration repairs while the vessel is
    afloat.

2.0 References/Enclosures: None

3.0 Item Location/Description:
    3.1   Location: (2-80-1) Air Conditioning Flat and Walk-In
          Freezer/Refrigerator units
    3.2   Descriptions
          3.2.1   Two (2) air conditioning units
                  Mfr: Carrier Transicold
                  Model: 5MH80-149
                 Capacity: 80 tons
          3.2.2 Two (2) refrigeration units
                  Mfr: carrier
                  Model: 5MH60-149
          3.3.3 One (1) climate controlled unit
                 MFR: carrier
                  Model: 5MH60-149
          3.3.4 One (1) climate controlled freezer
                 MFR: Carrier Transicold
                  Model: 5MH60-149
          3.3.5 Six (6) Galley undercounter units
                  mfr: Cospolich
                  model: Various

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment/Services: None
    4.1   Shell Clavus 68 – 50 gallons

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements.
    6.1   all work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Chief
          Engineer.

7.0 Statement of Work Required - This item shall be accomplished IMMEDIATELY
    after vessel arrival and prior to securing these systems while in the
    shipyard.
    7.1   the contractor shall provide the services of two (2) carrier air
          conditioning and refrigeration technicians to inspect, repair
          and groom all units listed in paragraph 3.0.
    7.2   With the ship’s engineers in attendance, each compressor listed
          shall be test operated. Perform the following tests/inspections on
          equipment listed in paragraph 3.0:
            A.    Leak test on the entire refrigeration system loop, including
                  all gauges, valves, and piping.
            B.    Perform leak test on all refrigeration piping, gauges,
                  isolation valves located on 2nd deck outside of the walk-in
                  freezers and reefer. outside the walk-in freezer and reefer
                  located on 2nd deck.



3PSC                                                             Page 184 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              C.     Record all operating temperatures and pressures for each air
                     conditioning and refrigeration unit.
               D.    Prove the proper operation of all safety shutdown devices for
                     each unit.
               E.    Provide a comprehensive service report for each unit, citing
                     the operating pressures, temperatures, any leaks noted, and
                     include a recommended repair requirement for each deficiency
                     discovered.
               F.    Repairs for these deficiencies shall be covered by a change
                     order.
       7.3   At the completion of testing and providing service report, open and
             inspect the compressor oil sumps. Clean sumps with lint free rags
             and replace oil with oil provided by the vessel.
       7.4   Contractor shall furnish and install new air dryers for the system
             dehydrators for the domestic reefer and A/C units.
       7.5   At the conclusion of repairs, and 3 days prior to departure, test
             operate each system under loaded conditions. Take and record the
             system operating temperatures and pressures, and check for the 2nd
             time the entire system for refrigeration leaks.
              7.5.1 A follow up service report at the completion of this second
                     set of inspections shall be submitted to the Port Engineer.
       7.6   For estimating purposes, the contractor shall provide the following:
             A. Provide two (2) carrier technicians for tend (10) days of on site
             service, working Monday – Friday, 0800-1800.
             B. Provide 200 lbs (90kg) of R-22 refrigerant
             C. Allow for $5000 in materials in support of these repairs/service

       7.7   Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
             7.7.1 Test and Report – As called out in paragraph 7.2 for each
                   system prior to any repairs/service performed. Submit in hard
                   copy to the Port Engineer via a condition report.
             7.7.2 Test and Report – As called out in paragraph 7.5.1 for each
                   system after repairs and service have been performed. Submit
                   in hard copy to the Port Engineer via a condition report.

8.0     General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 185 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 802   Overhaul Engine Room Supply Fans & Paint Intake Plenum

1.0 Abstract
    The engine room supply fans require overhaul and the air intake plenum is
    in need of preservation.

2.0 References/Enclosures
    2.1   The enclosed photographs are taken from the sistership USNS
          PATHFINDER. These are provided as reference to assist in
          formulating a price quotation.
    2.2   MSC standard item 49 titled: Recondition Ventilating Fans And
          Motors, Squirrel Cage (AC) Service

3.0 Item Location/Description
      3.1 Location: 02 deck at frame 85
      3.2 Description: Two each fans, equipped with 15hp motor, 440VAC,
          3phase, 60 cycle

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment
       4.1   3PSC shall furnish new vibration dampers for the fans.
             Mfr Info and details:
             P/N 7E-450
             NSN 5342-00-664-4473
             Nomen: Mount, Resilient
             APL#: 892003445 – MISC PARTS PROPULSION, AGS 063
             Qty: 16 each (8 per fan)

       4.2 Amercoat 240 white – 5 gallons
           Amercoat 240 Gray – 5 gallons
           Amershield White – 3 gallons

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:   None

7.0 Statement of Work Required
    7.1 Temporarily remove the louvers to access the fans for removal. Work
         on louvers is covered under a work item listed elsewhere in this
         specification.
    7.2 Supply fan removal and overhaul
         7.2.1   Electrically and mechanically disconnect and remove the 2 fans
                 and convey to the electrical shop.
         7.2.2   Overhaul the ventilation fan in accordance with enclosure 2.2
                 with the following additional items:
                 A. Renew the motor leads junction box with a new box and
                    terminals equivalent to the original.
                 B. Replace the canvas duct work that connects the fan outlet
                    to the supply air duct to the engine room.
                 C. Machine shop blast and coat the support brackets (16 each
                    per fan made from 12mm steel) and coat with 2 coats of
                    Amercoat 385 epoxy.
                 D. Renew the 16 each Government Furnished vibration dampers
                    for each fan assembly.
                 E. Upon completion of repairs, perform the dynamic balance in
                    the presence of the Port Engineer.



3PSC                                                                Page 186 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                   F. Reinstall the fan assembly and reconnect both mechanically
                      and electrically using new stainless steel fasteners.
                   G. Confirm proper rotation by bump starting the fan.

       7.3 Preserve, prime and paint the air intake area
           7.3.1   After the fans have been removed, furnish and install wooden
                   blanks over the openings to the engine room. These blanks are
                   to be sealed in place to prevent seepage of rust/dirt/water
                   from entering the engine room.
           7.3.2   Using disc grinders and other mechanical tools, scale the
                   entire region of all rust and corrosion to SSPC-SP-3
                   standards. Feather in to tightly adhered paint. The entire
                   area is approximately 60 square meters. Approximately 50%
                   shall require mechanical scaling. Allow the Port Engineer to
                   inspect upon completion
                   NOTE: This area to be scaled and painted includes both the
                   interior and exterior of the louver mounting flanges.
                           7.3.2.1     Allow for 60 man-hours towards
                           mechanically scaling and grinding the area in
                           preparation for painting.
           7.3.3   Once completed with tool scaling, perform a high pressure
                   freshwater wash (200bar) and degrease/clean to clean the
                   entire area. Allow to dry.
           7.3.4   Thinner wipe the area using mineral spirits or MEK after
                   washdown.
           7.3.4   Apply one coat of Amercoat 240 White at 5 mils DFT in way of
                   all scaled regions.
           7.3.5   Apply a second coat of Amercoat 240 Gray at 5 mils DFT in way
                   of the entire plenum, both interior and exterior.
           7.3.6   Apply a topcoat of Amershield White at 3 mils DFT throughout
                   the entire plenum.

8.0        General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 187 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




       Ventilation supply fans removed from the ship, in the “as found
       condition” NOTE: New junction boxes are to be installed




       Motors are to be removed, cleaned, bearings renewed, and balanced.
       Exterior is to be blasted and coated. After reinstalling, the entire
       assembly is to be dynamically balanced.




3PSC                                                             Page 188 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




       Fans being returned to the ship after being completely overhauled.




3PSC                                                             Page 189 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



STANDARD ITEM NO. 49, REVISED 2 APRIL 1993
RECONDITION VENTILATION FANS & MOTORS, SQUIRREL CAGE (AC) SERVICE

Prior to the start of work, the contractor shall contact the Port Engineer
and/or the Chief Engineer to coordinate the implementation of the Tag Out
Program for the entire performance period of this item. The prime contractor
shall be responsible for compliance by both prime and subcontractor
personnel.

Remove interference items as required and tag showing system, location, name
of ship and work item number. Disconnect the motor electrically and
mechanically. Remove motor and fan assembly and convey to shop.

Perform the following electrical tests and record results;
  a. Voltage Surge Comparison in accordance with the manufacturers
     instructions for the tester and the following:
     Test voltage to be applied shall be 1.4 times voltage computed in the
     following table.
     E = Operating voltage of equipment under test

                                      Armature Circuits Field Circuits
                                      ----------------------- -----------------
       ---
       Motors rated above 250v           2E + 1000                        10E but not
       less than 1500v nor more than 3500v

       Completely disassemble the motor and fan, thoroughly clean and examine
       all parts. Protect machined surfaces. Inspect the armature for
       defective bars.
       Inspect and dimensionally measure end bells, frame, shaft, sleeve,
       bearings, keyways, and running surfaces for wear, eccentricity, and
       other defects. Record as found readings.
       If further repairs are found to be necessary submit condition report and
       consult with the Port Engineer for instructions before proceeding.
       Additional repairs deemed necessary by the Port Engineer shall be the
       subject of a change order.

       The windings and rotor are to be baked to remove all moisture.

       The windings shall then be impregnated and with Class F insulating
       varnish and baked IAW latest IEEE STD 45 regulations.
       All surfaces of the fan and fan housing and motor frame exterior shall
       be grit blasted to bare metal. Apply one (1) coat primer and one (1)
       finish coat to match surrounding areas for units located within the
       interior of the ship. Units exposed to weather deck areas shall receive
       two coats of primer and one finish coat. All coatings shall be MSC
       approved in accordance with COMSCINST 4750.2, Latest Revision.

       Dynamically balance the rotor and the fan as a unit. Final balance
       weight adjustments shall be made to the fan. The Port Engineer shall
       witness final balancing. Final unbalance shall not exceed the
       manufacturer's specifications for a new unit or, in the absence of this,
       value determined by:

           1)   For speeds in excess of 1000 RPM;
                Unbalance (oz ins) =       4 x weight of rotor and fan (lbs.)/
                Max. operating RPM of unit


3PSC                                                              Page 190 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




         2)   For speeds between 150 and 1000 RPM:
              Unbalance (oz ins) = 4000 x weight of rotor and fan (lbs.)/
              Max. operating RPM of Unit) squared

Dress all bearing housings to accept new bearings.

Install new bearings and grease seals as original and lubricate. Renew
internal leads and connections as required. Completely reassemble the motor.
Renew assembly hardware and gaskets on covers, inspection plates, and between
the external connection box and frame.

Perform the following shop test and prove all work satisfactory to the Port
Engineer:

Perform a 500 volt megger insulation and continuity test on all windings.
Record results. Measure and record air gaps. Inspect shaft for freedom of
rotation. Turn by hand at least three turns. Measure resistance value of
each winding temperature detector using a low voltage ohmmeter. Test
equipment at operating speed(s) for a minimum of 15 minutes. Measure and
record voltage and current. Repeat electrical tests 1, 2, and 3 above.
Record results.

Upon completion of all repairs, inspection and approval by the Port Engineer,
return assembly to the ship, reinstall, connect, and align in accordance with
equipment instruction manual. Test under actual operating conditions for
minimum of one hour after temperatures stabilize. Record current, voltage,
speed and frame and bearing temperature rise at 15 minute intervals. Prove
all work satisfactory to the Port Engineer.

Submit "as released" report including test results to the Port Engineer.

All interferences shall be reinstalled as original.




3PSC                                                            Page 191 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 803     Refurbish Various Fan and Motor Assemblies

1.0    Abstract
       Various fans that serve machinery spaces require overhaul.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   The technical manual for these fans is aboard ship and available
             for use.

3.0    Item Location/Description:
       3.1   Location and Description
             Description: Vent Fan #20 (HZV08120)
             Location: 2-138-2, Main Motor Propulsion Motor Room
             Model: MCD-5670/R1-3563
             Size: XA6
             Fan Type: Vaneaxial
             Speed: 2 Half/Full
             Airflow: 6290 CFM
             460VAC, 3phase
             HP: 5/1.25 , Amps: 6.4/2.6
       3.2   Location and Description:
             Description: Port Propulsion Transformer Exhaust Fan
             Location: E 2-96-2
             Model: MCD-5670/R1-3563
             Size: XA4
             Frame Size: 215TDZ
             Type: Vaneaxial
             Speed: 1750 RPM
             Airflow: 5000CFM
             460VAC, 3phase
             HP: 4HP, Amps: 5.6
4.0    Government Furnished Material/Equipment/Services:

       4.1     Resilient Mounts for the Port Propulsion Transformer Exhaust Fan
               NSN 5342-00-543-3575, APL M326040496.
               Total of 16 each to be ordered.

5.0    Notes: None Additional


6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       6.1   All work shall be to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer or his
             designated Appointee.

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       8.1   Prior to performing work, ensure that the motors are properly
             tagged out.
       7.2   Using reference 2.2 as guidance, completely disassemble the motor
             and fan, thoroughly clean and examine all parts. Replace fan and
             fan housing with new fasteners. Protect machined surfaces.
             Inspect the armature for defective bars. Inspect and
             dimensionally measure end bells, frame, shaft, sleeve bearings,
             keyways, and running surfaces for wear, eccentricity, and other
             defects.    Take and record as found readings.




3PSC                                                               Page 192 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.3    If further repairs are necessary submit a condition report and
              consult with Port Engineer for instructions before proceeding.
              Additional repairs deemed necessary by the Port Engineer will be
              covered by a change order.

       7.4    The windings and rotor shall then be baked to remove all
              moisture.

       7.5    The windings shall be impregnated and baked with Class F
              insulating varnish IAW latest IEEE STD 45 regulations.

       7.6    The motor frame exterior shall be grit blasted to bare metal in
              accordance with SSPC-SP-10 requirements. This includes the new
              fan housing. Apply two coats of Amercoat 240 Epoxy Gray at 5
              mils DFT per coat to the exterior of the motor in accordance with
              International Paints mixing and application requirements.

       7.7    Dynamically balance the rotor. The Port Engineer shall witness
              final balancing. Final unbalance shall not exceed the
              manufacturer's specifications for a new unit or, in the absence
              of this, the value determined by:
                    a) For speeds in excess of 1000 RPM:

                                               4 x weight of rotor (lbs.)
              Unbalance (ounce inches)   =     ----------------------
                                               Max. operating RPM of unit

       7.8    Machine all bearing housings and end bells to accept new
              bearings. This includes any build up requirements or re-sleeving
              to accept new bearings.

       7.9    Furnish and install new bearings and grease seals. Furnish and
              install new zerc fittings, as required. Apply Shell Alvania EP2
              in accordance with Reference 2.2

       7.10   Inspect the wiring leads from the motor pothead to the motor
              assembly. Furnish condition report of findings if leads require
              renewal due to insulation damage, chafing, scarring. Repairs
              shall be covered by a change order.

       7.11   Completely reassemble the motor. Renew all hardware and gaskets
              on covers, inspection plates, and between the external connection
              box and frame.

       7.12   Perform the following shop test and prove all work satisfactory
              to the Port Engineer. Perform a 500 volt megger insulation and
              continuity test on all windings. Record results. Measure and
              record air gaps. Inspect shaft for freedom of rotation. Turn by
              hand at least three turns. Measure resistance value of each
              winding temperature detector using a low voltage ohmmeter. Test
              equipment at operating speed(s) for a minimum of 15 minutes.

       7.13   Reassemble the fan /motor assembly using new coupling assembly
              equivalent to original and convey to the ship for reinstallation.

       7.14   Reinstall the fans using new steel fasteners, grounding straps
              and GFE furnished resilient mounts.


3PSC                                                                 Page 193 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.15   An electrical test to confirm amp draw and vibration shall be
              performed during the run-in phase of these fans.

       7.16   Test/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables Inspections – Continuous
              Machinery Credit for these blowers shall be credited by ABS
              pending examinations and test operation.
              7.16.1   The Contractor shall be required to notify the Port
                       Engineer 24 hours in advance of final reassembly in
                       order to arrange for a site visit with the ABS Surveyor.
              7.16.2   Report – Motor insulation readings before and after
                       overhaul. Electronic photos (with 1 set hard copy to
                       the Port Engineer) to be provided showing motor as
                       found, disassembled and reassembled
              7.16.3   Report - Dynamic Balance Report of motor
              7.16.4   Inspection - Contractor shall notify Port Engineer when
                       fan and motor are reassembled and being balanced. ABS
                       Surveyor shall be brought in to witness final balancing.
              7.16.5   Test – An electrical integrity test to confirm proper
                       amp drawing as well as a vibration analysis shall be
                       conducted during the run-in phase of these fans.
              7.16.5   Report – Final service report listing conditions noted
                       during the test operation shall be furnished to the Port
                       Engineer

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 194 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 804      Vent Duct Renewal (HZV08116)

1.0    Abstract
       The vent duct in the main propulsion motor room is in need of
       replacement due to wastage.

2.0    References: None Available

3.0    Item location/Description:
       3.1   Locations/Quantity/Description

        Description    Dimensions/Description
        Piece 1        One Vee shaped assembly with two 90 degree elbow
                       flanged sections. The openings measure 33” x 15”.
                       Overall length is 67” and 42” wide
        Piece 2        Rectangular section appx. 15” x 12” measuring 48”
                       length that is attached to the tubular section
                       measuring 25” long x 18” diameter. A rectangle to
                       circular transition piece measuring 15” long and a
                       circular flared and flanged end measuring 20”
                       diameter.
        Piece 3        Transition piece from the vaneaxial supply fan 2-
                       138-2, P413, measuring 28” diameter (forward end) by
                       33” x 15” rectangle on the aft end.
        Piece 4        7.5” wide x 28” diameter partially flexible section
                       between the transition joint and the vaneaxial fan
                       itself. NOTE: the canvas/cloth section shall be
                       renewed during the course of the repairs as listed
                       in this work item.
        Piece 5        Transition piece from the forward end of the van
                       axial supply fan 2-138-2, P413 measuring 28”
                       diameter (forward end) by 33” x by 13” rectangular


4.0    Government Furnished Material: None

5.0    Notes: None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements: None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work
       7.1   Prior to starting work, the contractor shall take photos to confirm
             the layout of the existing system for reference.
       7.2   Crop and renew all sections listed in paragraph 3.0 using 16 gauge
             stainless steel duct work (measures .0625” thick) and stainless
             rivets.
       7.3   All new duct work shall be painted in the sheet metal shop using
             the following coating system:
             A. First coat of Amercoat 240 Buff at 5 mils DFT
             B. Top coat of Amercoat 5105 Off white at 3 mils. DFT.
       7.4   Replace the torn fabric using fire retardant canvas material
             extending from the fan to the hard duct. Secure in place using
             stainless steel banding material.

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional



3PSC                                                                Page 195 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 805      Overhaul Supply, Discharge, EDG and Natural Air Dampers
1.0   Abstract
      The automatic closure dampers are in need of overhaul.

2.0    References
       2.1   Photos enclosed for reference and estimating

3.0    Item location/Description:
       3.1   Locations/Quantity
             3.1.1 01 Deck Stbd Side:
                   Natural supply vent damper: 99" x 66" x 6" - 1 each
             3.1.2 02 Deck:
                   Engine Room Supply Fan damper: 87" x 60" x 6" - 2 each
             3.1.3 02 Deck:
                   Engine Room Supply Fan damper: 70" x 60" x 6" - 2 each
             3.1.4 Ship’s Stack:
                   Engine Room Exhaust Fan damper: 60” x 60” x 6” – 4 each
             3.1.5 Emergency Generator:
                   EDG Supply Dampers: 96” x 48” x 6” – 2 each
             3.1.6 Emergency Generator:
                   EDG Exhaust Damper: 60” x 48” x 6” – 1 each

       3.2   Description:
             3.2.1 Each damper has two (2) actuators to be worked.

4.0    Government Furnished Material: None

5.0    Notes: None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements: None Additional

7.0    Statement of Work – The contractor shall provide all labor, material
       and services to accomplish this work item.
       7.1   Prior to removal, test operate the louvers in the presence of the
             Chief Engineer to confirm current operation and closure.
       7.2   Temporarily disconnect and remove from the ship each louvers.
             7.2.1 Install wooden blanks in way of removed screens that are
                    bolted in place to prevent any dirt/debris from entering the
                    intake/exhaust plenums.
       7.3   Completely disassemble the filter screen housings from damper
             frames.
       7.4   Using 5000psi (300bar) washer, freshwater wash and clean the louver
             assemblies.
       7.5   Inspect all shaft bushings and hardware for defects.
       7.6   Completely disassemble pneumatic actuator linkage and free-up all
             parts.
             7.6.1 Free up using penetrating oil and soak as necessary to
                    remove all salt and corrosive buildup.
             7.6.2 Apply synthetic grease to all louver shaft bushings, the
                    actuator arm linkages, and the actuator.
       7.7   Crop and renew the pneumatic actuator foundations from each
             damper.
       7.8   Fabricate and install new foundations for the louver actuators
             using 316CRES plate measuring 3/16” thickness. Stiffen the
             underside of the foundation to reduce flex motion of actuator.



3PSC                                                             Page 196 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.9    Prove the proper operation of each louver assembly to fully open
              and close manually.
       7.10   Return the louvers to the ship. Reinstall the louvers using new
              316grade stainless steel fasteners.
       7.11   Reconnect the pneumatic actuators and prove the proper operation of
              louvers in the open and closed position. Accomplish final timing
              and prove fully opened/closed in the presence of the Chief
              Engineer. Adjust so that no gaps are present when the actuators
              are in the CLOSED position.
       7.12   Place blue filter media in way of the filter housings as per
              original.

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 197 of 280
                                       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Enclosure 2.1 – Photos for reference




Engine Room Exhaust Dampers on Stack




Engine Room Supply Dampers




3PSC                                                           Page 198 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 806       Clean all HVAC Duct Work, Air Handlers, & Fan Rooms

1.0     Abstract
        Clean the entire air conditioning and ventilation system.

2.0     References/Enclosures
        2.1 Enclosures
             2.1.1  MSC Standard item #15, “Cleaning ventilation systems”
             2.1.2  MSC standard item # 16, “Cleaning ventilation filter screens”

3.0     Item location/description
             3.1    Air Handler Locations
                      #         Location        Capacity
                      1          02-63-1         75 gpm
                      2         01-110-1         66 gpm
                      3          01-90-2         62 gpm
                      4          1-115-2         33 gpm
                      5          1-75-1          40 gpm
                      6          1-26-2          40 gpm
                      7          2-106-2         11 gpm
                      8       2-95-2 (c.c)       40 gpm
                      9          2-70-2          32 gpm
                     10          2-37-1          28 gpm
                     11          3-82-2          28 gpm

        3.2 Ventilation Fan and Motor Locations
      Location           Service         Model #         HP       CFM        Remarks
      Stack                 Generator rm      54hb       30      54540        2   speed
      Stack                 Generator rm      54hb       30      54540        2   speed
      Stack                 Generator rm     Ma48b9      50      57930        2   speed
      Stack                 Generator rm     Ma48b9      50      50500        2   speed
      02-61-1 fan Room      Forecastle       XA 1 ½     1.25      1715
                            deck & above
      01-111-6dc            DC timber        Ma5cf       0.2      165
                            storage
      01-111-6dc tim &      Machinery        Ma100af       5     9755         2 speed
      p250 stow             control
                            station
      Vent                  Galley            Xa6         5      7110
      01-111-6 dc tim &     Paint locker     Ma2 ½      0.05      150          Non-
      p250 stow                                                              sparking
      01-111-2 emerg gen    Emergency        Ma 12pf    0.17      470
                            generator
      01-73-1 fan room      Galley           Ma60af        3     7110
      Vent                  Bow thruster     Ma60af        3     6210         2 speed
      1-54-3 fan rm         Main deck &        Xa6         5     6155
                            below t&s
      2-65-8 fan rm         Storerooms       Ma50cf       3      4240
      Vent                  Wet lab           Xa ½      0.33      700
      2-95-1 rpr parts      Shops            Ma60af       3      5965         2 speed
      strm
      2-104-0 high          Aft pump rm      Xa 1 ½     1.25     1460         2 speed
      density strm
      2-120-0 winch rm      Winch rm          Xa 3        3      3970         2 speed
      2-120-0 winch rm      Seismic sys       Xa ½      0.33      710         2 speed
                            cap bank strm
      2-136-0 prop mtr rm   Propulsion        Xa6          5     6290         2 speed



3PSC                                                                    Page 199 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                         motor rm
   2-86-1 repair parts   Shops              Xa6         5      8165      2 speed
   strm
   3-73-0 fwd pump rm    Fwd pump rm        Xa2       1.75     2395      2 speed

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment: None

5.0 Notes
      5.1 The insulation is located inside the ductwork . Therefore, water
          washdown and rinsing cannot be used to accomplish this work item.

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements
    All work to be accomplished to the satisfaction of the 3PSC Port Engineer.

7.0 Statement of work required
    7.1   Perform work as delineated in enclosures 2.1.1 – 2.1.2 with the
          following exceptions/addendums:
            7.1.1 The Contractor shall remove access plates and thoroughly
                  clean the steam heating and chill water cooling coils in all
                  of the fan rooms.
            7.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for creating access
                  plates in order to clean system in its entirety. Access
                  covers shall be installed using machine screws and new gasket
                  material. Affix plastic placards in way of new accesses.
            7.1.3 Means of cleaning using light dusting, brushes or vacuums.
                  Use of dry ice is not authorized due to the fact that the
                  insulation is installed on the interior of the duct work.
    7.3   All disturbed areas, in way of lagging, are to be primed and
          painted.
    7.4   Allow for renewing 300 sq ft of lagging and adhesives with
          contractor furnished materials.
    7.5   Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
            7.5.1 Report – Motor insulation resistance readings shall be
                  submitted to the Port Engineer as a condition found report.

8.0 General Requirements:    None additional




3PSC                                                               Page 200 of 280
                                       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Standard Item no. 15, revised 2 April 1993
Cleaning Ventilation Systems

All interior surfaces of ventilation systems including ducts, trunks,
screens, filters, heaters, and fan casings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
dirt, grease, lint and other foreign matter.

The cleaning of ducts and trunks shall be accomplished by vacuum suction
system augmented by hand tools and degreaser. All debris resulting from the
cleaning operation shall be disposed of in accordance with all federal, state
and local environmental regulations. If required, additional cleanout
openings may be cut in ducts to facilitate the work. Any such openings shall
be fitted with air tight gasketed covers of similar thickness to ducts,
neatly installed and secured with sheet metal screws.

Remove filters to shop.

Each filter shall be blown clean with compressed air and washed by passing
through a circulating hot water type washing machine. The water shall
contain an approved washing compound. After drying, each filter shall then
be returned to the ship and installed with new gaskets. Replace any
defective clips with new of the same type as original. Assume 15% of clips
to require replacement.

All frames and landings in way of filters shall be prepared in accordance
with steel structure painting council preparation standard, SSPC-SP3. Frames
and landing areas shall then be painted with two coats of primer. The second
primer coat shall be tinted to assure complete coverage. A top coat is to be
applied to match the surrounding area.

Remove and replace all disposable filters with new ones equal to existing.
Dispose of removed filters in accordance with applicable federal, state and
local environmental laws and regulations.

Renew insulation damaged or removed during performance of work.

All dirt and debris accumulated during the performance of this work shall be
removed from the ship daily. Areas worked in or traversed by workmen and
equipment shall be cleaned and left in good order.

All new work and disturbed areas in way of the work shall be washed down,
primed and painted to conform with adjacent painted areas.

The systems to be dealt with shall be as set forth in the basic
specification.




3PSC                                                           Page 201 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Standard Item No. 16, Revised 2 April 1993
Cleaning Ventilation Filter Screens

1. Remove designated ventilation screens from installed positions and convey
to shop.

2. Each filter screen shall be blown with compressed air and washed
By passing through a circulating hot water washing tank containing an
approved washing compound.

3. The filter shall then be thoroughly drained and dried.

4. All landings in way of filters shall be prepared in accordance
With steel structure painting council preparation standard, SSPC-SP3, power
tool cleaning. Landing areas shall then be painted with two coats of primer.
The second primer coat shall be tinted to assure complete coverage. A top
coat is to be applied to match the surrounding area.

5. Replace all gaskets. Replace defective clips and bolts with new material
equal to the original when new.

6. Return filters to ship and reinstall.     Areas involved shall be left clean
and in good order.

7. Quantities and locations to be dealt with shall be as set forth in the
basic specification.




3PSC                                                               Page 202 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item no. 807    Clean Galley Exhaust System

1.0 Abstract
    Clean the exhaust system serving the galley & gaylord exhaust system.

2.0 References/Enclosures
    2.1   Enclosures:   MSC standard item no. 14- “Cleaning Galley Range
          Exhaust Ducts”

3.0 Item Location/Description
      3.1 Location: Galley area & duct work extending to the 02 deck,
          including the duct work on both suction and discharge side of
          exhaust fans

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment: None

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:    None

7.0 Statement of Work Required This work shall be started within 7 days after
    vessel arrival and completed no later than 4 days prior to sea trial.
    this item shall be coordinate with other works listed elsewhere in this
    specification that are taking place in the galley.

       7.1 Perform the work as delineated in the areas listed in paragraph 3.0 in
           accordance with the work requirements listed in enclosure 2.1 with the
           following clarifications/additions:
           7.1.1    Allow for temporarily removing the overhead stainless panels
                    and re-riveting in place upon completion. clean the panels
                    once all work has been accomplished.
           7.1.2    All exhaust systems in the galley, including the dishwasher,
                    deep fat fryer, griddle, steamer and scullery are to be
                    cleaned in their entirety.
           7.1.3    The overheads, counters, bulkheads shall be wiped down upon
                    completion of cleaning and reinstalling accesses.
           7.1.4    The deck shall be washed upon completion of all works.

       7.2 Other methods of duct cleaning (i.e. dry ice treatment) can be
           substituted, subject to the approval of the Port Engineer.

       7.3 Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
             7.3.1  Inspections - the contractor’s QA department shall thoroughly
                    inspect all areas prior to calling in the 3PSC Port Engineer.
             7.3.2  Inspection - When ready for inspection, make available a
                    ladder, flashlight and mirrors to inspect all regions.

8.0 General Requirements:    None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 203 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Standard Item No. 14, Revised 2 April 1993
Cleaning Galley Range Exhaust Ducts

 Thoroughly clean the interior surfaces of the galley range exhaust
 ventilation duct system, including filters, all hardware exterior of exhaust
 fan motor, fan discharge to the duct terminus and terminus screens.

 Cleaning shall be accomplished by vacuum suction system augmented by hand
 tools and degreasers as required to thoroughly clean ducts of all grease,
 dirt and foreign matter. All debris resulting from the work required by
 this item shall be disposed of in accordance with all federal, state and
 local environmental regulations.

 Accomplish all disconnections and removals necessary to accomplish the
 cleaning. If required, new access opening shall be cut into the duct work
 to facilitate cleaning. Furnish new sheet metal covers and install over new
 openings using gaskets and sheet metal screws. Covers shall be left air-
 tight. Replace all disturbed insulation.

 All dirt and debris resulting from this work shall be removed from the ship
 daily. Upon completion of work, all disturbed areas shall be left clean,
 primed and painted to match adjacent colors. All involved areas shall be
 left clean and in good order.

 The above work shall be accomplished at such times and in such manner so not
 to interfere with normal operation of the galley.

 Galley range and system to be dealt with shall be set forth in the basic
     specification.




3PSC                                                            Page 204 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 808   Clean Clothes Dryer Exhaust System

1.0 Abstract
    Clean entire exhaust system for clothes dryers.

2.0 References/Enclosures -
    2.1   Enclosures: MSC Standard Item No. 15, “Cleaning Ventilation Systems”

3.0 Item Location/Description
    3.1   Location: ship’s laundry rooms: 2-77-1 & 2-77-3
    3.2   Description: 4 clothes dryers, 2 ventilation systems

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment:   None

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:   None

7.0 Statement of Work Required
    7.1   Perform all work as delineated in enclosure 2.1 with the following
          addendum:
          7.1.1 Lay out and install access openings to facilitate cleaning
                duct work in its entirety.
          7.1.2 All internal duct work including fins, louvers, fan blades,
                and diffusers shall be cleaned.
          7.1.3 Install covers in way of access openings and secure using
                machine screws. Affix placard identifying access location.
          7.1.4 Fabricate and install new air filters in the duct work
                equivalent to existing.

8.0 General Requirements:    None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 205 of 280
                                       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Standard Item no. 15, revised 2 April 1993
Cleaning Ventilation Systems

All interior surfaces of ventilation systems including ducts, trunks,
screens, filters, heaters, and fan casings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
dirt, grease, lint and other foreign matter.

The cleaning of ducts and trunks shall be accomplished by vacuum suction
system augmented by hand tools and degreasers. All debris resulting from the
cleaning operation shall be disposed of in accordance with all federal, state
and local environmental regulations. If required, additional cleanout
openings may be cut in ducts to facilitate the work. Any such openings shall
be fitted with air tight gasketed covers of similar thickness to ducts,
neatly installed and secured with sheet metal screws.

Remove filters to shop.

Each filter shall be blown clean with compressed air and washed by passing
through a circulating hot water type washing machine. The water shall
contain an approved washing compound. After drying, each filter shall then
be returned to the ship and installed with new gaskets. Replace any
defective clips with new of the same type as original. Assume 15% of clips
to require replacement.

All frames and landings in way of filters shall be prepared in accordance
with steel structure painting council preparation standard, SSPC-SP-3. Frames
and landing areas shall then be painted with two coats of primer. The second
primer coat shall be tinted to assure complete coverage. A top coat is to be
applied to match the surrounding area.

Remove and replace all disposable filters with new ones equal to existing.
Dispose of removed filters in accordance with applicable federal, state and
local environmental laws and regulations.

Work in way of galleys, pantries and food serving spaces shall be
accomplished at such times that do not interfere with normal operations of
these areas.

Renew insulation damaged or removed during performance of work.

All dirt and debris accumulated during the performance of this work shall be
removed from the ship daily. Areas worked in or traversed by workmen and
equipment shall be cleaned and left in good order.

All new work and disturbed areas in way of the work shall be washed down,
primed and painted to conform with adjacent painted areas.

The systems to be dealt with shall be as set forth in the basic
specification.




3PSC                                                           Page 206 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 809        Various Insulation/Lagging Renewals

1.0    ABSTRACT
       This item describes renewing insulation on various sections of
       chillwater piping located throughout the ship.

2.0    REFERENCES: None Additional

3.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION
       3.1   Location: Machine Shop on 1st Platform, appx Frame 88
       3.2   Description:
             3.2.1 80 linear feet of chill water supply and return piping
                   (est. 2” diameter) to be reinsulated
       3.3   Location: Freezer on 2nd platform, appx frame 70
       3.4   Description:
             3.4.1 20 linear feet of evaporator drain line (est. 1” diameter)
                   to be reinsulated
       3.5   Location: Officer’s Laundry Room, 2-75-1
       3.2   Description:
             3.2.1 30 linear feet of chill water supply and return piping
                   (est. 2” diameter) to be reinsulated
       3.3   Location: High Density Storeroom 2-104-1
       3.4   Description:
             3.4.1 120 linear feet of chillwater supply and return piping
                   (est. 2” diameter) to be reinsulated


4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL/SERVICE: None

5.0    NOTES:   None Additional

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:   None Additional

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK REQUIRED
       7.1   Insulating General Requirements
             7.1.1 All new insulation shall be Preformed Plastic Rubatex, R-
                   180-FS, self-lagging material or Insul-Tube 180 flexible
                   closed cell pipe insulation. Minimum thickness is 1/2 “.
                   NOTIFY 3PSC in your price quote as to the type of material
                   to be used for this item.
             7.1.2 Rubatex 373(Blue) or Rubatex (red) adhesive shall be used
                   as required for the proper installation of rubatex
                   insulation. Armstrong 520 Adhesive shall be used as
                   required for the proper installation of Insul-Tube 180
                   insulation
             7.1.3 Suitable Anti-sweat type insulation shall be applied, where
                   required. Seams shall be secured by cementing.
             7.1.4 Two (2) -1/2” layers of insulation shall be laid on all
                   areas to be insulated.    All insulation shall be finished
                   off by sealing with white lagging cloth and lagging
                   paint/sealant.
             7.1.5 Straight runs of piping shall be insulated with molded or
                   pre-formed insulation. Butt-end and longitudinal joint




3PSC                                                              Page 207 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                   surfaces shall be covered with a joint compound measuring
                   1/16" thick.
             7.1.6 On fittings such as bends and elbows, preformed or
                   fabricated segments of the same insulation as on adjacent
                   straight runs shall be applied. All joints shall be
                   tightly fitted and cemented together with an approved joint
                   sealing adhesive compound.
             7.1.7 All piping to be re-lagged shall be cleaned of original
                   adhesive using brass bristle brushes and inspected by the
                   Port Engineer prior to applying new adhesive.

       7.2   Prior to starting work in the spaces listed, consult with the
             Chief Engineer to secure all chillwater systems.
       7.3   Remove all existing insulation on the duct work and chill water
             piping and dispose of as scrap. Scale all piping and duct work
             of loose paint and adhesive material. Chill water piping shall
             be cleaned using brass brushes to accept new adhesive material.
       7.4   Allow the Port Engineer to inspect the duct work and piping prior
             to applying the first layer of insulation.
       7.5   Furnish the necessary insulating material and apply over the duct
             work, piping, and valves in the chill water system.
       7.6   Between the first and second layer, apply Armorflex 520 adhesive,
             or equivalent on the outer layer of the first layer.
       7.7   Apply the second layer of insulation over the first layer,
             followed by the lagging cloth and white sealant paint.
       7.8   Upon completion, clean up all dirt and debris as a result of this
             work item.
       7.9   TESTS/INSPECTIONS/REPORTS/DELIVERABLES
             7.9.1 INSPECTION - Cleaned piping prior to insulation
                   installation
             7.9.2 INSPECTION – Insulation installation between layers & prior
                   to sealing with lagging cloth
             7.9.3 INSPECTION - Space close-out and check off.

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 208 of 280
                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




900 Series Items   Hull




3PSC                                              Page 209 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item no. 901 Docking and Undocking Vessel

1.0 Abstract
    Drydock and undock the ship in a drydock for accomplishing inspections and
    repairs as specified elsewhere in these specifications. The ship shall be
    docked TWICE in order to accomplish ALL work called out in this
    specification during this performance period.

2.0 Reference/Enclosures
    2.1   References
            2.1.1 MSC Docking Plan No. 7080886, Sheets 1-4, Rev D, marked for
                  USNS PATHFINDER.
            2.1.2 NAVSEA Dwg no. 085-7400614, Capacity Plan
            2.1.3 MSC Standard Item No. 88 Docking and Undocking Vessel
            2.1.4 MSC Drydock Report Form NAVSEA 9997/1

3.0 Item Location/Description
      3.1 Location: At the Contractor’s facility
      3.2 Description:
          3.2.1 ship’s characteristics:
                A. Length, overall: 329’-0”
                B. Beam:              58’-0”
          3.2.2 Estimated arrival draft: mean: 24’ 0”
          3.2.3 Estimated displacement at this draft is 4350 long tons

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment: None
5.0 Notes
      5.1 At this time, the vessel will be drydocked in Drydock position B.
          Contractor shall verify and locate all the locations of domes,
          transducers, and thrusters on the underwater hull to clear the work
          areas as shown in reference 2.1.1.
      5.2 Keel blocks shall be laid out strictly in accordance with reference
          2.1.1 table of offsets for keel blocks.
      5.3 The ship shall be waterborne with no less than three (3) feet of
          water under the deepest underwater hull projection.
      5.4 In addition to standard drydock issues, special attention shall be
          paid to the sponsor requirements detailed in the 700 and 950 series
          items. These details include:
          5.4.1   A Drydocking of the vessel for the removal of the existing
                  sponsor equipment.
          5.4.2   A re-docking of the vessel for the positioning, alignment and
                  installation of the new Sponsor equipment.
          5.4.3   All standard drydock item are to be coordinated and conducted
                  during one or the other drydocking period.
          5.4.4   A graving dock with a block height of three (3) meters shall
                  be required for for the fit up and alignment of the gondola
                  assembly.
      5.5 Contractor shall verify and locate all the locations of domes,
          transducers, and thrusters on the underwater hull to clear the work
          areas as shown in reference 2.1.1. Keel blocks shall be laid out
          strictly in accordance with Reference 2.1.1 table of offsets for
          keel blocks.
      5.6 The contractor shall schedule the drydocking of the ship during the
          availability dates such that all drydock work, including



3PSC                                                            Page 210 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



            unanticipated growth work activated by exercising the additional
            government required option clause, or any Category “B” option
            clauses contained in the drydocking work can be accomplished, and
            the ship undocked at least two days prior to plant start up for
            scheduled testing, i.e. dock trials and sea trials.
       5.7 The deepest projection below the keel are:
            5.7.1   the uncontaminated seachest (6”), located at frame 14 on
                    The centerline.
            5.7.2   and the sonar domes (24”), located at:
                    5.7.2.1 fr. 52-57, athwartships
                    5.7.2.2 fr. 55-67, centerline
                    5.7.2.3 fr. 34.5-39.5, centerline
            5.7.3   The skeg extension from frames 123-144, extending 48” below
                    baseline
       5.8 The contractor shall take extreme precaution to prevent damage to the
            sonar domes during docking, undocking, and while performing any
            other work in the vicinity of the domes. It shall be the
            contractor’s responsibilty to protect the sonar domes, all
            transducers, and underwater equipment from damage as a result of
            work described herein. Protection shall be to the satisfaction of
            the Port Engineer.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer.

7.0    Statement of work required
       7.1 A graving dock is required to accomplish the repairs/modifications as
            listed within this specification. No exceptions. Docking Position
            “B” shall be the positioning during this docking evolution.

       7.2 Provide all labor, material, equipment and services to drydock and
           subsequently undock the vessel. The drydock facility length overall,
           and side wall clearance between the drydock walls and ship’s side
           will be no less than five (5) feet on either side.

       7.3 The contractor shall provide suitable drydock certified by a
           recognized Drydock certifying authority and to approval of the Port
           Engineer. A copy of the certificate shall be provided to the Port
           Engineer along with the contractor’s price quotation. Certificate to
           show issue date, expiration date, and lift capability.

           7.3.1 Provide the services of a Dock Master who has been certified by
                 a recognized authority and accepted by the Port Engineer.
                 Provide supporting personnel to accomplish the drydocking and
                 undocking.

           7.3.2 Provide the services of an independent naval architect to
                 verify block arrangement, height, and settings 24 hours prior
                 to scheduled docking date.

       7.4 Provide tugs, pilots, and personnel including line handlers for the
           complete transfer, drydocking, and undocking of the ship. The number
           of tugs shall be two (2) each with minimum horsepower rating of 2500
           shaft horsepower for each tug.
           7.4.1   The ship’s mooring lines shall be used to bring the vessel
                   into dock, if required. otherwise, contractor shall provide
                   all mooring lines, pull lines and wires.


3PSC                                                             Page 211 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



           7.4.2   The ship shall not be under command while shifting to and
                   from the drydock to the layberth.

       7.5 Calculate the trim and stability using reference 2.1.2 for guidance.
           Determine maximum allowable trim based on block loading and
           stability.

           7.5.1 Take and record tank soundings of all fuel oil and salt water
                 ballast tanks with the ship’s 1st Asst. Engineer.. Determine
                 ballasting requirements to drydock the ship with acceptable
                 trim and stability conditions in sufficient time to allow for
                 ballasting and/or deballasting of tanks by the contractor prior
                 to drydocking.

           7.5.2 Prior to undocking ship, accomplish stability and loading
                 calculations based on weight and moment changes made on the
                 ship while in drydock. Ballast/deballast the vessel as
                 required prior to undocking.

           7.5.3 When for the convenience of the contractor the vessel shall be
                 drydocked at a displacement of less than 4389 long tons but in
                 no case less than the minimum allowable displacement of 2853
                 long tons. All removed weights including permanent ballast,
                 lube oils, fuel oils, and stores shall be removed and stored
                 during the entire duration of the drydocking period and
                 returned to their respective original storage location at no
                 additional cost to the government. Care shall be taken not to
                 contaminate clean tanks or interchange tank contents.

           7.5.4 Any weights to be offloaded by the contractor for purpose of
                 preparation for and trimming of the vessel for drydocking shall
                 be disposed of by the contractor in accordance with the
                 federal, state and local pollution control regulations.

           7.5.5 The contractor shall transfer/remove fuel oil and non-fixed
                 ballast water, to trim the ship as required for drydocking.
                 Contractor shall be responsible for storage and return of fuel
                 oil including disposing and restoring of non-fixed ballast in
                 connection with this work item.

           7.5.6 The contractor shall provide the services of certified divers
                 to check and ensure that no damage occurs to the underwater
                 hull during docking and undocking. The divers shall be
                 equipped with a remote camera setup on the drydock wingwall in
                 order to permit the Port Engineer to view the clearance between
                 the hull mounted sonar domes and keel blocks.

       7.6 Drydock Block Arrangements - Provide labor, equipment and material to
           erect, set and align the docking blocks in accordance with reference
           2.1.1. Provide a minimum clearance between the ship's bottom and
           drydock flooring in order to accomplish work items. The minimum
           height of the keel block at frame 77.5 shall be nine feet, nine
           inches (9'-9", 3 meters)

           7.6.1   The keel blocks shall measure 30” (fore and
                   aft)x42”(athwartships) arranged in piers consisting of three
                   14”x14” hardwood timbers mounted with two inch minimum


3PSC                                                             Page 212 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                   thickness softcap blocks as stated in ref. 2.1.1. Softwood
                   caps are required on side blocks and shall measure18”x30”.

           7.6.2   24 hours prior to docking, accomplish an inspection of the
                   prepared blocking in presence of the Port Engineer,
                   independent naval architect, and the contractor's Dock
                   Master. Blocks shall be inspected for proper location,
                   height, leveling, shaping, spacing, and securing on dock.
                   Contractor shall have the docking plan, ladders, tape
                   measures and twine to perform an in-depth inspection of the
                   blocks and confirm height and location of each.
                   7.6.2.1 The inspection shall start at the proposed stern
                           reference point used to mark-off all keel and side
                           blocks.

       7.7 Within 48 hours prior to drydocking and undocking, conduct a
           drydocking/undocking conference attended by the Ship's Master, the
           ship's supervisory personnel, the Port Engineer, Independent Naval
           Architect, the contractor's Dock Master, and the contractor's
           supervisory personnel who will be present during the docking
           evolution. At this conference the Dock Master is to discuss the time
           of drydocking/undocking, tide situation, tug and pilot arrangements,
           line handlers, ship's force responsibilities, and temporary services
           procedures.

           7.6.1 Immediately before the docking/undocking conference the Dock
                 Master shall furnish the Port Engineer a copy of a report
                 indicating the following conditions/information.
                 A.   Tide conditions including time of maximum rise and fall.
                 B.   Minimum amount of water between ship's keel and blocks
                      during docking evolution.
                 C.   Tugs and pilot arrangements.
                 D.   Assistance required for ship's force
                 E.   Line handling.
                 F.   Electrical grounding arrangements.
                 G.   Shore power and services.
                 H.   Communications arrangements between Dock Master, Ship's
                      Master, ship's force and Port Engineer during docking and
                      undocking.
                 I.   Minimum Water of the Sill and Blocks during docking.

       7.7 Immediately after the ship is drydocked, inspect the fit of the
           blocks in the presence of the Port Engineer. Provide necessary
           shimming between blocking and hull in the event of hull movement due
           to ballasting or shifting of ship's load.

             7.7.1 If the ship is found off the centerline on the keel blocks
                   more than 6 inches, contractor shall re-drydock the ship and
                   place the ship in centerline position.

       7.8 Immediately after the ship is drydocked, the contractor shall high
           pressure wash the vessel's hull using freshwater. Areas to be washed
           shall start from the top of the boottop down to the keel and include
           the propellers, skeg, sonar domes, bowthruster recess and
           bowthruster. The wash down shall be performed using clean, fresh
           water at no less than 5000psi (350bar) nozzle pressure.




3PSC                                                             Page 213 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             7.8.1 Lower the bow thruster to the drydock floor. Provide
                   blocking underneath thruster. Take extreme care not to
                   damage thruster when lowering. Lowering the bow thruster will
                   facilitate washing the thruster and thruster recess area.
                   Raise thruster when cleaning and all other work involved
                   elsewhere in this specification is complete and approved by
                   the Port Engineer.


       7.9 Immediately after the ship is docked, all shore services shall be
           hooked up. Priority shall be taken to restore shorepower cables,
           auxiliary cooling water and contractor furnished firefighting
           manifolds.

       7.10 Electrically connect ship's hull when in drydock to the established
            connection point at the bow and stern of the ship with minimum
            500,000 circular mill cables and ground connection in drydock for
            protection against lightning and other static charges. The static
            ground leads shall be connected to the ship before any electrical
            currents are turned on to the ship.

       7.11 Maintain the ship's watertight integrity while the ship is in
            drydock. When an area of shell plating removal makes temporary
            closure impracticable, the contractor is to secure each vulnerable
            compartment in order to minimize potential damage to the extent
            permitted by scope and urgency of work. Underwater hull operations
            are to be scheduled to maintain positive ship's stability and maximum
            hull watertight integrity in the event of flooding.

           7.11.1 The contractor shall be responsible for the removal of
                  underwater hull drain plugs and openings. All the removed
                  drain plugs shall be replaced and openings shall be restored
                  to watertight integrity conditions.

           7.11.2 The contractor shall provide a numbering system to account
                  for any temporary plugs inserted into under water hull
                  penetrations during drydock work. Each plug shall be assigned
                  a unique number. Prior to undocking, these plugs shall be
                  removed and accounted for and a report made to the Port
                  Engineer.

       7.12 The Contractor shall provide necessary temporary services and
            equipment such as lighting, staging, and cherry picker with operator
            to assist the Port Engineer, the ship's personnel, ABS, and technical
            consultants to perform underwater hull and coatings inspections.

       7.13 The Contractor shall mask propellers and shafts with heavy canvas and
            plastic prior to any sandblasting, waterblasting, hot work or other
            pertinent work around stern. These temporary protections shall be
            maintained during performance of related work and removed just prior
            to undocking.

       7.14 Undocking - Accomplish an underwater hull coating and watertight
            integrity inspections prior to undocking in presence of the Port
            Engineer and contractor's supervisory personnel.
            7.14.1 Prior to undocking, ensure that the dock is free of all
                    debris/blasting material and that all work accomplished


3PSC                                                              Page 214 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                  during the drydock period completed to the satisfaction of
                  the Port Engineer.
           7.14.2 Flooding the drydock shall commence only when approved by the
                  Port Engineer and after removal of temporary protections.

       7.15 Undock the ship at a date and time mutually agreed upon by the Port
            Engineer and the Contractor. Before undocking verify that sea valves
            and other hull penetrations below full load draft are watertight.
            7.15.1   Immediately after hull penetrations are submerged but
                     before the ship lifts off of the blocks stop flooding the
                     drydock. Accomplish watertight integrity inspection of
                     contractor's work affecting watertightness of the hull or
                     hull penetrations below the water level in company with the
                     ship's force and the Port Engineer. Continue flooding of
                     the dock when directed by the Port Engineer.
            7.15.2   During the undocking, the Contractor shall furnish four (4)
                     machinists onboard, each equipped with tools and vhf radios
                     to assist in tightening any of the sea valves found leaking
                     during the hull integrity check. One of the four
                     machinists shall be a superintendent of shift foreman.

       7.16 Manufacturer’s Representative
            7.16.1   The Contractor shall furnish one (1) independent Certified
                     naval architect to attend docking conference, perform
                     drydock walkthrough, and submit Trim and Stability
                     calculations to the Port Engineer.

       7.17 Preparation of Drawings
            7.17.1 The contractor shall prepare and submit to the port engineer
                    five (5) copies of the enclosure 2.1.4, no later than 5 days
                    after undocking.

8.0 General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 215 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Enclosure 2.2.3      MSC Standard Item #88
Standard Item No. 88, Revised 2 April 1993
Docking and Undocking Vessel

The contractor shall provide a suitable drydock, certified by Navsea, ABS, or
equivalent regulatory body. Approval to use the drydock shall be granted by
MSC, engineering directorate, on a case by case basis, upon satisfactory
review of the drydock certificate and related information. A copy of the
certificate shall be submitted with the contractor's initial proposal/bid and
the original shall be made available for inspection by the designated msc
port engineer. The certificate shall show the issue date, expiration date
and lift capability. A material condition survey report or certificates from
crandall, or similar firms shall not be accepted in lieu of a certificate as
required above.

The contractor shall provide the services of a dockmaster who is certified to
the requirements of mil-std-1625sh, latest revision. A copy of the
dockmaster's certification shall be submitted with the contractor's initial
proposal/bid and the original shall be available for inspection by the
designated msc port engineer.

General requirements

1. Contractor shall furnish labor, material and special equipment necessary
to drydock and undock the ship. The drydock facility length overall shall be
equal to or greater than the length of the ship overall, and the side wall
clearance between the drydock walls and the ship's side will be no less than
five (5) feet on each side.

2. Conduct a docking/undocking conference at least one day prior to docking,
undocking or fleeting (if applicable) the ship. This conference shall be
attended by the ship's master, chief engineer, msc port engineer and the
contractor's dock master who will be present during the time of the docking
evolution. At this conference the dock master is to discuss the time of
drydocking/undocking, tidal conditions, tug and pilot arrangements, line
handlers, ship's force responsibilities, and temporary services procedures.

3. Immediately before the drydocking/undocking conference the contractor's
dock master shall furnish the msc port engineer a copy of a report indicating
the following:

       A. Time of high tide and the amount of rise and fall and water over
          blocks.
       B. Tug and pilot arrangements
       C. Line handling
       D. Ship's force responsibilities
       E. Weight control procedures
       F. Electrical shore power
       G. Electrical grounding arrangements
       H. Continuation of general ship's services
       I. Transfer of liquids to facilitate drydocking
       J. Communication arrangements between dock master, ship's master, ship's
          force, and the port engineer during the docking and undocking.
       K. Pertinent and/or unusual conditions affecting drydocking
       L. Stability calculations/data required by this work item.



3PSC                                                              Page 216 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



4.     Calculate stability data. Determine maximum allowable trim based on the
       block loading and stability. Calculate maximum still water bending
       moment. Maximum allowable trim not to exceed 5’ 03".

5.     Contractor shall provide dockside line handlers upon arrival of ship at
       the yard, and all necessary dockside and shipboard line handlers and tugs
       for docking, undocking and any berth shifts until the departure of the
       ship from contractor facilities. Number of tugs to be agreed to by the
       ship's master at the drydocking conference.

6.     Obtain tank soundings from the ship. Soundings shall be taken in a joint
       survey between the contractor and a ship's force representative and the
       quantities of liquids in the tanks agreed upon prior to the start of any
       ballasting operations. Determine ballast requirements to drydock the
       ship with allowable trim and stability conditions. Notify the msc port
       engineer in sufficient time to allow for ballasting of tanks prior to
       drydocking/undocking if required.

7.     The contractor shall coordinate all work and with the assistance of the
       port engineer, transfer fuel oil and non-fixed ballast water, to trim the
       ship, as required for drydocking. Contractor shall be responsible for
       storage of fuel oil and disposing of non-fixed ballast necessary to
       drydock the ship. Trim to be such as to ensure against placing any undue
       stress or strain on the skeg.

8.     Any ballast offloaded by the contractor for the purpose of preparation
       for and trimming of the ship for drydocking shall be disposed of by the
       contractor in accordance with all federal, state and local pollution
       control regulations. All ballast removed by the shall be replaced with
       fresh water only and in compliance with stability and longitudinal
       strength requirements specified by the ship's master.

9.     When for the convenience of the contractor, the ship shall be drydocked
       at a displacement less than that specified in the specification, but in
       no case less than the minimum acceptable displacement set forth in the
       basic specification, all removed weights including ballast, lube oil,
       fuel oil, fixed ballast and stores which have to be removed in order to
       facilitate the drydocking of the ship will be for the cost of the
       contractor. All such removed weights shall be stored by the contractor
       for the duration of the drydocking period and returned to their
       respective locations at no additional cost to the government.

10. The contractor shall prepare drydock and set keel blocks. Location of
    keel blocks shall be in accordance with the ship's requirements, and as
    may be specified within the drydocking plan. Position blocking so that
    propellers, rudders, and other equipment on the surface of or protruding
    from the hull will not be damaged and will be accessible for removal and
    repair. Ship position in dock and height of blocking shall be set forth
    in the basic specification.

11. Blocking shall be composed of a combination of either concrete/steel or
    hardwood blocks, fitted with 2" thick soft cap blocks. Blocking shall be
    secured, and shall be cribbed to prevent shifting. The term "hardwood"
    for the purpose of this item includes: white oak, California laurel,
    Oregon myrtle, iron bark, blue gum, American rock elm or preserved red
    oak. Woods acceptable for soft caps are: Douglas fir, tamarack, long
    leaf pine or hemlock.


3PSC                                                              Page 217 of 280
                                       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




12. The normal life span for hardwood blocking is about ten (10) years.
    Nevertheless, blocking showing evidence of excessive crushing, warping,
    cracking, rotting or damage from dogging and unequal shrinkage or
    deterioration to an extent of no longer being capable of supporting a
    prescribed load over full bearing area is not acceptable and shall be
    replaced.

13. The contractor shall review ship's ballast conditions, trim weights,
    drafts prior to drydocking the ship to assure that all safety conditions
    have been met.

14. Accomplish an inspection of the prepared blocking in presence of the
    ship's master, port engineer, contractor's dock master and supervisory
    personnel. Blocks shall be inspected for heights, leveling, shaping,
    spacing and securing of the drydock hardware to its structure. Docking
    block inspection shall be accomplished in daylight, at least four (4)
    hours prior to flooding the drydock. Immediately prior to flooding the
    dock, accomplish a final block inspection with the port engineer.

15. The contractor shall provide a diver to ensure that blocking has been
    properly set to clear ship's with sonar domes prior to setting the ship
    on the blocks.

16. Immediately after the ship is drydocked, inspect the fit of the blocks.
    Provide necessary shimming between blocking and hull in the event of hull
    movement due to ballasting or shifting of ship's load.

17. If the ship is found off the centerline on the keel blocks more than six
    (6) inches, or not as stipulated in the basic specification, the
    contractor shall re-drydock the ship and place the ship in centerline or
    drydock position as stipulated.

18. At the completion of drydocking, the underwater body of the ship shall be
    high pressure water washed with fresh water, at 2,500 - 3,000 psi. The
    underwater hull shall be maintained wet with fresh water hose washdown
    until high pressure water washing has been completed. High pressure
    waterwash hull free of all foreign material and marine growth to allow
    inspection of the hull by the abs surveyor, the us coast guard marine
    inspector and the port engineer.

19. Contractor shall provide necessary temporary services and equipment such
    as lighting, rain coats, rubber boots, staging and cherry picker with
    operator to assist port engineer, ship's personnel, regulatory body
    inspectors and u.s. government technical inspectors to perform underwater
    hull and coating inspections.

20. The contractor shall provide a numbering system to account for any
    temporary plugs inserted into under water hull penetrations during
    drydock work, each plug shall be assigned a unique number. Prior to
    undocking, these plugs shall be removed and accounted for and a report
    made to the port engineer.

21. The contractor shall in no case transfer ballast or fuel while the ship
    is in dock without specific permission of the master of the ship and the
    dockmaster. Any ballast removed by contractor for drydocking shall be




3PSC                                                           Page 218 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       replaced by the contractor. The ship shall be refloated, to the greatest
       extent practicable, at the drydocking drafts and displacement.

22. Shift the keel blocks as found necessary to permit examination of all
    peak and double bottom tank drain plugs and fathometer transducers by the
    port engineer.

23. Contractor shall mask propeller shaft gland seal boxes, propellers,
    rudder stock gland and rudder pintles with heavy canvas and plastic prior
    to any sandblasting, waterblasting, hot work or other pertinent work
    around the stern. These temporary protections shall be restored after
    performance of related work and removed prior to undocking.

24. Ship shall be dry-docked at contractor's facility within the time period
    specified in the contract.

25. Electrically connect ship's hull when in drydock to the established
    connection point at the bow and stern of the ship with cables (minimum
    500,000 circular mills) and ground connection in drydock for protection
    against lightning and other static charges. The static ground leads
    shall be connected to the ship before any electrical currents are turned
    on to the ship. Connection shall be made before the ship is free of the
    water.

26. Maintain the ship's watertight integrity while the ship is in drydock.
    When an area of shell plating removal makes temporary closures
    impracticable, the contractor is to secure each vulnerable compartment in
    order to minimize potential damage to the extent permitted by the scope
    and urgency of the work. Underwater hull operations are to be scheduled
    to maintain positive ship's stability and maximum hull watertight
    integrity in the event of flooding.

27. Upon completion of drydocking work items as set forth in the basic
    specification, the contractor shall notify ABS and USCG 24 hours prior to
    undocking. Provide necessary tugs, line handlers and undock the ship.

28. Prior to undocking, ensure that the dock is free of all debris and that
    all work accomplished during the drydock period, such as sea valves,
    shaft seals and all other hull penetrations are proven watertight by high
    pressure fresh water hose testing or other means acceptable by the port
    engineer and regulatory bodies.

29. Trial flood the drydock at a date and time mutually agreeable to the
    contractor and the port engineer. Stop flooding the drydock after hull
    penetrations are submerged, but before the ship lifts off the blocks.
    Perform a watertight integrity inspection of all contractor's work
    affecting the watertightness of the hull and on hull penetrations,
    tailshaft(s) and sea valves below the water level, in company with the
    abs surveyor, us coast guard marine inspector and the designated msc port
    engineer. Redrydocking to correct deficiencies in contractors work shall
    be accomplished at no additional cost to the government. Upon the
    mutually agreed satisfactory completion of the inspection, and if it is
    safe to float the ship, continue flooding the drydock and undock the
    ship.

30. Prepare and submit to the Port Engineer three (3) each typewritten copies
    of:


3PSC                                                              Page 219 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       A. Docking report NAVSEA 9997/1

31. If work is performed on propellers or shafting submit three (3) each
    typewritten copies of:
    A. Propeller report NAVSEA 9997/2
    B. Propeller detachable blade NAVSEA 9997/3
    C. Shaft and bearings NAVSEA 9997/4

32. The following information shall be set forth in the basic specifications:
    A Ship's General Characteristics
    B Docking Plan
    C Blocking position of vessel
    D Maximum height of blocking arrangement
    E Minimum acceptable drydocking drafts and displacement
    F Estimated arrival drafts and displacement




3PSC                                                             Page 220 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Enclosure 2.1.1   Typical underwater hull areas and propellers

                               Stern thrusters




3PSC                                                             Page 221 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




ITEM NO. 902    Underwater Hull Painting
1.0     Abstract
        The underwater hull region requires blasting and re-coating.

2.0 References/Enclosures
      2.1 References: Steel Structure Painting Council Surface Preparation
          Spec No. 10 (SPCC-SP-10), Near White Blast Cleaning, or SPCC 12/
          NACE 5 WJ-2 High- and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water Jetting Prior to
          Recoating, using a 35,000psi minimum pressure.

        2.2 Enclosures:
            2.2.1   STANDARD ITEM NO. 90, REVISED 15 SEPTEMBER 2003 ,
                    UNDERWATER HULL RECOAT, 5 YEAR ABLATIVE SYSTEM


3.0 Item Location/Description
      3.1 Location: From the top of the boottop to the centerkeel including
          the skeg, bowthruster and cowling, bowthruster recess, the
          transducer tubes (2), seachests & internals (3each), seachest
          strainer plates, and all hull markings

        3.2 Description:   Approximately 24,000 sq ft to be dealt with

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services

        4.1 PAINT PRODUCTS

       Paint type                        Color                        Quantity
        Amercoat 240         Red Oxide                  200 gallons
        Amercoat 240         Black                      200 gallons
        ABC-3                Red                        240 gallons
        ABC-3                Black                      260 gallons
        Amercoat 5450        White                      5 gallons
        Amercoat T-10        N/A                        30 gallons
        Thinner

       4.2   ONE INDEPENDENT PAINT REPRESENTATIVE FROM PPG COATINGS

5.0 Notes
      5.1 Thinner supplied by the operator are for viscosity control of the
          paint only. Contractor shall supply all other necessary thinners
          and solvents for clean up of equipment, personnel and work site.

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements
      6.1 All work to be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer
          and on-site coatings representative.
      6.2 The contractor’s paint foreman, Port Engineer, and Paint
          Representative shall arrange meetings on a daily basis to review
          surface preparations, coating applications, weather factors, etc.
          While the underwater hull painting is in progress, contractor shall
          be responsible for arrangements to ensure contract compliance.

7.0 Statement of work required - The contractor’s price quote shall be
    inclusive of all disposal costs associated with grit and paint removal
    associated with this work item.


3PSC                                                                  Page 222 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.1 Perform all work as delineated in enclosure 2.2.1 with the following
           exceptions/addendums:
           7.1.1   Assume that the entire underwater hull region (24,000 square
                   feet) as listed in paragraph 3.0 shall blasted to SSPC-SP-10
                   requirements or SPCC 12/ NACE 5 WJ-2 High- and Ultrahigh-
                   Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating, using a 35,000psi
                   minimum pressure.
                   7.1.1.1 Do not blast to near white in way of the capastic
                           paint surrounding the cathodic protection anodes.
                           Allow for a 12 ft radius to be swept to tightly
                           adhered paint.
             7.1.2 Two full coats of epoxy shall be applied in way of blasted
                   areas.
             7.1.3 Two full coats of anti-fouling paint shall be applied over
                   epoxy coating.
             7.1.4 All Zinc anodes that are scheduled for replacement
                   (work item listed elsewhere in this specification)
                   shall be removed prior to blasting of the underwater
                   hull region and installed after all painting is
                   completed.
             7.1.5 Underwater hull blasting shall not commence until the
                   bubble sweep fences and bilge keels (separate item
                   listed elsewhere in this specification) are removed in
                   their entirety.

       7.2 Bowthruster and bowthruster recess, seachest strainer plates,
           scupper guards, & transducer tubes.
           7.2.1   Immediately after docking, temporarily remove all seachest
                   gratings & the overboard downspouts and convey to the blast
                   shop.
           7.2.2   Machine shop blast to SPCC-SP-10 (near white metal) all items
                   both interior and exterior. Allow the Coatings
                   Representative to inspect upon completion.
           7.2.3   Using airless sprayers, apply 2 full coats of epoxy at 5 mils
                   DFT, and 2 coats of anti-fouling paint at 5 mils DFT in
                   accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. First coat of
                   each shall be black, followed by red.
           7.2.4   Reinstall seachest strainer covers using new CRES 316
                   fasteners that are tab-locked in place.

       7.3 From the keel to the light load line, each coat of antifouling shall
           be alternately red and black. From the light load line to the deep
           load line, all coats shall be black.

       7.4 All hull designation markings are to be installed using Amercoat
           5450 White.

       7.5 There shall be 24-hour lapse between the final coating application
           and undocking. NO EXCEPTIONS. In other words, the ship shall
           remain on dock 24 hours after the final coat of AF is applied to
           ensure proper curing is achieved.


8.0 General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 223 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



STANDARD ITEM NO. 90, REVISED 15 SEPTEMBER 2003

UNDERWATER HULL RECOAT, 5 YEAR ABLATIVE SYSTEM


NOTE: THIS ITEM IS TO BE USED WHEN THE ANTIFOULING SYSTEM IS GENERALLY
FAILED AND THE CONDITION OF THE EPOXY ANTICORROSIVE DOES NOT WARRANT TAKING
THE ENTIRE UNDERWATER HULL DOWN TO BARE METAL.

NOTE: MSC reserves the right to require/perform such additional tests or
inspections as may be necessary to ensure compliance with this item
including, but not limited to, Blotter Test, Vial Test, Ph Tests and Sieve
Test.

1. ALL AREAS OF THE UNDERWATER HULL SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN A WET CONDITION
UNTIL THE HIGH PRESSURE WATER WASHING HAS BEEN ACCOMPLISHED.

2. Provide and erect all necessary staging and/or provide suitable
alternative means (scissor lift, man-lifts, etcetera) required for proper
working conditions and inspection.

3. Immediately upon drydocking the entire hull from the keel to six inches
above the Deep Load Line including, but not limited, to appendages such as
seachests, strainer plates, thruster tunnel(s), bilge keels, struts and
rudder(s) shall be HP fresh water washed to remove slime, grass, barnacles,
and salts. Equipment utilized shall maintain a discharge pressure of 7,500
to 8,500 psi at a flow rate of 10 to 15 GPM. 20o to 30o angle nozzles held
12 to 18 inches from the surface being blasted shall be utilized. In
conjunction with the HP water washing accomplish the requirements of SSPC-
The Society for Protective Coatings (formerly Steel Structures Painting
Council) SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning, using a biodegradable detergent to
remove residues of oil or grease that may be present. Upon completion of all
water washing chloride testing shall be performed at random locations. If
contamination is found, additional tests shall be made as necessary to
determine the extent of contamination and to prove the success of
remediation. The maximum allowable contamination concentrations shall be
less than 10 ug/cm2 of chloride contaminants as determined by field or
laboratory analysis using reliable, reproducible test equipment.

4. Provide and maintain adequate lighting of a suitable nature during the
course of all water washing, blasting, coating and inspection activities.

5. Remove all interferences as found necessary to accomplish this work item.
Upon completion of work re-install all interferences.

6. An Inspection Team composed of the Port Engineer, the Paint
Manufacturer's Representative and the Contractor's Representative shall make
a joint inspection of the underwater hull to identify areas of bare metal,
blistered, cracked, peeling or otherwise deteriorated paint. Areas thus
identified shall be spot abrasive blasted in accordance with Surface
Preparation Standard SSPC-SP10/NACE 2, Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. The
blast profile achieved shall be angular in nature and within the range set by
the manufacturer’s product data sheet for the coating system being applied.
Profile shall be determined using a Keane-Tator (or equal) Surface Profile
Comparator. Testex (or equal) Replica Tape shall be used at a rate of one
(1) reading per 2,000 SF for verification. Replica Tape shall be mounted,
identified as to location, and included as part of the final paint report.


3PSC                                                            Page 224 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



A. The remainder of the underwater hull shall be sand-swept to remove all
antifouling paint and to create an anchor pattern on the surface of the
intact anticorrosive paint. The use of a fine grit abrasive and/or reduced
air pressure to the blasting equipment is recommended. DO NOT BLOW THROUGH
TO BARE METAL. In the event that areas to be sand-swept are taken down to
bare metal in spots, those areas shall be spot blasted to near white metal,
feathered in and spot coated with epoxy to restore the system integrity at no
additional cost to the government.

B. Prior to the start of abrasive blasting the blast media shall be tested
to ensure that it is not contaminated with chlorides, as determined by field
or laboratory analysis using reliable, reproducible test equipment.

7. With the Port Engineer’s approval, areas to be spot blasted may be
prepared using ultra high pressure water jetting in lieu of abrasive blasting
at no additional cost to the Government. If allowed, water jetting shall be
performed in accordance with Surface Preparation Standard SSPC-SP12/NACE 5.
All blasted areas shall be prepared to a WJ-, SC-2 Condition. No more than a
light (L) grade flash rust shall be allowed on the steel at the time of
coating application. If heavier flash rust is present, the surface shall be
pressure washed at 2,500 to 3,000 psi and allowed to dry to restore the
surface to a coatable condition.

A. The remainder of the underwater hull shall be water jetted to remove the
existing AF paint down to an intact epoxy surface.

8. Prior to initiating surface preparation the contractor shall ensure that
the vessel's equipment is protected from damage caused by blasting abrasive,
dust or paint. Measures to be taken include, but are not limited to, the
following:

A.   Plug open ends of pipes, including sea connections, vents and ducts.

B. Install protective covering on all impressed current anodes, reference
cells, sacrificial anodes, transducers, propeller(s), exposed shafting and
bow thruster propeller(s).

C. Grease and wrap all valve stems and exposed portions of hydraulic
cylinders. Install filters on all air intake vents. Install stack covers on
the main and auxiliary uptakes. Install covers on all fuel tank vents.

D. In the areas to be abrasive blasted and/or coated, record all ship's
markings, including information, size and color.

E. Overboard discharges for services which cannot be curtailed, such as
reefer cooling water overboard, shall be carried-off by means of temporary
scuppers, hoses, etcetera, in order to prevent recontamination of the hull
after surface preparation.

F. Protective covering shall be inspected at regular intervals but not less
than at the start of each work shift. Degraded protective covering shall be
repaired prior to the restart of work. Contamination of the vessel and its
equipment shall be reported to the PORT ENGINEER verbally, immediately upon
its discovery, followed by a written report within four (4) hours of the
verbal notification. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning the
contaminated equipment and showing that the contamination has not caused




3PSC                                                             Page 225 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



damage to same. Cost to repair equipment damaged by such contamination shall
be borne by the Contractor.

9. Paint material shall be stored within the paint manufacturer's
recommended temperature range. When paint material is being applied, ensure
that the material's temperature is within the manufacturer's recommended
range for application but in any case not less than 70o F.

10.    Ensure the following conditions are met prior to painting:

A. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free of oil, grease or residue from
abrasive blasting.

B.    The edges of bare metal areas shall be feathered-in.

C. The surface appearance of the prepared surface shall meet the definition
established by the cited surface preparation standard(s).

D. Air and substrate temperatures shall be within the range published by the
paint manufacturer.

E. The ambient air and substrate temperatures must register at least 5o F.
above the dewpoint temperature.

F. The relative humidity is within the range set by the manufacturer’s
product data sheet. In the event that there is no range established by the
manufacturer, the relative humidity shall be no higher than 85 percent.

G. No coating shall be applied at temperatures below 35o F. without prior
written approval of the PORT ENGINEER.

H.   Painting shall not be performed between the hours of sunset and 0800
without prior written approval of the PORT ENGINEER.

I. Any overspray shall have been removed prior to the application of the
next coat of paint in the system.

J. Surface profile is within the range recommended by the coating
manufacturer.

K. Material Safety Data Sheets for the product(s) being applied are on the
job site and have been reviewed by the personnel involved.

11. Prior to application of any coating, the area to be painted shall be
inspected and approved by the PORT ENGINEER and the Paint Representative.
Inspection shall include surface preparation including cleanliness, and
surface profile as determined by Keane-Tator Comparator (or equal)
examination and/or replica tape, DFT readings of prior coats, etcetera, as
applicable depending upon the current stage of coating application. This
inspection includes not only the initial coat of paint, but all subsequent
coats as well.

A. Regardless whether the surfaces are abrasive blasted or UHP Water Jetted,
immediately prior to coating the surface shall be re-tested for non-visual
surface contaminates at random locations to ensure that re-contamination has
not occurred. If contamination is found, additional tests shall be made as
necessary to determine the extent of contamination and to prove the success


3PSC                                                              Page 226 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



of remediation. Results of this testing shall be presented to the PORT
ENGINEER at time of inspection for coating application.

1. If surface preparation is performed using abrasive blasting the maximum
allowable contamination concentrations shall be less than 10 ug/cm2 of
chloride contaminants as determined by field or laboratory analysis using
reliable, reproducible test equipment.

2. If UHP Water Jetting is utilized for surface preparation the limits
established by SC-2 shall be met.

B. DFT readings of the prior coat of paint shall be presented to the MSC
Port Engineer at the time of inspection for coating. Spot readings shall be
taken at a rate of five per 1,000 square feet. DFT gages shall be
calibrated, spot readings shall be taken and DFT tolerances shall be in
accordance with SSPC-PA2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness With Magnetic
Gages.

12. All coatings shall be MSC approved in accordance with COMSCINST 4750.2,
Preservation Instructions for MSC Ship, Latest Revision, Enclosure 1,
Underwater Hull. Dry film thickness for each coat of paint shall be within
the range listed in Enclosure 1.


13. Bare metal areas shall be spot coated with one coat of epoxy
anticorrosive.

14. After the spot coat has cured, apply one (1) full coat of epoxy to the
entire hull, from the keel to the deep load line.

15. When the full coat of epoxy is tacky, as determined by the paint
representative, apply three (3) full coats of ablative antifouling to the
under water hull from the keel to the deep load line. From the keel to the
light load line, coats shall be of alternate colors: red, black and red.
From the light load line to the deep load line, all coats shall be black.

NOTE: All coatings shall be allowed to air dry. Time to recoat shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as published in the
product data sheet.

16. Cut in the light load line and deep load line. Restore all hull
markings (draft marks, plimsol marks, bulkhead markings, load line grids,
etcetera). Remove all protective coverings and re-install all interferences.

17. The total square footage of the underwater hull, the square footage to
be spot blasted, the paint system to be utilized and provisions for the
manufacturer's representative shall be as set forth in the basic
specification.

18. The contractor shall prepare a paint report and submit same to the PORT
ENGINEER within three (3) days of completing the coating application. The
report shall include the following data:

A.   The date, time and location of each coating application.

B. The air and substrate temperatures, relative humidity and dewpoint
temperature at the time of each coating application.


3PSC                                                             Page 227 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




C. Dry film thickness readings at a rate of ten (10) spot readings per 1000
sq. ft. of coated surface for each coat of paint. DFT gages shall be
calibrated, spot readings shall be taken and tolerances for coating thickness
shall be in accordance with SSPC-PA2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness
With Magnetic Gages.

D. The Manufacturer, Product Identification Number and Batch Numbers for
each coat of paint applied.

E. Surface profile measurements of the abrasive blast cleaned metal
substrate.

F.   Results of testing for non-visible surface contamination (soluble salts).

19. Upon completion of all work the vessel shall be cleaned of all residues
resulting from the surface preparation and coating application.

20. All debris generated in the performance of this item, whether solid or
liquid, shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable Federal, State and
Local regulations.

21. Surface preparation and coating of Impressed Current Anode Shields, if
applicable, shall be the subject of a separate item.




3PSC                                                             Page 228 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 903   Stern Thruster Upper and Lower Gear Box Service (ABS)

1.0    Abstract
       The stern thrusters are due for inspection and service in accordance
       with OEM and ABS requirements.

2.0    References/Enclosures
       2.1   The Technical Manual for the Stern Thrusters is onboard the ship
             and available for reference.
       2.2   The required repair parts to perform this service are listed in
             the attached enclosure.
       2.3   Photo of Z-drives lower gear box

3.0    Location/Description/Quantity:
       3.1   Description:
             Ship Class: T-AGS 60 Pathfinder Class
             Component: Upper Gearbox Type 2500, Drawing 3001371
             Thruster Model: FS2510-463/2500 BO
             Installation #:
             Pathfinder T07208/09
             Sumner       T07211/12
             Bowditch     T07221/22
             Henson       T07308/09
             Heezen       T07374/75
             Mary Sears T07475/76
       3.2   Quantity: 2 each stern thrusters per ship.

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services
       4.1 3PSC shall furnish the services of a Wartsila Service Representative
            to participate as well as oversee the maintenance accomplished by
            the shipyard workers.

       4.2 Other Government Furnished   Equipment
        DESCRIPTION P/N                 QUANTITY            UNIT OF ISSUE
        Spare parts See enclosure       N/a                 N/a
                    2.2
        Gear oil    Shell Omala 150     900 gallons         Per thruster
        Hydraulic   Shell Tellus T-     300 gallons         Per thruster
        oil         46


5.0    Notes: None Additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       All work shall be subject to the review and approval of the Port
       Engineer and attending Wartsila Representative.

7.0    Statement of Work:
       7.1   Exact and detailed instructions, supervision and oversight into
             the procedures and requirements will be given onsite by the
             Wärtsilä Service Engineer and the Port Engineer.
       7.2   The shipyard shall furnish 2 mechanics (one Lead Mechanic) and
             One Assistant Mechanic to work with the Wartsila Representative 7
             days per week, 12 hours per day for 30 days. The mechanics shall



3PSC                                                               Page 229 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



             furnish standard tools and equipment to perform these
             inspections/repairs as well as micrometers, torque wrenches,
             cleaners, dye penetrants (set) lint free rags, etc…
       7.3   All other work requirements in terms of crane services, rigging
             services, pipe fitting, and forwarding of all Government
             Furnished Equipment shall be under the direction of the Wartsila
             Representative and Port Engineer. The Wartsila Representative
             shall advise both the shipyard and Port Engineer of the required
             services for the NEXT day at the end of each work day.
       7.4   Floating Shafts and Seals
             7.4.1 Temporarily remove safety cage from around Floating Shaft.
             7.4.2 Disassemble and remove the floating shafts, Pc 61 of
                   Drawing 3001108, between the Propulsion Motors and the
                   Upper Gearboxes. The Wärtsilä Service Engineer shall
                   inspect each floating shaft and coupling.
             7.4.3 Clean and inspect each spline shaft for wear.
             7.4.4 Upon completion of the Upper Gearbox Inspection, reassemble
                   the Floating Shafts using the new V-Seals.
             7.4.5 Refill each floating shaft with synthetic grease.
             7.4.6 After reinstalling floating Shaft, reinstall safety cage.

       7.5   Upper Gearbox Inspection – Port and Starboard Thrusters
             7.5.1   Drain/ Pump out oil from the Upper Gearbox.
             7.5.2   Drain oil from Stem to expose slewing gear for inspection.
             7.5.3   Remove hydraulic piping to facilitate removal of two (2)
                     Steering Gear Motors. Consult Wärtsilä Service Engineer to
                     determine which motors shall be removed.
             7.5.4   Remove one Steering Motor and Gearbox assembly and one
                     Steering Motor (without gearbox) to facilitate slewing
                     gear inspection
             7.5.5   Remove inspection covers from Upper Gearbox.
             7.5.6   Wärtsilä Service Engineer shall perform Upper Gearbox
                     visual inspection and a Gear Contact Pattern inspection
                     using Hi-Spot Red (or equivalent). Contact pattern
                     impressions shall be photographed and lifted (if
                     possible). Compare with contact patterns from previous
                     inspections.
                     7.5.6.1    The Port Engineer shall be notified 24 hours
                                prior to performing these tests in order to
                                arrange for ABS Surveyor attendance to achieve
                                continuous machinery credit.
             7.5.7   Check backlash at diameter stamped on crown wheel with
                     gear unloaded.
             7.5.8   Wärtsilä Service Engineer shall conduct 360º visual
                     inspection of slewing gear teeth.
             7.5.9   Reinstall Steering Motors, hydraulic piping and
                     inspections covers and refill Upper Gearbox and Stem with
                     oil.
             7.5.10 Change oil in the 8 each planetary gear boxes. Note: Each
                     drain plug and vent plug shall be removed to ensure that
                     each planetary gear box is filled!

             7.5.11 Starboard Upper Gearbox Overhaul
                   7.5.11.1 Temporarily disconnect and remove the upper gear
                            box assembly from the foundation plate and rig
                            from the ship via the access opening made in way




3PSC                                                             Page 230 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                             of the port main propulsion motor to the machine
                             shop.
                   7.5.11.2 Machine shop shall be a closed environment,
                             climate controlled to perform these repairs.
                   7.5.11.3 Disassemble the upper gearbox in its entirety and
                             replace the bearings, seals, o-rings using
                             Government furnished spares. See enclosure 2.2
                             for details.
                   7.5.11.4 Reassemble the unit and return to the ship and
                             reinstall.
                   7.5.11.5 Tighten/torque all tiedown bolts and restore all
                             piping to original configuration.
       7.6   Thrust Blocks: 8 each spring stacks per thruster
             7.6.1   Temporarily remove the Thrust Block Covers. The Wärtsilä
                     Service Engineer shall inspect thrust block and adjust as
                     necessary.
             7.6.2   Coat springs with grease.
             7.6.3   Reinstall cover using all planned replacement material
                     provided.
       7.7   Lube Oil and Hydraulic Systems
             7.7.1 Inspect and clean all magnets on hydraulic and gear oil
                   filters. Allow the Port Engineer to inspect the “as found”
                   condition of each magnet strainer prior to cleaning.

       7.8   Lower Gear Box Inspection – Port and Starboard Thrusters
             7.8.1   The shipyard shall furnish oil catch basins to collect the
                     900 gallons of gear oil found in each of the stem and
                     lower gear box sections.
                     7.8.1.1    The shipyard shall dispose of recovered oil in
                                accordance with environmental rules and
                                regulations.

             7.8.2   The shipyard shall furnish staging around each lower gear
                     box to facilitate access to the lower gear box while on
                     dock. NOTE: Keel block height is appx. 2.2 meters.
             7.8.3   Temporarily remove bottom cover and drain plug and allow
                     each thrusters to drain of oil.
             7.8.4   Temporarily remove the inspection cover and inspect the
                     lower gears.
             7.8.5   The Wärtsilä Service Engineer shall perform Upper Gearbox
                     visual inspection and a Gear Contact Pattern inspection
                     using Hi-Spot Red (or equivalent). Contact pattern
                     impressions shall be photographed and lifted (if
                     possible). Compare with contact patterns from previous
                     inspections.
                     7.8.5.1    The Port Engineer shall be notified 24 hours
                                prior to performing these tests in order to
                                arrange for ABS Surveyor attendance to achieve
                                continuous machinery credit.
             7.8.6   Check backlash at diameter stamped on crown wheel with
                     gear unloaded.
             7.8.7   At the completion of testing, reassemble the lower gear
                     box using Wartsila furnished spares (encl 2.2) and
                     replenish oil as required utilizing ship furnished oil and
                     shipyard labor assistance.

       7.9   Propeller Shaft seal Assembly


3PSC                                                             Page 231 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              7.9.1   The shipyard shall temporarily remove the stern thruster
                      propellers and perform work as delineated elsewhere in
                      these specifications to clean and inspect each propeller.
              7.9.2   Renew propeller seal and propeller shaft seal assembly
                      using GOVERNMENT FURNISHED SPARES.
              7.9.3   Upon completion, reinstall propellers in proper alignment
                      using new stainless fasteners and monel lock wire.

       7.10   Reports:
              7.10.1      Wärtsilä shall deliver a report documenting all work
                          completed, conditions found and any recommendations
                          for future repair or maintenance actions. The report
                          shall include, at a minimum, the following:
                         Inspections performed
                         Inspection Results
                         Required Repairs
                         Parts Replaced (incl Part Number and Qty)
                         Operational Tests Accomplished
                         Comparison of Test Results & Design Specifications

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 232 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




       Enclosure 2.2 – Wartsila Parts Required For Stern Thruster Examination

                     STERN THRUSTERS:
T07208/09           MODEL FS2510-463
DRAWING
REFERENCE           3001371             Upper Gear Box
ITEM                DESCRIPTION         PARTNUMBER             QTY        UNIT PRICE
27                  LINER               T001019941             2
59                  O-RING              W007001069             2
61                  O-RING              W007000977             2
64                  O-RING              W007000712             2
68                  OIL SEAL            T001010605             2
DRAWING
REFERENCE:          3001612             Floating Shaft Assy
ITEM                DESCRIPTION         PARTNUMBER             QTY        UNIT PRICE
2/12 T003000914     SEAL, V-SHAPE       W5711                  4
2/9                 Nuts                Din. 982               24
DRAWING                                                                   AZIMUTH
REFERENCE:          2010530             Azimuth Feedback                  FEEDBACK
ITEM                DESCRIPTION         PARTNUMBER             QTY        UNIT PRICE
13                  O-RING              W007001004             2
DRAWING REFERENCE: 3001660              Lower Gear Box
ITEM              DESCRIPTION           PARTNUMBER             QTY        UNIT PRICE
71                O-RING                W007031011             2
72                BONDED SEAL           W006580044             2
96                PLUG                  W006552115             2
DRAWING REFERENCE: 1017990              Propeller Assembly
ITEM              DESCRIPTION           PARTNUMBER             QTY        UNIT PRICE
                  LABYRINTH
5                 PACKING               T001016069             2
9                 O-RING                W007000575             2
11                BOLT                  W007110143             24
12                BOLT                  W007100387             24
14                COPPER RING           T003002527             6
15                WASHER                W007375026             24
16                O-RING                W007000909             2
DRAWING REFERENCE: 2016973              Propeller Shaft Seal
ITEM              DESCRIPTION           PARTNUMBER             QTY        UNIT PRICE
6                 SEAL RING             330MK2                 6
7                 O’ Ring                                      2
10                Lock Wire                                    2
12                Sheet Packing                                2
14                Spring Washer                                24
17                Plug w/washer                                12
22                P-Ring w/Spring                              2
24                Toothed Washer                               28




3PSC                                                                 Page 233 of 280
                                                 4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Enclosure 2.2:      Parts List for the Starboard UGB Overhaul

Partlistnumber   Description          Drawing number
 T023001371         UGB                   3001371

       Item      Partnumber            Description               Quantity      Type           Drawingnr
         19      T003000542            Locking nut                  1         KMTA 38
         34      T003001361           Ring,adjusting                1        2500 UGB         3001990
         35      T001019851           Ring,adjusting                1           2500          3001990
         40      T001010581                  Key                    1        2500 BWH         1010581
         44      T001003859                Spring                   4         Drukveer
         49      T002050762    Hexagon,socket,set,screw with        1                         2050762
                                Double row spherical roller
       51        W006210906               bearing                   1          22334 C
                                Double row spherical roller                     22238
       52        W006210001               bearing                   1          CC/W33
                                Double row spherical roller
       53        W006200201               bearing                   1         22324 CC
       54        W006260033    Spherical roller thrust bearing      1        29430 E N1
       57        W007001277                O-ring                   2
       58        W007035511                O-ring                   2
       60        W007001062                O-ring                   1
       63        W007035270                O-ring                   2
       64        W007000712                O-ring                   1
                 W007030000
       66        W084813333               O-ring                    1
       67        W007001423    Cord ring with vulcanized join       1
                 T001055007
       69        W007065070               Oil seal                  2             R
       70                                   seal
       75        M713000532           Hexagon screw                18
       76        M712045389     Hex. socket head cap screw         24
       79        M712040383     Hex. socket head cap screw          6
       81        M711050488      Stud. screw length 1,25 d         20
       83        M711050387      Stud. screw length 1,25 d          6
       85        M714040041            Hexagon nut                 25
       86        M714040036            Hexagon nut                  6
       89        M716100033      Single coil spring washer         30
       90        M716100036      Single coil spring washer         48
       91        M716100041      Single coil spring washer         27




3PSC                                                                        Page 234 of 280
                                      4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



     Enclosure 2.2 (continued)
     Additional parts for Starboard lower gear box due to possible water
     intrusion and liner damage. HEEZEN docking 2010
                                                          PROPELLER
DRAWING REFERENCE                          2016973        SHAFT SEAL
ITEM         DESCRIPTION                   PARTNUMBER QTY UNIT PRICE
             Liner, Chrome steel ceramic
1            coated                                   1
7            Seal Ring, Viton with spring             2
             Seal Ring, Viton, with coated
13           spring                                   1
             Plug, x 5 CrNi 18 10/SUS
14           304, BSP 1/8”                            6
19           O-ring, Nitrile Rubber        ID 445 x 4 1
20           Washer, Copper for BSP 1/8”              6
28           Sheet Packing, non-asbestos              1


       Enclosure 2.2 (continued)
       Additional parts for Starboard upper gear box due to possible water
       intrusion and liner damage. HEEZEN docking 2010




3PSC                                                          Page 235 of 280
                  4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Enclosure 2.2.3




3PSC                                      Page 236 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 904   Renew Bowthruster Shaft Seals & Inspect Lower Gearbox

1.0    Abstract
       Replace the shaft seals and o-rings on the bowthruster.

2.0    References/enclosures
       2.1   References
             2.1.1 Technical manual T-AGS 60CL-033 titled: Thruster, Bow is
                   onboard the vessel and available for use.

       2.2 Enclosures: Parts List

3.0    Item location/description
       3.1 Location:     bowthruster
       3.2 Description: MFR: LIPS Drunnen
                         model: FS500-234MNR

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment
      4.1 3PSC shall furnish the services of a qualified thruster service
          representative to supervise the maintenance accomplished by the
          shipyard workers.
      4.2 3PSC shall provide all materials to accomplish this work item as
          shown below
      4.3 200 Gallons of SHELL Tellus T-46 oil for the gear oil change.

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality assurance requirements
      6.1 All inspections shall be made available to the Wartsila
          Representative and ABS Surveyor.

7.0 Statement of Work Required
      7.1   Exact and detailed instructions, supervision and oversight into
            the procedures and requirements will be given onsite by the
            Wärtsilä Service Engineer and the Port Engineer.
      7.1   The shipyard shall furnish 2 mechanics (one Lead Mechanic) and
            One Assistant Mechanic to work with the Wartsila Representative 7
            days per week, 12 hours per day. The mechanics shall furnish
            standard tools and equipment to perform these inspections/repairs
            as well as micrometers, torque wrenches, cleaners, dye penetrants
            (set) lint free rags, etc…
      7.3   All other work requirements in terms of crane services, rigging
            services, pipe fitting, and forwarding of all government
            furnished equipment shall be under the direction of the Wartsila
            Representative and Port Engineer. The Wartsila Representative
            shall advise both the shipyard and Port Engineer of the required
            services for the NEXT day at the end of each work day.
      7.4   Drain all gear oil from the bowthruster and dispose of in
            accordance with all local environmental laws. Renew all in-line
            filters.
      7.5   Disconnect and remove the bowthruster propeller.
      7.6   Inspect the lower gear box assembly. Verify gear tooth contact
            pattern using prussian blue. Allow for the 3PSC Port Engineer and
            abs surveyor to witness test results. Furnish a picture copy of
            results to the Port Engineer.



3PSC                                                             Page 237 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.4   Replace all parts listed in enclosure 2.2.2 with GFE Spares.
       7.5   Upon completion of repairs, reassemble unit and reinstall
             propeller.
       7.6   Refill gear oil with shell oil provided by chief engineer.

8.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: NONE ADDITIONAL




3PSC                                                             Page 238 of 280
                                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Enclosure 2.2.1 – Bowthruster Spares
  Drwg.           Unit        Item Qty.      Part no.          Description    Unit Price       Total        Total
                                                                                            Price(NLG)   Price(US$)
3001652     Bowthruster       13   9      T002005796    Gland Packing         372          3348        1455
2014166     Bowthruster       36   1      W007385035    Copper ring           4            4           1.75
2014166     Bowthruster       37   1      W006552115    Plug                  65           65          29
2014166     Bowthruster       43   1      W007001022    O-ring                4            4           1.75
2014282     Bowthruster       5    1      W007000627    O-ring                13           13          6
2014282     Bowthruster       9    8      M713001482    Bolt                  4            32          14
2914282     Bowthruster       10   3      T003002527    Copper Ring           25           75          33
3000557     Bowthruster       7    2      190MK2        Seal ring             1706         3412        1485
3000557     Bowthruster       12   8                    Spring Washer         4            32          14
3000557     Bowthruster       13   1      190MK2        Seal ring             1706         1706        742
3000557     Bowthruster       14   6                    Plug                  324          1944        846
3000557     Bowthruster       19   1                    O-ring                18           18          8
3000557     Bowthruster       20   6                    Washer                6            36          16
3000557     Bowthruster       21   4                    Locking Wire          15           60          26
3000557     Bowthruster       22   1      190MK2        Sheet packing         31           31          14
3000557     Bowthruster       28   1      190MK2        Sheet packing         20           20          9
3001602     Bowthruster       2    10     W007100387    Bolt                  7            70          31
3001602     Bowthruster       3    4      M713001524    Bolt                  40           160         70
3001602     Bowthruster       4    4      M716600036    Dubo retaining ring   4            16          7
3001602     Bowthruster       7    4      W007110141    Bolt                  11           44          19
3001602     Bowthruster       8    2      M713001524    Bolt                  40           80          35
3001602     Bowthruster       9    2      M716600036    Dubo retaining ring   4            8           4
3001602     Bowthruster       14   3      W007550008    Locking wire          37           111         48
3001602     Bowthruster       15   8      W007100411    Bolt                  4            32          14
3001602     Bowthruster       18   1      W007001205    O-ring                4            4           2




3PSC                                                                                 Page 239 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




 Item No. 905    Service SPURS Linecutters

1.0 Abstract
    Service the line cutters on stern thruster propellers and bowthruster.

2.0 Reference/Enclosure:     None

3.0 Item Location/Description
    3.1   Location:
          3.1.1 Port and starboard stern thrusters (2 units)
          3.1.2 Bowthruster (1 unit)

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment/material/services
    4.1   3PSC shall furnish the services of the SPURS Engineer.
          SPURS Linecutters
          201 SW 33rd street
          Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33315
          Tel: (954) 463-2707
          POC: Don Govan
             WWW.SPURSMARINE.COM

       4.2   3PSC shall furnish refurbished line cutters.

5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements
    All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer and
    SPURS representative.

7.0 Statement of Work Required
    7.1   Erect staging in way of port and starboard stern thruster propellers
          to allow for personnel access on all sides of the thruster and
          propeller hub.   Provide 2 machinists to assist the SPURS
          technician.

       7.2   Take and record the SPURS blade clearances for all three rope
             cutters. Disconnect & remove the spurs assemblies and provide a
             wooden crate for the cutters to be shipped overseas.
               7.2.1 The contractor shall box up and ship to the address listed in
                     paragraph 3.0. Provide the Port Engineer with the Airway
                     Bill Number and tracking information.

       7.4   Under the guidance of the SPURS representative, take delivery of GFE
             linecutters and install. Take and record clearance readings and
             verify proper alignment. Adjust clearance as required.
               7.4.1 Provide two machinists to assist in reinstalling, measuring,
                     and recording of clearances.

       7.5   Tests/Inspections/Reports/deliverables
               7.5.1 Inspection – prior to removal of the original cutters, take
                     and record clearance readings between the SPURS cutter and
                     propeller hub by rotating the unit.




3PSC                                                                 Page 240 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



            7.5.2 Inspection – After installing overhauled line cutters, take
                  and record clearance readings between the SPURS cutter and
                  propeller hubs by rotating the unit.
            7.5.3 Report – Furnish a report showing the clearance readings
                  before and after repairs for all 3 propellers.

8.0 General Requirements:   None additional




3PSC                                                             Page 241 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 906 Seawater Piping Cleaning, Strainer Refurbishment and Overhaul
Of Isolation Valves (HZV09045)

1.0    Abstract
       Main engine sea water strainers require preservation.

2.0    References/enclosures
       2.1 Enclosures: MSC Standard Item No.60, “Repairing Miscellaneous valves”

3.0    Item   location/description
       3.1    Location:     Generator Room (3-80-0)
       3.2    Description: Raw Water Strainer, simplex (Qty: 2)
       3.3    Description: 14” butterfly valves (Qty: 2)
       3.4    Description: Cross-over piping measuring 50’ length and 14” Inside
              diameter.

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment
       4.1 Amercoat 240 Terracotta Red – 2 gallons

5.0    Notes: None additional

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer.

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1 Disconnect the seawater strainer and outlet valve and convey to
            shop. Blank all open pipe ends using flanges that are bolted in
            place in way of where valves and strainers were installed.

       7.2 Seawater Strainer Refurbishment
           7.2.1 Completely disassemble each strainer assembly.
           7.2.2 Freshwater wash the internals and externals prior to blasting.
                 Machine shop blast internal housing to SSPC-SP-10 (near white
                 metal) specifications. After blasting, freshwater soak the
                 internals for 24 hours to draw out chlorides. Rinse with
                 freshwater and allow to dry.
           7.2.3 Machine shop blast to SSPC-SP-10 (or S/A 2.5) the internals of
                 the strainer and cover AGAIN. Backing bars and keepers shall
                 be blast swept to SSPC-SP-6 (S/A 2).
           7.2.4 Repair the strainer cover in way of where backing bar secures
                 in place by welding with parent metal (steel) by raising the
                 2” square area up by 1/8”. Machine grind flat and smooth as
                 per original.
           7.2.5 Apply two coats of Apexior No. 3 paint to interior housing and
                 underside of strainer cover at 10 mils DFT.
           7.2.6 Paint exterior of strainer body, cover, and backing bars with
                 2 coats of Amercoat 240 Terracotta Red at 5 mils DFT.
           7.2.7 Disassemble and clean vent and drain piping and valves.
           7.2.8 Renew all zinc anodes.
           7.2.9 Reassemble strainers using new gaskets AND STAINLESS HARDWARE.

       7.3 Crossover Piping Cleaning & Bilge Cleaning




3PSC                                                                Page 242 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



           7.3.1 Temporarily remove valves stemming from cross over main pipe
                 for each EMD engine and cross over to the ASW piping system to
                 AFT AMR. Blank all open ends of piping.
           7.3.2 Blast to bare metal the 14” piping between the port and
                 starboard seachests.   Freshwater wash and rinse to remove
                 salts and grit debris. Allow the port engineer to inspect.
           7.3.3 Option aside from grit blasting is to provide closed loop and
                 clean using Saf-Acid or other cleaning compound to remove
                 barnacle growth.
           7.3.4 Apply two each coats of Apexior #3 at 10 mils DFT.
           7.3.5 Clean the 4” crossover pipe that extends from the forward sea
                 chest to the after sea chest by means of water blasting. Total
                 linear pipe run is approximately forty (40) ft.
           7.3.6 All marine growth and wastewater collected as a result of this
                 item shall be disposed of by the contractor.
           7.3.7 At the completion of this item, and other associated items
                 that involve working below the deck plates in the generator
                 room, the contractor shall freshwater rinse and clean the
                 entire bilge region of the generator room (appx. 1800sf).
                 Each bilge piping inlet cover shall be temporarily removed to
                 clean all dirt and debris generated as a result of this work
                 item.

       7.4 Outlet Valves Maintenance and Repair – 2 each
           7.4.1 Perform shop overhaul of outlet valve in accordance
                 with enclosure 2.1.1.
           7.4.2 Disassemble and overhaul the valve gearbox. This shall
                 include the disassembly and cleaning of all parts,
                 bearing and bushing renewal.
           7.4.3 Upon completion, reassemble internals and lubricate all parts
                 using Shell Alvania Grease.
           7.4.4 Reassemble gearbox casing and install using new gaskets and
                 fasteners. Adjust valve indicator as required and prove
                 proper operation to the Chief Engineer.

       7.5 During the undocking phase, the entire seawater system shall be
           tested for leaks and repair as required.

8.0 General requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 243 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Enclosure 2.1: Standard item no. 60, revised 2 April 1993 repairing
  miscellaneous valves

Disconnect valves, mark/label all valves removed to insure correct location
for reinstallation and convey to contractor's shop for repairs. Hard blank
all openings as a result of removals to prevent contamination. Work shall be
accomplished such that normal ship operations may be maintained.

Match mark valve parts for reassembly. Completely disassemble, clean and
examine all valve parts for defects in the presence of the msc rep. And
regulatory bodies. Submit a condition report to the msc rep. Listing all
parts requiring repair that are beyond the scope of this item and those that
require replacement, these items will subject of a change order.

Repair valves as follows:
Straighten stems to within 0.002 inch total indicator reading. Polish stem to
a 32 root-mean-square (rms) finish in way of packing surface and remove
raised edges and foreign matter. Chase and tap exposed threaded areas.
Dress and true gasket mating surfaces.
Machine, grind or lap and spot-in gate to seat or disc to seat to obtain a
360 degree continuous contact.
Verify contact using the blueing method. For gate valves transfer line shall
not exceed 3/16 inch in width and shall appear within the lower 75 percent of
the gate seating surface. For globe valves, transfer line shall not exceed
1/16 inch in width.
Reassemble valves installing new gaskets, fasteners and packing in accordance
with manufacturer's specifications.
Hydrostatically test valves at design test pressure and prove tight in the
presence of the msc rep. And regulatory bodies.
Test valve body with valve in the open position for 10 minutes. Allowable
leakage: none.
For globe valves test for seat tightness in the direction tending to open the
valve.
For gate valves test for seat tightness alternately on each side of the gate
with the opposite side open for inspection.

Tests shall be continued for a minimum of 3 minutes if there is no evidence
of leakage, or in the event of visible leakage, until an accurate
determination of leakage can be made. Maximum allowable leakage: 10 cubic
centimeters (cc) per hour, per inch of nominal pipe size. Valve sizes one
inch or less may be 10 cc maximum per hour.

Return valves to ship, remove all blanks and reinstall in respective original
locations with new gaskets and fasteners. Clean and refinish flanges as
required. Test and prove tight. Correct any deficiencies found. Restore
insulation and lagging as original.

Locations, types, sizes and quantities shall be set forth in the basic
specifications.




3PSC                                                            Page 244 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 907 Range, Measure, Paint Anchors & Chains
1.0 Abstract
           Clean, inspect and paint the port and starboard anchors, anchor
           chains and chain lockers.

2.0 References/Enclosures: None

3.0 Item Location/Description
      3.1 Locations:    Port and Starboard Chain Lockers (2-10-0) each
          measuring 800 sf
      3.2 Description: Two (2) anchors with 135 fathoms, 9 shots, of 1 15/16”
          anchor chain per anchor. Each anchor weighs 5,060 lbs

4.0 Operator furnished equipment/material/services

       Paint type          Color           Quantity
        Amercoat 240   Black           60 gallons
        Amercoat 240   Gray            60 gallons
        Amershield     Black           60 gallons
        Amershield     White           10 gallons
        Amershield     Yellow          10 gallons
        Amershield     Red             10 gallons
        Amershield     Blue            5 gallons


5.0 Notes: None Additional

6.0 Quality assurance requirements
      6.1 All work to be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer
          and Ameron coatings representative.


7.0 Statement of work required The Contractor’s price quote shall be inclusive
    of all disposal costs associated with grit and paint removal associated
    with this work item.
      ANCHORS AND CHAINS
      7.1 Remove the port and starboard anchors, swivel shots and anchor
           chains and convey to the sand blasting area. Free up the swivel
           shot and prove free rotation.
      7.2 Remove first shot of each chain to the last shot of chain, making
           the first shot the bitter end. Do not end-for-end chains.
      7.3 Commercial blast anchors, anchor chains and chain stoppers to SPCC-
           SP-6 requirements.
      7.4 Measure the average diameter of the links in the area where the
           links join, recording two measurements per link.   Measure a minimum
           of 3 links per shot,
           7.4.1   Mark any links measuring less than 1.7 inches (88% of 2.625).
                   Submit to the Port Engineer three copies of the report
                   containing the measurements of all links on each shot. number
                   of links measuring less than 1.70 inches.
      7.5 In the presence of the Port Engineer, the ABS Surveyor, conduct a
           visual inspection of the anchors, anchor chains and chain stoppers.
           Submit to the Port Engineer a written report of conditions found.




3PSC                                                             Page 245 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.6 Disassemble each of the detachable links. Inspect the components of
           each link. Reassemble each link.
       7.7 The new coating system shall be applied as specified in paragraph
           4.0. Paint anchors and anchor chains as follows:
             7.7.1 Entire length of each chain and both anchors shall be coated
                   using 2 coats of Amercoat 264 at 5 mils DFT (1st coat grey,
                   2nd coat black), and final coat of Amershield 990HS black.
                   NOTE: Except for the last two shots of chain, which will be
                   topcoated using Amershield 990HS yellow and Amershield 990HS
                   Red.
             7.7.2 Mark each shot of chain according to the procedure outlined
                   in paragraphs 7.7.3 through 7.7.5.
             7.7.3 15 fathom shot - Paint the detachable link red. Paint white
                   the first chain link on each side of the detachable link.
                   Install one (1) turn of galvanized wire, tightly winding the
                   wire around the studs of the chain link on each side of the
                   detachable link.
             7.7.4 30 fathom shot - Paint the detachable link white. Paint white
                   the first two chain links on each side of the detachable
                   link. Install two (2) turns of galvanized wire, tightly
                   winding the wire around the studs of the second chain link on
                   each side of the detachable link.
             7.7.5 45 fathom shot - Paint the detachable link blue. Paint white
                   the first three chain links on each side of the detachable
                   link. Install three (3) turns of galvanized wire, tightly
                   winding the wire around the studs of the third chain link on
                   each side of the detachable link.
             7.7.6 Paint additional shots of chain in the pattern outlined in
                   paragraphs 7.7.3 through 7.7.5.    Alternate the color schemes
                   of the detachable link, using the colors red, white and blue.
                   For each additional shot of chain, increase the number of
                   white links in each side of the detachable link by one. For
                   each additional shot of chain, increase the number of turns
                   of wire around the studs by one.
             7.7.7 The final coat to be applied to the second to last shot of
                   anchor chain shall be Amershield yellow.
             7.7.8 The final coat to be applied to the last shot of anchor chain
                   shall be Amershield red.

       CHAIN LOCKER INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
       7.8 The contractor shall employ the services of a certified marine
            chemist to conduct a gas free inspection of the chain locker. The
            chemist will be required to fill out a certificate asserting that
            the chain locker is gas free - safe for men. Recertify the chain
            locker daily while performing the work described in this
            specification. Provide the Port Engineer with daily copies of
            certificates.
              7.8.1 Temporarily remove the deck grating at the bottom of each
                    locker.
              7.8.2 Erect staging as necessary to allow for full inspection of
                    the chain lockers by the Port Engineer and ABS Surveyor.
              7.8.3 Mechanically scale chain spill pipes to SPCC-SP-11
                    specifications. Allow for 60 square feet of area to be
                    mechanically scaled.
              7.8.4 Rinse the chain lockers with clean, fresh water. Thoroughly
                    clean the chain lockers, chain pipes, and sumps free of all
                    dirt and mud. Remove all loose scale, rust and foreign


3PSC                                                              Page 246 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                   matter.    Clean all drains and prove them clear. Arrange
                   for the Port Engineer and the ABS Surveyor to inspect the
                   chain locker interior. Operate bilge pump or eductor,
                   assisted by ship’s force, to demonstrate good operation in
                   the presence of the Port Engineer and ABS Surveyor.
             7.8.5 After the cleaning and scaling in way of the spill pipes has
                   been accomplished and approved by the Port Engineer or his
                   Coatings Representative, perform a freshwater washdown of the
                   entire area and allow to dry.
             7.8.6 All bare steel areas shall be coated using 2 coats of
                   Amercoat 264 at 5 mils DFT. First coat shall be black,
                   followed by gray.

       7.9 Reinstall anchors, anchor chains and components using the ship's
           anchor windlass (no exceptions). Return anchors and anchor chains
           to vessel. Convey bitter end aboard and secure in chain locker
           according to ABS requirements. Restow the anchor chains and
           anchors. Leave the anchors in the housed position.

       7.10 Close up the chain lockers in good order, using new gaskets.

       7.11 Tests/Inspections/Reports/Deliverables
            7.11.1 Inspection – Surface Preparation of anchors, chains after
                    blasting to SSPC-SP-6 requirements and prior to painting
            7.11.2 Inspection – Inspection of chain lockers spill pipes after
                    preparing to SSPC-SP-11 requirements and prior to painting.
            7.11.3 Reports – Anchor Chain Thickness Readings
            7.11.4 Inspection – Detachable Link Inspection
            7.11.5 Inspection – Chain Locker Inspection After Cleaning
            7.11.6 Inspection – Chain Locker prior to close out and returning of
                    chains to confirm detachable link properly installed,
                    gratings reinstalled and secured and staging removed.

8.0 General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                              Page 247 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 908 Overhaul Sea Valves

1.0    Abstract
       Overhaul sea valves and overboard discharge valves.

2.0    References/enclosures
       2.1 enclosure:
             2.1.1 Sea Valve List
             2.1.2 MSC Standard Item No. 63, “Overhauling Sea Valves & Overboard
                   Discharge Valves”

3.0 Item Location/Description
      3.1 Location: as listed & described in enclosure 2.1.1
      3.2 Quantity: twenty nine (29) valves to be dealt with

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment: None

5.0    Notes
       5.1 The Doppler speed log valve (Valve #5) shall be worked in place.           Do
            not machine any surfaces.

6.0 Quality assurance requirements: All work shall be subject to the approval
    of the Port Engineer and ABS Surveyor

7.0    Statement of work required
       7.1 After drydocking of vessel, contractor shall temporarily remove all
            the suction and overboard sea valves listed in enclosure 2.1.1
            except for the Doppler Sea log valve (#5) which shall be worked in
            place.
       7.2 Inspect the removed sea valves for signs of wear and damage.
            Perform work as delineated in enclosure 2.1.2 with the following
            exceptions:
            7.2.1 All valves 2 inches in diameter or less (10 count) shall be
                   replaced with ABS approved new sea valves. New valves shall be
                   bronze bodied with stainless or bronze internals. No mild
                   steel components are allowed.
                     7.2.1.1 Old valves are to be listed on the scrap and salvage
                             report. The material sheets and class certifications
                             for the new valves shall be turned over to the port
                             engineer and chief engineer.
            7.2.2 Allow for modifying seawater piping and reach rod connections
                   in way of new sea valve installations.
            7.2.3 Install new valves using new gaskets and stainless steel
                   fasteners.

8.0 General Requirements: None additional




3PSC                                                               Page 248 of 280
                                               4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Enclosure 2.1.1               USNS BRUCE C. HEEZEN Sea Valve List
No     Location                Size & type      Function                        Remarks
1      4-15-0   Bowthruster       2” Gate       Uncontaminated Seawater         Inlet Valve
                                                Supply
2      4-15-0, Bowthruster     2” Butterfly     ASW Bow Thruster                Overboard Disch
3      4-59-2, Xducer Well       12” Gate       Scientific                      Sea Chest
4      4-59-2, Xducer Well       12” Gate       Scientific                      Sea Chest
5      4-59-2, Xducer Well        8” Gate       Doppler Speed Log               Sea Chest
6      4-59-2, Xducer Well       12” Gate       Scientific                      Sea Chest
7      4-59-2, Xducer Well       14” Gate       Acoustic Release                Sea Chest
8      4-59-2, Xducer Well       14” Gate       Bottom Transponder              Sea Chest
9      4-59-2                   2 ½” Gate       Sound Velocimeter Inlet         PIPE TUNNEL
       Transducer Well
10     3-73-0                     1” Gate       Sound Velocimeter               Overboard
       Fwd Pump Room                                                            Discharge
11     3-79-2                     2” Gate       Brine Ovbd                      OVERBOARD
       Fwd. Pump Room                                                           DISCHARGE
12     3-80-0                     2” Gate       Water Maker                     Sea Chest
       Generator Room
13     3-80-0                  14” Butterfly    Starboard Crossover,            Sea Chest
       Generator Room                           4-80-5
14     3-80-0                  14” Butterfly    Port Crossover                  Sea Chest
       Generator Room                           4-80-6
15     3-80-0                  12” Butterfly    Main Eng Seawater               Overboard
       Generator Room                           Cooling                         Discharge
16     3-80-0                     3” Gate       MSD, Sewage Holding             Overboard
       Generator Room                                                           Discharge
17     3-80-0                   1-1/2” Ball     Oily Waste Separator            Overboard
       Generator                                                                Discharge
18     3-80-0 Gen Room          1-1/2” Ball     Oily Waster Transfer Pump       Overboard
                                                                                Discharge
19     3-80-1 Gen Room         2-1/2” Gate      Vent (2 Each)                   Seachest
20     3-80-2 Gen. Room          1” Gate        Vent                            Seachest
21     2-80-2, MCS             4” Butterfly     Gray Water Fwd                  Ovbd Discharge
22     2-104-0, H.D.           8” Butterfly     Aux SW A/C, Refer               Overboard
       Storage                                  Scientific Chambers             Discharge
23     2-104-0 H. D.           5” Butterfly     Bilge/Ballast                   Ovbd Discharge
       Storage
24     3-104-0, Aft Pump       5” Butterfly     Bilge/Ballast                   Ind Bilge
       Room                                                                     Suction
25     3-104-0, Aft Pump       5” Butterfly     Bilge/Ballast                   Ind Bilge
       Room                                                                     Suction
26     3-104-0, Aft Pump       8” Butterfly     Aux Sw Sys,    4-115-1          Sea Chest
       Room
27     3-104-0, Aft Pump       8” Butterfly     Fire/Bilge/Ballast Sys          Sea Chest
       Room                                     4-115-1
28     Inside 4-136-2          6” Butterfly     Aux Seawater                    Overboard
       Ballast Tank                             Prpln Mtr, Z-Drive              Discharge
29     3-104-0, Aft Pump         2” Gate        Vent                            Seachest
       Room
30     3-75-0, Forward           2” Gate        Reverse Osmosis Inlet           Inlet
       Pump room                                Valve

TOTAL VALVE INCHES: 184”




3PSC                                                                     Page 249 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Enclosure 2.2.1
Standard item no. 63, revised 2 April 1993
Overhauling Sea Valves and Overboard Discharge Valves

All sea valves, including the bilge injection valve, overboard discharge
valves (except scupper and drain valves above the plimsoll mark), sea chest
blowing-out valves and boiler blow-down valves shall be opened in place,
cleaned and inspected. Tag and match mark all valve parts for reassembly.

Completely disassemble, clean and examine all valve parts for defects in the
presence of the port engineer. Submit a condition report to the msc port
engineer listing all parts requiring repair that are beyond the scope of this
item and those parts that require replacement.

Machine, grind or lap and spot-in gate to seat or disc to seat to obtain a
360 degree continuous contact. Verify contact using the blueing method.

For gate valves, transfer line shall not exceed 3/16 inch in width and shall
appear within the lower 75 percent of the gate seating surface.

For globe valves transfer line shall not exceed 1/16 inch in width.

Valve stems shall be freed up, cleaned and repacked. Valve stems shall be
lubricated with an all purpose grease.

Clean and coat valve body interiors with a surface tolerant epoxy, msc
approved in accordance with comscinst 4750.2, latest revision, appendix h.2.
Coat seating surfaces of disc or gate with grease prior to coating valve body
to ensure that coating does not adhere to the seating surfaces.

Fastenings securing the various valves to the hull and adjoining piping, and
associated parts such as pads, nipples, spuds, spool pieces, studs and
flanges shall be hammer tested and examined.

After inspection and acceptance of the above work, reassemble all valves.

Replace with new   all bonnet fasteners and gasket materials. With exception
of boiler bottom   blow valves which shall be fitted with heat treated
fasteners, monel   fasteners shall be used on bronze valves and cres fasteners
shall be used on   steel valves.

Prior to undocking, all sea valves worked on shall be closed. When the vessel
becomes waterborne and before becoming afloat, all sea valves that have been
worked on shall be operated and inspected, checking valve stem packing,
flanges, bonnets and valve bodies for leaks. Correct any deficiencies found.
If it is necessary to bring the vessel up on drydock to correct any
deficiencies found as a result of work performed on the sea valves by the
contractor, the cost of redocking the vessel shall be borne by the
contractor.




3PSC                                                             Page 250 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 909    Renew Zinc Anode Plates

1.0 Abstract
    Renew zinc anodes along ship’s hull and sea chests.

2.0 References/Enclosures
    2.1     References
            2.1.1 MSC Dwg No. 6782814, “Sacrificial Anode Tables”
    2.2     Enclosures
            2.2.1 MSC Standard item no. 73, “Renewing Zinc Plates”

2.0 Item location/description
      3.1 Location:
          3.1.1 table for quantity and location of anodes

         Location                         Qty     Description
         Seachest 4-80-5                  6       Type zhs (welded)
         Seachest 4-80-6                  6       Type zhs (welded)
         Aux seawater chest 4-115-1       2       12 type 35-z (weld) &
                                                  2 type 10-z (weld)
         Bowthruster                      14      12 type 35-z (weld) &
                                                  2 type 10-z (weld)
         Z-drive (port)                   9       7 type 60-z (weld) & 2
                                                  type 10-z (weld)
         Z-drive (stbd)                   9       7 type 60-z (weld) & 2
                                                  type 35-z (weld)

4.0    Government Furnished Equipment/material/services:     None

5.0 Notes:     None

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements: All work shall be accomplished to the
    satisfaction of the Port Engineer.

7.0    Statement of Work Required
       7.1 Discard and remove existing zinc anodes as scrap.
       7.2 Zinc anodes shall be removed prior to underwater hull blasting and
            installed after all painting has been completed.
       7.2 Provide and install new zinc anodes in accordance with reference
            3.1.1 and enclosure 2.2.1.

8.0 General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                                Page 251 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Enclosure 2.2.1
Standard Item No. 73, revised 2 April 1993
Renewing Zinc Plates

Accomplish a visual inspection of the hull zinc anodes. Submit, to the port
engineer, a report listing the percent of deterioration of the zincs.

Ensure that compartments in way of zinc plate replacement have been certified
safe for men- safe for hot work by a certified marine chemist.

Designated deteriorated, defective or missing zinc plates shall be replaced
with new zinc protectors with cast-in straps.

Remove existing defective hull zincs and studs. Where studs have been tapped
into castings, chip off the protruding portion, weld all around and grind
smooth. Install new zinc anodes and studs, including nuts and washers in
accordance with NAVSEA drawing 803-921865, revision "n", which forms and
becomes a part hereof.

The new zinc protectors shall be composed of low-iron special high grade
zinc, equal to specification mil-a-18001, with cast-in steel straps for
attaching to hull structure by welding, and with studs for attachment via
bolting to the hull. The zinc protectors, 12" long x 6" wide x 1-1/4" thick.
The anodes shall be installed, where practicable, in a fore and aft line on a
clean surface.

Sacrificial zinc surfaces shall not be painted. After anode installation,
external steel attachment points (straps and studs) shall be painted to
conform with the adjacent hull painting system. Straps shall not be painted
before installation.

Mask or grease the zincs to preclude anti-fouling paint from adhering to
zincs after installation. Remove masking or grease prior to undocking.

Quantities and locations of the anodes to be dealt with shall be as set forth
in the basic specification.




3PSC                                                            Page 252 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 910 Clean and Polish Propellers

1.0    Abstract
       Remove marine growth and dress up main propulsion propellers and
       bowthruster propeller.

2.0 References/enclosures:    None

3.0 Item Location/Description
    3.1   Two (2) main propulsion propellers at stern - approximately 12 feet
          in diameter, five bladed.
    3.2   One (1) bow thruster propeller at bow - approximately 6 feet in
          diameter, five bladed.

4.0 Government Furnished Equipment/Material/Services:       None

5.0 Notes
    The stern thruster propellers shall be temporarily removed in accordance
    with the thruster maintenance work item listed elsewhere in this
    specification.

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements:
    All work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Port Engineer.

7.0 Statement of work required:
    7.1   The contractor shall temporarily remove the two each stern thruster
          propellers and bow thruster propellers. NOTE: this work shall be
          done with the Wartsila Representative in attendance. Do not start
          work on removals without the Wartsila Representative on site.
    7.2   Clean and polish propellers, hub and fairwater cap. Dress the
          blades to a smooth surface.
    7.3   Polish the entire propeller, hub and fairwater cap to a 63RMS finish
          or "B" specimen of the Rupert comparator standard.
    7.4   After cleaning, perform a dye penetrant check of entire propeller
          assembly, including the hub and fairwater cap. Allow the Port
          Engineer and ABS Surveyor to inspect.
    7.5   Submit an as found condition report of the dye penetrant test to the
          Port Engineer.
    7.6   Fair and straighten all minor indents or distortions in both leading
          and trailing edges.
    7.7   Grind smooth all leading and trailing edges. Maintain the original
          tip profile and curvature of blades.
    7.8   Minor cracks shall be dressed or ground out. Repair cracks up to 2
          inches in length by welding or brazing with parent metal in
          accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
    7.9   Reinstall the propellers under the direction of the Wartsila
          Representative using new propeller shaft seals and o-rings.
    7.10 REPORTS - After all repairs and testing have been completed, submit
          an as released condition report of the propellers.

8.0 General Requirements:    None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 253 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item no. 911     Inspect and Clean Retractable Transducers

1.0 Abstract
    inspect and clean retractable transducers

2.0    References/enclosures
        2.1 References: None
        2.2 Enclosures: Photo of retractable transducers

3.0 Item Location/Description/Quantity:
      3.1 Quantity: Two (2) retractable transducers

4.0 Government Furnished equipment/material/services:       None

5.0 Notes:     The overhaul of the two sea valves shown in enclosure 2.2.1 will
               be covered by a work item located elsewhere within these
               specifications.

6.0 Quality Assurance Requirements: All work shall be accomplished to the
    satisfaction of the Port Engineer and NAVOCEANO Representative.

7.0 Statement of work:
    7.1   The contractor shall disassemble or disconnect the retractable
          transducers at the top of the sea valve shown in enclosure 2.2.1.
          Provide chain falls to secure the transducers in place while working
          on the lower components.
    7.2   Disassemble and remove the spool pieces directly above the sea
          valves. Inspect the inside bore of the spool piece for marine
          growth. Clean and polish the internals to a smooth finish.
    7.3   Inspect the transducer liners from the bottom of the sea valves to
          the skin of the ship. Using high pressure wands, wash and/or scrape
          the liners to remove all marine growth. Polish using light emery
          cloth to remove any scores or burrs.
          NOTE: The length of the transducer liner is approximately 4 feet
                and the transducer diameter is approximately 10 inches.
    7.4   The contractor shall lubricate the transducer rams, gearbox
          and upper bearing, and leadscrew threads with using contractor
          furnished MOBIL SHC-460 synthetic grease.
    7.5   Reassemble the spool pieces and transducers as per original. Raise
          and lower the transducers to prove free operation to the Port
          Engineer and NAVO representative.

8.0    General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                               Page 254 of 280
                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Enclosure 2.2.1   photo of retractable transducers




3PSC                                                 Page 255 of 280
                                              4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



Item No. 912           Bubble Fence Removal

1.0    Abstract
       This item describes the removal of the Port and Starboard Fwd Bilge
       Keels (Bubble Fence).

2.0    REFERENCES/ENCLOSURES
2.1    NAVSEA Dwg No. 110-7400430, Bubble Sweep Down Fence Details

3.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION
3.1    Ship’s Sideshell

4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIAL :            None

5.0    NOTES:   None

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS: None Additional

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK REQUIRED
       7.1   Certify Fuel Tanks 4-54-1, 4-54-1, 4-35-1, 4-35-2, 4-24-1, and 4-
             24-1 are gas free and ready for hot work in accordance with Work
             Item 107.
       7.2   Drain and dispose of all liquids contained inside the forward
             bilge keels. Continuously steam out the bilge keels to remove
             all preservative. Certify all areas to be gas free.
       7.3   Using reference 2.1 as guidance, remove for scrap the Port and
             Starboard Forward Bilge Keels between frames 17 and 64. Each
             bilge keel is approximately 94 feet long and 3 feet wide.
       7.4   Grind all weld bead remaining from the Forward Bilge Keels
             removals flush with the side shell plating.
       7.5   Prepare and paint the side shell, in way of the removed bilge
             keels, in accordance with the “Underwater Hull Cleaning and
             Painting” specification item 902, using operator supplied paint.

8.0    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:      None




3PSC                                                                  Page 256 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 913           Bilge Keel Removal

1.0    Abstract
       This item describes the removal of the Port and Starboard Fwd Bilge
       Keels (Bubble Fence).

2.0    REFERENCES/ENCLOSURES
       2.1         Drawing No. 7057430 titled: Bilge Keel and Bubble Sweep
                   Down Fence Details
       2.2         T-AGS 65: Bilge Keel Modifications

3.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION
       3.1   Ship’s Sideshell

4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIAL :          None

5.0    NOTES:   None

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS: None Additional

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK REQUIRED
       7.1   Certify fuel tanks 4-65-4, 4-80-4, 4-65-3, and 4-80-3 are gas
             free and ready for hot work in accordance with gas free
             certification and safe for hot work requirements.
       7.2   Drain and dispose of all liquids contained inside the bilge
             keels. Continuously steam out the bilge keels to remove all
             preservative. Certify all areas to be gas free.
       7.3   Remove for scrap approximately thirty feet of the fwd portion of
             each bilge keel between frames 74 and 89.
       7.4   Using enclosure 2.1 as guidance, fabricate and install new thirty
             foot fwd sections for each bilge keel between frames 89 and 74.
             The new sections shall follow the offsets shown on enclosure 2.1.
       7.5   Using enclosure 2.2 as guidance, install round bar and additional
             steel plate to the leading edge of each bilge keel.
       7.6   Air test the bilge keels to 2psi in the presence of the Port
             Engineer and ABS surveyor using a contractor-furnished and
             calibrated manometer. Repair all leaks found.
       7.7   Furnish rust preventative compound (Flote Kote), Mil-C-16173,
             Grade 1, or equivalent, and fill the bilge keels to fully flush
             and coat the internals. Drain off the compounds in the presence
             of the Port Engineer, and reinstall new drain and vent plugs.
       7.8   Prepare and paint the modified bilge keels in accordance with the
             “Underwater Hull Painting” specification item.

9.0    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:      None




3PSC                                                                Page 257 of 280
                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




950 Series Items   NAVO Drydock Items – Category B




3PSC                                              Page 258 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 951         Gondola Installation


1.0    Abstract

       This item describes the installation of a gondola appendage to the keel
       of the ship, the installation of five array frames, the relocation of a
       seawater intake pipe, the installation of transducer freshwater piping
       supply, the installation of seven watertight cable stand pipes and the
       removal of existing and installation of new draft marks for the gondola.
       This work shall be accomplished during the second docking evolution.

2.0    References/enclosures
       2.1   Enclosures
             2.1.1 NAVSEA DWG No. 085-7080888, Docking Plan
             2.1.2 MSC DWG NO. 8194104, Transducer Gondola Fabrication And
                   Details
             2.1.3 MSC DWG NO. 8194106, Transducer Gondola Nose Fairing
                   Fabrication, Arrangement And Details
             2.1.4 MSC DWG NO. 8194107, Transducer Gondola Installation Details

3.0    Item Location/Description

       3.4     Void, 4-35-0
       3.5     Fuel Oil Tank, 4-35-2
       3.6     Fuel Oil Tank, 4-35-1
       3.7     Ballast Tank, 4-24-2
       3.8     Ballast Tank, 4-24-1

4.0            Government Furnished Material

       4.1     Gondola, 40 Ft Long X 25 Ft Wide , 66000 Lbs, Qty 1
       4.2     Gondola Steel Nose Fairing, 8 Ft Long X 2 Ft Wide, 1200 Lbs, Qty 1
       4.3     10” Blind Flange With 24 Cable Inserts, Qty 4
       4.4     8” Blind Flange With 5 Cable Inserts, Qty 3
       4.5     EM120 Transmit Array Frame, Qty 1
       4.6     EM120 Receive Array Frame, Qty 1
       4.7     EM710 Transmit Array Frame, Qty 1
       4.8     EM710 Receive Array Frame, Qty 1
       4.9     SBP 120 Transmit Array Frame, Qty 1
       4.10    Acoustic Foam Insulation, Qty 80 Sq Ft
       4.11    Alignment Engineer Services
       4.12    Stainless Steel Shims, Qty Various




3PSC                                                                Page 259 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



5.0          Notes
             5.1     A graving dock will be required for a minimum of
                     twenty-one days, for the fit up and alignment of the
                     gondola assembly.
             5.2   All contractor furnished material shall be new, and mil/shop
                   primed.
             5.3   The above fuel oil and ballast tanks shall be certified gas
                   free under specification item 108.
             5.4   This item is required to be completed eighteen (18) days
                   prior to the end of the shipyard availability.
             5.5   Contractor to provide the following materials for the
                   installation of the acoustic foam provided as GFM in 4.10.
                   A)    12 quarts of REMA SC-2000 cement.
                   B)    12 tubes of UTR 20 hardener.
                   C)    2 quarts of PR20-qt, primer.
                               Suggested source:
                                  RGA
                                  Jackson, MS.
                                  Phone (601)-923-5050
             NOTE: EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS AVAILABLE ON THE OPEN MARKET ARE
             ALLOWABLE, SUBJECT TO THE ADVANCED APPROVAL FROM THE NAVOCEANO SNR.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
             representative.
       6.2   All welding, fit-up, and installations shall be IAW the
             requirements of the attending abs surveyor, USCG inspector, and
             adhere to applicable classifications rules and requirements.

7.0    Statement Of Work Required
       7.1   Using enclosure 2.1.1 as guidance, remove and/or add docking blocks
             as necessary to position the gondola under the ship’s keel.
       7.2   Certify ballast tanks 4-24-2, 4-24-1 and fuel oil tanks 4-35-2, 4-
             35-1 gas free and ready for hot work.
             Note: refer to other items in this specification that call for
             cleaning and gas freeing of various tanks for ABS Continuous Hull
             Survey Credit.
       7.3   Relocate two drain plugs for ballast tanks 4-24-1 and 4-24-2, from
             frame 35 to frame 25, to a location outboard of the gondola nose
             fairing.
       7.4   Align and fit gondola, item 4.1, to ship’s keel so that when
             installed, the gondola has a 1 degree + 0 minutes, -20 minutes nose
             up attitude, is parallel to the ship’s roll plane within +/- 10
             minutes, and is aligned in azimuth to the centerline of the ship
             within +/- 10 minutes.
                                           Note
             The government will supply the services of an alignment engineer to
             assist with the gondola alignment during fit-up and welding.

       7.5   Using enclosure 2.1.2 as guidance, install the gondola to the ship
             as follows:
             A. Weld the gondola center-body to the keel of the ship, while
                maintaining the alignment criteria.

             B. Install two hull insert plates in way of the strut installation.



3PSC                                                             Page 260 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




              C. Align and fit the two gondola struts between the ship’s side
                 shell and the gondola wing. Struts are aligned with an 8-degree
                 “trailing edge in” configuration.

              D. Weld the gondola struts to the ship, while maintaining the
                 gondola roll plane alignment requirements.

              E. Install strut backup structure within fuel oil tanks 4-35-2 and
                 4-35-1.

              F. Install four 24 inch x 12 inch x 3/8 inch thick steel plate
                 brackets between frames 47 and 49 within void 4-35-0.

              G. Install one 24 inch x 24 inch x ½ inch thick steel gusset
                 between the forward edge of the gondola and the ship’s keel on
                 centerline.

              H. Install, by welding, the gondola nose fairing support structure
                 and steel nose fairing, item 4.2, using enclosure 2.1.3 as
                 guidance.

              I. Install epoxy fairing compound around the nose fairing and
                 gondola to smooth all transition edges.

       7.6    Install twenty-six 18 kg and twelve 8 kg contractor furnished zinc
              anodes to the interior of the gondola. Exact location to be
              determined by the Navoceano engineer. Anodes shall be bolted to
              gondola structure.

       7.7    Clean the array frames, items 4.5 thru 4.9 by wire brushing, to
              remove all rust.

       7.8    After completion of the gondola installation, install each array
              frame, items 4.5-4.9 into the gondola using enclosure 2.1.2 as
              guidance, using stainless steel shims, item 4.12, and contractor
              furnished mounting bolts for each frame. Under the guidance of the
              Government furnished alignment engineer, adjust each frame to
              achieve the required 0.5 mm flatness requirement.

       7.9    Install acoustic foam insulation, item 4.10, behind the EM 120 and
              EM 710 receive array frames using epoxy adhesive.

       7.10   Relocate a 2 ½” seawater intake pipe, located within void 4-35-0,
              from fr 47 to fr 49. Refurbish and reinstall the existing 2 ½” sea
              valve and reach rod per abs requirements.

       7.11   Install a hull insert plate to close the opening from the relocated
              intake pipe.

       7.12   Install new 2 ½” schedule 80 steel pipe, from the refurbished sea
              valve, through the ship’s keel, and connect it to the seawater sea
              chest located within the gondola. See enclosure 2.1.2, section 49-
              c.




3PSC                                                              Page 261 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.13   Install seven cable stand pipes through the keel plating using
              enclosure 2.1.4 as guidance. Grind all seams smooth to prevent
              cable chaffing.

       7.14   Install four 10” flanges, item 4.3, and three 8” flanges, item 4.4,
              to the stand pipe assemblies installed in 7.14. Using contractor
              furnished stainless bolts and garlock gaskets.

       7.15   Remove the draft marks at frame 54, port and starboard.

       7.16   Install new draft marks at frame 50, port and starboard, as
              specified by the NAVOCEANO representative. Draft marks shall
              correspond to the lowest point on the gondola. All numbers shall
              be arabic numerals, precisely 6” high, and spaced 6” vertically.
              The bottom of the number shall coincide with the draft it
              represents. Draft marks shall be outlined by weld bead. Above the
              top of the draft marks, there shall be the letters “Sonar Proj”,
              and these letters shall be similar in height and design to the
              draft marks.

       7.17   Test installed pipes and hull insert plates for water-tightness in
              accordance with ABS requirements.

       7.18   Air test the gondola struts to 2 psi in the presence of the 3PSC
              Port Engineer and ABS surveyor using a contractor-furnished and
              calibrated manometer. Repair all leaks found.

       7.19   Furnish rust preventative compound (flote kote), MIL-C 16173, grade
              1, or equivalent, and fill the two struts to fully flush and coat
              the internals. Drain off the compound in the presence of the 3psc
              port engineer, and reinstall the drain and vent plugs.

       7.20   Prepare and paint all new and disturbed underwater and shell
              surfaces in accordance with the “Underwater hull cleaning and
              Painting” specification item 902, using operator supplied paint.

8.0      General Requirements:   None




3PSC                                                              Page 262 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 952         Transducer Pod Modifications

1.0    Abstract
       This item describes the work required to remove six transducers from the
       transducer pod and pipe tunnel, and to fabricate and install two new
       transducer mounting rings in the transducer pod. This work shall be
       accomplished during the second docking evolution.


2.0    References/enclosures
       2.1   References: None
       2.2   Enclosures
             2.2.1 MSC DWG No 8194105, Mission Transducer Gondola Ripout
             2.2.2 MSC DWG No. 8194107, Transducer Gondola Installation Details
             2.2.3 NAVO DWG No. 0418182, Underwater Camera Arrangement and
                   Details
             2.2.4 NAVO DWG No. N61-202, Fwd Transducer Tube Camera Mount

3.0    Item Location/Description
       3.1   Void, 4-35-0

4.0    Government Furnished Material
       4.1   Junction box, 6x6x4 inch, qty 1

5.0    Notes:
       5.1    All contractor furnished material shall be new, and mil/shop
              primed.
       5.2    All removed electrical components, cables and transducer windows
              shall be retained and turned over to the ship’s owner for
              disposition.
       5.3    This item is required to be completed eighteen (18) days prior to
              the end of the shipyard period.

6.0    Quality Assurance Requirements
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall be
             to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
             representative.

       6.2     All welding, fit-up, and installations shall be iaw the
               requirements of the attending ABS surveyor, USCG inspector, and
               adhere to applicable classifications rules and requirements.

7.0    Statement of Work Required

       7.1     Temporarily unbolt and remove the deck grating covering the six
               transducers in the transducer void.

       7.2     Disconnect the two fresh water supply pipes to two of the
               transducers.
                                              NOTE:
               Government technicians will assist with the disconnection of
               transducer electronics. Transducer removal will be under the
               direction of the NAVOCEANO representative.




3PSC                                                               Page 263 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.3    Remove a 40 inch, a 30 inch, and a 24 inch diameter blanking
              flanges from the top of the 3.5 khz, 12 khz and ADCP transducers.
              Remove the transducers.

       7.4    Temporarily remove the 30 inch diameter steel pipe high hat
              covering the 12 khz transducer.

       7.5    Remove the 33 khz and 12 khz transducers.

       7.6    Relocate the doppler speed log and depth finder transducer mounting
              flanges from frame 62 to frame 75. Install a cable junction box,
              item 4.1.

       7.7    Relocate one 8 inch sea valve and seachest assembly from the
              transducer void, frame 62, to the aft end of the pipe tunnel, frame
              75.

       7.8    Install four hull insert plates to close the hull openings in way
              of the removed transducers and seachest.

       7.9    Remove for scrap, the 20 inch diameter ADCP seachest located on the
              keel at frame 75.

       7.10   Install a hull keel insert plate and a 36 inch long, 12 inch x4
              inch x3/8 inch steel angle frame in way of the removed seachest.

       7.11   Remove six junction boxes and their foundations from the bulkhead
              of the transducer well.

       7.12   Using enclosure 2.2.2, sheets 5 and 6 as guidance, fabricate and
              install transducer mounting rings, and transducer windows for the
              38 khz and 300 khz ADCP transducers. These transducers are
              installed in specification work item 709.

       7.13   Reinstall the 30 inch steel pipe high hat removed in paragraph 7.4
              over the 300 khz ADCP transducer.

       7.14   Using enclosure 2.2.3 as guidance, fabricate and install a thru-
              hull camera mount in the transducer pod hull plating.

       7.15   Using enclosure 2.2.4 as guidance, fabricate and install a camera
              mount on the fwd transducer tube cover plate.

       7.16   Chemically clean, using   phosphoric acid, three fresh water
              transducer head tanks.    The tanks are approximately two cubic feet
              each. Chemically clean    the three tank discharge piping from the
              tanks to the transducer   well.

       7.17   Reinstall fresh water supply and vent piping and valves to the two
              new transducer mounting rings from the two transducer head tanks.

       7.18   Test all new and modified hull penetrations to abs standards for
              watertightness.

       7.19   Prepare and paint all new and disturbed underwater and shell
              surfaces in accordance with the “underwater hull cleaning and
              painting” specification item 902, using operator supplied paint.


3PSC                                                                Page 264 of 280
                                        4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




8.0    General Requirements:   None Additional




3PSC                                                            Page 265 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 953      Transducer Cable Pipe Installation
1.0   ABSTRACT
      This item describes the installation of four 8 inch schedule 80 pipes,
      from the ship’s keel to the first platform deck, 21 feet above the
      keel. This work shall be accomplished during the second docking
      evolution.


2.0    REFERENCES/ENCLOSURES
       2.1   ENCLOSURES
             2.1.1 NAVO DWG, Crew Stateroom Arrangement
             2.1.2 MSC DWG no. 8194107, Transducer Gondola Installation
                   Details

3.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION
       3.1   Void 4-35-0
       3.2   Fuel oil tank 4-35-2
       3.3   Low density storeroom, 3-40-0
       3.4   Crew stateroom, 2-44-2

4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIAL
       4.1   ROXTEC Multi Cable Transits, QTY 2
       4.2   ROXTEC Multi Cable Transits, QTY 4

5.0    NOTES:
       5.1    All contractor furnished material shall be new, and mil/shop
              primed.
       5.2    This item is required to be completed eighteen days prior
             to the end of the shipyard period.

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or, his
             representative.
       6.2   All welding, fit-up, and installations shall be IAW the
             requirements of the attending abs surveyor, USCG inspector, and
             adhere to applicable classifications rules and requirements.

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK REQUIRED

       7.1   Fuel Oil tank 4-35-2 shall be cleaned and certified safe for hot
             work in order to accomplish this item. Note: This fuel tank is
             already called out to be cleaned, examined and hydrostatically
             tested in Item No. 101.

       7.2   Using enclosure 2.1.1 as guidance, relocate two bunks, two
             wardrobes, and one chair within Stateroom 2-44-2. Relocate one
             fan, two bunk lights and shelves, two EEBD holders and one
             survival suit holder, all located on the stateroom bulkhead.
             Exact location to be determined by the NAVOCEANO representative.

       7.3   Install two multi cable transits, items 4.1, into the deck within
             stateroom 2-44-2. Exact location to be determined by the
             NAVOCEANO representative.



3PSC                                                             Page 266 of 280
                                             4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




       7.4    Using enclosure 2.1.2 as guidance, install four 8” schedule 80
              steel pipes, from stateroom 2-44-2 to the bottom of the ship’s
              keel. Pipes pass through the Low Density Storeroom 3-40-0, fuel
              oil tank 4-35-2, and void 4-35-0. Grind interior cut sections
              prior to welding, and grind perimeter of pipe openings to reduce
              chafing of electrical cables to be installed within the pipes.

       7.5    Using enclosure 2.1.2 as guidance, fabricate and install a water
              tight steel manifold box on the top of the four cable pipes.
              Provide a gasket for the box access opening.

       7.6    Install a vent for the above box by installing 1-1/2” schedule 40
              pipe from the box to a gooseneck vent located on the 02 level
              weather deck at frame 45. The vent pipe will run in the overhead
              of Stateroom 2-44-2, outboard to the 02 level vent.

       7.7    Install four multi cable transits, item 4.2, into the top of the
              manifold box.

       7.8    Test installed pipes for water-tightness in accordance with abs
              requirements.

       7.9    Install approximately six, three-tier cable hangers on the
              inboard bulkhead of Stateroom 2-44-2. Exact location to be
              determined by the NAVOCEANO representative.

       7.10   Install new joiner bulkhead panels around the pipes, multi-cable
              transits, and pipe hangers installed within Stateroom 2-44-2.
              Design shall be approved by the NAVOCEANO representative, and
              shall match existing panels.

       7.11   Replace vinyl tile flooring, within Stateroom 2-44-2, in way of
              the relocated furniture and protective pipe enclosure.

       7.12   Repair or replace all disturbed lagging.

       7.13   Paint the pipe conduits, and all other new installations with two
              coats of epoxy anti-corrosive coating.

       7.14   Paint all disturbed interior areas to match surrounding surfaces.

8.0           GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:   NONE




3PSC                                                                 Page 267 of 280
                                           4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 954         EM1002 Transducer Array System Removal


1.0    ABSTRACT
       This item describes the removal of the interior and hull mounted
       components of the Kongsberg EM1002 multibeam system. This work shall be
       accomplished during the first docking evolution.


2.0    REFERENCES/ENCLOSURES.
       2.1   Enclosures
             2.1.1 MSC Dwg No. 8194105, Mission Transducer Gondola Rip-Out,
                   Sheet 4.

3.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION/QUANTITY.
       3.1   Ship’s Keel, Frame 40
       3.2   Low Density Storeroom, 3-40-0

4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS/SERVICES.
       4.1   Services: Kongsberg Engineers.

5.0    NOTES.
       5.1    All work specified herein shall be coordinated and accomplished
              with other drydock related items in these specifications.
       5.2    Government furnished services will be made available to provide
              guidance during removal of the Kongsberg EM1002 multibeam system.
       5.3    All underhull removals and repairs to the ships hull listed on
              these specifications shall be completed prior to the first un-
              docking date as described under the “dry-docking and undocking of
              the ship” work item.

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:
       6.1   All workmanship, materials, parts, testing, inspections, and
             material substitutions shall be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC
             port engineer or his representative.


7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK.
               Note: Kongsberg personnel will disconnect all transducer
               component cables
       7.1     Remove the epoxy fairing compound from the perimeter of the keel
               mounted transducer
       7.2     Remove for scrap, the two fiberglass fairings from the transducer
               by unbolting them from their mounting rings.
       7.3     Remove eight transducer cables from the Low Density Storeroom to
               the hull mounted transducer. Clean cables to remove marine
               growth.
       7.4     Remove the transducer by unbolting it from the hull mounting
               frame. The above eight cables are attached to the transducer.
               Clean transducer of all marine growth.
       7.5     Remove the transducer electronics cabinet and four cable junction
               boxes from the bulkhead of the low density storeroom. Remove the
               mounting foundations.




3PSC                                                               Page 268 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.6    Using enclosure 2.1.1, sheet 4 as guidance, remove for scrap the
              hull mounted transducer frame. Grind all remaining weld bead and
              epoxy fairing compound flush with surrounding side shell plating.
       7.7    Remove for scrap all transducer cable hangers located within the
              pipe tunnel and the low density storeroom.
       7.8    Remove for scrap the cable gland deck plate located in the low
              density storeroom.
       7.9    Install a flush deck insert plate in way of the removed cable
              gland deck plate.
       7.10   Remove for scrap the cable pipe and gland assembly located within
              the pipe tunnel.
       7.11   Install a hull insert plate in way of the removed cable pipe and
              gland assembly.
       7.12   Fabricate pest free certified wooden shipping crates for the
              transducer and cables, and the transducer junction box and
              electronic cabinet. Package the equipment within the crates,
              using suitable packing material, and turn over to the NAVOCEANO
              Port Engineer.
       7.13   Paint all interior disturbed surfaces to match surrounding.
       7.14   Conduct ABS required testing on the hull and deck insert plates.
       7.15   Prepare and paint the side shell, in way of the removed bilge
              keels, in accordance with the “underwater hull cleaning and
              painting” specification item 902, using operator supplied paint.

8.0    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: NONE




3PSC                                                              Page 269 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 955       EM121A Transducer Array System Removal

1.0    ABSTRACT
       This item describes the removal of the interior and hull mounted
       components of Kongsberg EM121A system. This work shall be accomplished
       during the first docking evolution.


1.0    REFERENCES/ENCLOSURES.
       2.1 Enclosures
             2.1.1 MSC Dwg No. 8194105 Mission Transducer Gondola Rip-Out
                   Drawing, Sheets 1-6.

2.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION/QUANTITY
       3.1   LOCATION: VARIOUS

4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS/SERVICES.
        4.1  SERVICES: KONGSBERG ENGINEERS.

5.0    NOTES
        5.1  All work specified herein shall be coordinated and accomplished
              with other drydock related items in these specifications.
        5.2  Government furnished services will be made available to provide
              guidance during removal of the Kongsberg EM121a system.
        5.3  All underhull removals and repairs to the ships hull listed on
              these specifications shall be completed prior to the first un-
              docking date as described in the dry-docking item.

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:
        All workmanship, materials, parts, testing, inspections, and material
        substitutions shall be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer or
        his representative.

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK:
        7.1  REMOVALS
              7.1.1 Receiver (RX) window removal.
                    A. Remove the 3/8 inch diameter pipe plug from the
                       Kongsberg EM121a RX window and allow to drain fully. The
                       pipe plug on the RX window is located in the center of
                       after side of the window.

                   B. Remove the “System 3” flexible epoxy compound and the
                      Philadelphia resin repair compound from the RX window
                      mounting screws and the end fairing” collar bar” , using
                      caution not to scratch or damage the window.

                   C. Remove each end fairing “collar bar” and bolts. Remove
                      the closed cell foam from each end of the fairing voids.

                   D. Temporarily install rigging and staging for the removal
                      of the RX window.

                   E. Remove for scrap the RX window from the mounting
                      structure. The window is approximately 20” high x 28”
                      deep x 360” long and weighs approximately 400 pounds.



3PSC                                                                Page 270 of 280
                                       4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                    The window is secured to its mounting structure with cap
                    screws (m10x20 socket head) and mounting clamps.

       7.1.2 Transmitter (TX ) window removal
             A. Remove the 3/8 inch diameter pipe plug from the
                Kongsberg EM121a TX window and allow to drain fully.
                The pipe plug on the TX window is located in the bottom
                of the aft end of the window.

               B. Remove the epoxy compound from the TX window mounting
                  screws.

               C. Remove for scrap the TX window from the mounting
                  structure. The window is approximately 20” high x 33”
                  deep x 368” long and weighs approximately 400 pounds.
                  The window is secured to its mounting structure with cap
                  screws (m10x20 socket head) and mounting clamps.

       7.1.3    Equipment Removal (transmitter array)

               A.    Assist Kongsberg engineers in loosening all cable
                     glands from the three cable gland assemblies located in
                     the transducer well (4-35-0).

               B.    Kongsberg engineers will disconnect all projector
                     cables from the two transmitting junction boxes,
                     located in the transducer well (4-35-0), approximately
                     at frame 55.

               C.    Remove fifty-eight projector modules. The projectors
                     are secured to the mounting frame with screws and each
                     projector has its respective cable. Removal of each
                     projector shall be coordinated with the Kongsberg
                     engineer and cable removal in paragraph 6.1.6.a. Clean
                     modules.

               D.    Remove two transmitter junction boxes, located in the
                     transducer well (4-35-0), approximately at frame 55.

               E.    Remove one transmitter rack (17-f), located in the
                     main lab(1-55-2). Government representatives will
                     disconnect all equipment and cables.

               F.    Fabricate a shipping crate using certified pest free
                     material, and pack the two transmitter junction boxes
                     and the transmitter rack previously removed. The
                     packaged equipment shall be turned over to the port
                     engineer.


       7.1.4    Equipment Removal (receiver array)

               A. Assist Kongsberg engineers in loosening all cable glands
                  from the two cable gland assemblies located in the
                  storage room (3-54-0).




3PSC                                                           Page 271 of 280
                                     4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



               B. Kongsberg engineers will disconnect all hydrophone
                  modules cables from the two receiver junction boxes,
                  located in the Storage Room (3-53-0)), approximately at
                  frame 55.

               C. Remove sixteen hydrophone modules. The modules are
                  secured to the mounting frame with screws and each
                  module has its respective cable. Removal of each module
                  shall be coordinated with the Kongsberg engineers and
                  the removal of cables in paragraph 6.1.6.a. Clean
                  modules.

               C. Remove two (2) receiver junction boxes, located in the
                  storage room (3-53-0), approximately at frame 55.

               D. Remove one (1), receiver rack located in the Main Lab
                  (1-55-2). Government representatives will disconnect
                  all equipment and cables.

               E. Fabricate a shipping crate using certified pest free
                  material, and pack the two (2), receiver junction boxes
                  and the receiver rack previously removed. The packaged
                  equipment shall be turned over to the port engineer

       7.1.5    Structural
               Note: the following tanks shall be emptied and certified
               safe for entry in accordance with work item 101.
                        Fuel oil tank, compartment 4-35-1
                        Fuel oil tank, compartment 4-35-2
                        Fuel oil tank, compartment 4-54-1
                        Fuel oil tank, compartment 4-54-2

          Prior to any fairing or frame removal, the void space shall be
          emptied, gas freed, and certified safe for hot work by a
          marine chemist. Note: The void space was original filled with
          float coat.
             A. Using enclosure 2.2.1, sheets 2 and 6, remove for scrap
                two cable gland assemblies, water vents and all
                associated cable piping and hardware located in the
                transducer well (4-35-0), above the RX equipment array.
             B. Using enclosure 2.2.1, sheets 2 and 6, remove for scrap
                three cable gland assemblies, water vents and associated
                cable piping and hardware located in the storage room
                (3-53-0), above the TX equipment array.
             C. Remove for scrap approximately 100 feet of 1 ½”
                freshwater piping from the pipe tunnel.
             D. Remove for scrap the RX fairing, fairing support frames
                and RX array frame. Use enclosure 2.2.1, as guidance.
             E. Remove and scrap the TX array frame and all associated
                hardware. Use enclosure 2.2.1, as guidance.
             F. Plug all hull, deck and bulkhead penetrations as result
                of the removal of cable gland assemblies, water vents
                and all associated piping. Use enclosure 2.2.1, sheet 2,
                as guidance.
             G. Grind the ship’s hull ten inches wide area around from
                edge of the RX fairing and TX array frame. Smooth all




3PSC                                                         Page 272 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                      weld seams or other imperfections on the ground area of
                      the hull.

             7.1.6 Electrical.
                   A. Using reference 2.1.1 as guidance remove the EM121a
                      system cables.

       7.2   Inspection/test
              7.2.1 Inspection.
                    A. Inspect the affected areas of the RX and TX array to
                       ensure that all fairing compound residuals have been
                       removed.
                    B. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining abs and
                       USCG inspection of all hull repairs prior to undocking
                       as described in drydocking item.

       7.3   General requirements
              7.3.1 Painting.
                    A. Clean the disturbed underhull areas and paint as
                       described under the ship’s underwater hull cleaning and
                       painting work item 902.

8.0    General Requirements: None Additional




3PSC                                                             Page 273 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 956      Transducer Array System Installation
1.0   ABSTRACT
      This item describes the installation of eight transducer system
      components, including the transducer modules within the gondola, the
      system cabling between the transducers and the interior of the ship,
      and the system cabling within the ship, and the installation of two
      underwater cameras. This work shall be accomplished during the second
      docking evolution.

2.0    REFERENCES/ENCLOSURES
       2.1   REFERENCES: NONE
       2.2   ENCLOSURES
             2.2.1 MSC Dwg No. 8194104, Transducer Gondola Fabrication
                   Arrangement And Details

3.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION
       3.1   Gondola Appendage
       3.2   Crew Stateroom, 2-44-2
       3.3   Low Density Storeroom, 3-40-0
       3.4   Transducer Pod Appendage
       3.5   Transducer Well, 4-59-2

4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIAL:

       4.1    EM 120 Receive Modules With 20 Meters Of Cable Each, Qty 16
       4.2    EM 120 Transmit Modules With 25 Meters Of Cable Each, Qty 24
       4.3    EM 710 Receive Modules With 21 Meters Of Cable Each, Qty 2
       4.4    EM 710 Transmit Modules With 20 Meters Of Cable Each, Qty 2
       4.5    SBP 120 Transmit Modules With 20 Meters Of Cable Each, Qty 96
       4.6    EA 600 200khz Module With 20 Meters Of Cable, Qty 1
       4.7    EA 600 12khz Module With 20 Meters Of Cable, Qty 1
       4.8    EA 600 38khz Module With 20 Meters Of Cable, Qty 1
       4.9    ADCP 300khz Module With 20 Meters Of Cable, Qty 1
       4.10   ADCP 38 KHz Module With 20 Meters Of Cable, Qty 1
       4.11   Doppler Speed Log With 20 Meters Of Cable, Qty 1
       4.12   Depth Finder With 20 Meters Of Cable, Qty 1
       4.13   Test Hydrophones, Qty 6
       4.14   EM 120 Transmit Component 7 Meter Cable, Qty 24
       4.15   EM 120 Receive Component 7 Meter Cable, Qty 8
       4.16   SBP Component 10 Meter Cables, Qty 24
       4.17   Underwater Camera With 40 Meter Cable, Qty 2
       4.18   Transducer Closure Plates, Qty 110

5.0    NOTES
       5.1   All hot work required in specification items 951, 952, 953, 701,
             and 702, shall be completed prior to the installation of the
             transducer cables.

       5.2    The installation and alignment of the transducer frames, item
              951, 952, and 957 shall be completed prior to the installation of
              the transducer modules.

       5.3    This item is required to be completed 12 days prior to the end of
              the shipyard availability.



3PSC                                                              Page 274 of 280
                                         4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
       6.1   All workmanship, material, parts, testing, and inspections shall
             be to the satisfaction of the 3PSC port engineer, or his
             representative.

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK REQUIRED
       NOTE
       The installation of transducers and cables will be conducted under the
       direction of government and Kongsberg representatives.

       7.1   Install forty-four EM 120 and EM 710 transmit and receive module,
             items 4.1-4.4, into the transducer frames located on the
             underside of the gondola. This is accomplished by unbolting the
             module retaining bars and lifting each module into the frame with
             the use of a small scissor lift. Reinstall the retaining bars to
             secure the modules.

       7.2   Install eighty-eight ½ inch diameter, sixty feet long EM 120 and
             EM 710 cables from the transducer modules installed above, to the
             low density storeroom.   These cables will run through pipe
             conduits installed in specification item 702 “Low Density
             Storeroom and Stateroom Modifications”.

       7.3   Install ninety-six SBP 120 transmit modules, item 4.5, by bolting
             each module into the transducer frame located on the underside of
             the gondola.

       7.4   Install ninety-six ½ inch diameter, sixty feet long SBP 120
             cables from the modules installed above to the Low Density
             Storeroom. These cables run into the ship via cable glands
             installed within the pipe tunnel and multi-cable transits
             installed into the Low Density Storeroom.

       7.5   Install three EA 600 transducers, items 4.6-4.8, by bolting each
             transducer into the frames located on the underside of the
             gondola.

       7.6   Install three ½ inch diameter, sixty feet long EA 600 cables from
             the transducers installed above to the Low Density Storeroom.
             These cables run into the ship via cable glands installed within
             the pipe tunnel and multi-cable transits installed into the Low
             Density Storeroom.

       7.7   Install two ADCP transducers, items 4.9 and 4.10 by bolting each
             transducer into the frames located within the transducer pod at
             FR 61.

       7.8   Install two ADCP transducer cables from each transducer to the
             Main Lab, rack 16.

       7.9   Using enclosure 2.2.1, sheet 13 as guidance, fabricate four ADCP
             transducer polycarbonate windows using NAVOCEANO supplied
             material. Install two of the windows over the ADCP transducers,
             and provide the remaining two as spares to the NAVOCEANO
             representative.




3PSC                                                             Page 275 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



       7.10   Install the Doppler speed log and depth finder transducers, item
              4.11 and 4.12, by bolting each transducer into the frames located
              on the ship’s keel, at FR 75.

       7.11   Furnish and install two cables, one each for the Doppler speed
              log and the depth finder, from the transducers to the existing
              junction boxes located within the transducer well.

       7.12   Install six hydrophones, item 4-13, by bolting each transducer to
              the frame located on the underside of the gondola.

       7.13   Install six, eighty feet long hydrophone cables, between each
              hydrophone and the low density storeroom. These cables run into
              the ship via cable glands installed within the pipe tunnel and
              multi-cable transits installed into the Low Density Storeroom.

       7.14   Install fifty six 10 meter long transducer component cables,
              items 4.14-4.16, between the various transducer cabinets located
              within the Low Density Storeroom.

       7.15   Install two underwater cameras, item 4.17, one on the fwd
              transducer tube cover plate, and one on the transducer pod
              mounting ring. Install the camera cables from each location to
              the main lab.

              Note:
              At the completion of the transducer installation, government
              personnel will terminate, connect, and test the transducers and
              cables. After successful testing, the contractor will proceed
              with installing the following.


       7.16   Install one hundred and ten steel closure plates, item 4.18,
              around the transducers installed in the gondola. Steel plates
              are attached with countersunk stainless steel screws. Grind
              plates as necessary to obtain a tight fit and fair surface.

       7.17   Install contractor furnished epoxy fairing compound to fair the
              surfaces between the closure plates and the surrounding gondola
              steel plating.

       7.18   Prepare and paint all new and disturbed underwater and shell
              surfaces in accordance with the “underwater hull cleaning and
              painting” specification item 902, using operator supplied paint.

8.0       GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:   NONE




3PSC                                                              Page 276 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 957      Sensor Survey Support
1.0   ABSTRACT:
      This item describes the support required to assist alignment engineers
      in a sensor alignment and an orthogonal coordinate survey of the
      sponsor mission equipment. This work shall be accomplished during the
      second docking evolution.


2.0    REFERENCES/ENCLOSURES
       2.1   References: None Additional.
       2.2   Enclosures:
             2.2.1. Gyro Room Line Of Sight Guidance Drawing
             2.2.2 Sensor Alignment Survey, DWG 0418150
             2.2.3 Survey Elements and Tolerances
             2.2.4 Reporting Requirements

3.0    ITEM LOCATION/DESCRIPTION: VARIOUS

4.0    GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL/SERVICES
       4.1   Government Furnished Services: Alignment Engineer
       4.2   IMU Mounting Plate

5.0    NOTES
       5.1   Shipyard activity around the alignment engineer shall be
             restricted. Alignment engineer will coordinate with the shipyard
             to determine times, places, and severity of restrictions.

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:   NONE ADDITIONAL.

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK REQUIRED
       7.1   Provide a graving drydock for a period of 17 days (with
             uninterrupted service) for the sensor alignment and orthogonal
             coordinate survey. Graving drydock and blocking shall meet the
             following requirements:
             •     Ship shall be positioned on the blocks so that the keel in
                   the location of the new gondola installation is within +/-
                   5 arc minutes of horizontal level.
             •     Keel block height shall be approximately 3 meters high.
             Note: 17 day period shall not begin until dock floor is
             sufficiently dry for alignment and survey work to begin and shall
             not include time to refloat the ship.
       7.2   Provide a personnel lift truck with trained driver to aid
             alignment engineer provided in paragraph 4.1 with survey
             measurements along the sideshell of the ship. Driver shall be
             needed for 2, not necessarily consecutive, days.
       7.3   With guidance from the alignment engineer, cut a temporary
             penetration (approximately 3 feet wide x 2 feet high) in the side
             shell for a line of sight. The penetration shall be on the
             starboard side of the dry stores (3-65-3), approximately 1 f00t
             above the deck, as shown in enclosure (1).
       7.4   With guidance from the alignment engineer, fabricate and attach a
             temporary steel foundation to the side of the ship near the
             temporary side shell penetration installed in paragraph 7.3.
             Foundation shall be used to support a theodolite. Provide and




3PSC                                                                Page 277 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



              install staging around the theodolite foundation from the dock
              floor for the alignment engineer.
       7.5    Temporarily remove shelving and grating in the dry stores (3-65-
              3) as directed by the GFS alignment engineer. Note: shelving
              and grating is installed with bolts and clips.
       7.6    Fabricate and install 2 covers for the IMUs in the gyro room (3-
              65-0). Covers shall be approximately 16” high x 12” wide x 12”
              deep. Material shall be 3/16” steel. Covers shall be primed and
              painted gray. The top of the covers shall be painted or labeled
              with the words “no step”. Existing IMU foundations shall be
              drilled and tapped (1/4 -20 unc) in four places. Covers shall be
              mounted with screws to the existing IMU foundations.
       7.7    Fabricate and install a steel ring inside each of the 2 removable
              OBM covers in the gyro room (3-65-0). Ring shall support the OBM
              cover on its stand and shall not interfere with existing mounting
              bolts or the OBM.
       7.8    Fabricate 4 benchmarks similar to those installed on the ship.
              Benchmarks shall be 316 stainless steel plate, 3/16” thick x 2” x
              2”. The words “bench mark. Do not remove” shall be engraved
              onto the plate.
       7.9    With guidance from the alignment engineer, install the 4 bench
              marks - one on the port side of the aft deck, one on the
              starboard side of the aft deck, one on the centerline of the
              hover deck, and one on the centerline of the bow (01 level).
       7.10   Provide and install an angle foundation similar to the existing
              IMU foundation on the deck of the gyro room. The foundation
              shall be in line (fore-aft) with the existing IMU foundation.
              The center of the foundation shall be centered over frame 68.
       7.11   With guidance from the alignment engineer, mount the GFE IMU
              mounting plate, item 4.2, onto the new foundation.
       7.12   With guidance from the alignment engineer, scribe an azimuth line
              on the master reference plate located in the gyro room.
       7.13   With guidance from the alignment engineer, scribe 2 azimuth lines
              - one on the aft IMU plate and one on the forward IMU plate
              located in the gyro room.
       7.14   After fabrication and prior to installation, scribe a centerline
              on the top and bottom of the ADCP 38 khz transducer mounting
              ring.
       7.15   After fabrication and prior to installation, scribe a centerline
              on the bottom surface of the ADCP 300 khz transducer mounting
              ring.
       7.16   To aid in alignment of the ADCP 38 khz transducer mounting ring,
              fabricate 8 steel shims, 19 mm +/- .1 mm x 50mm x 50 mm and turn
              over to NAVOCEANO representative
       7.17   Upon completion of the survey, remove temporary theodolite
              foundation from the sideshell.
       7.18   Fabricate and install a steel plate with stiffeners to close the
              temporary opening in the sideshell installed in paragraph 7.3.
              Cover interior of sideshell with insulation.
       7.19   Reinstall shelving and grating in the dry stores (3-65-3) that
              were temporarily removed in paragraph 7.5.
       7.20   Paint all remaining new and disturbed surfaces to match
              surrounding surfaces.

8.0    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:   NONE ADDITIONAL




3PSC                                                              Page 278 of 280
                                            4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc




Item No. 958          GAPS Seachest Modification

1.0    ABSTRACT:
       The intent of this work item is to modify the outboard retractable
       transducer seachest. This work shall be accomplished during the second
       docking evolution.

2.0    REFERENCES/ENCLOSURES
       2.1    References: None
       2.2    Enclosures:
             2.2.1 MSC DWG NO. 163-8195254, Transducer Seachest Mods

3.0    ITEM LOCATION /DESCRIPTION:
       3.1    Transducer Well, 4-59-2

4.0    Government FURNISHED EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL/SERVICES
       4.1   All paint products shall be GFE.

5.0    NOTES:

6.0    QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:
       6.1   All workmanship, materials, parts, testing, inspections, and
             material substitutions shall be to the satisfaction of the 3psc
             port engineer or his representative

       6.2      All welding, fit-up and installations shall be iaw the
                requirements of the attending abs inspector.

7.0    STATEMENT OF WORK REQUIRED:

       7.1      Using enclosure 2.2.1, detail 4-a as guidance, crop out the
                existing 14 inch SCH 120 thru hull sea piping and install a new
                section of 14 inch SCH 80 pipe for the retractable seachest.

       7.2      Using enclosure 2.2.1, detail “sub assembly” as guidance, install
                two - ½” thick plate steel gussets on the new pipe section.

       7.3      Fabricate a new 2” thick round steel spacer sized for a 14 inch
                SCH 80 pipe flange. Provide two new 1/8” gaskets for the spacer.

       7.4      Modify the ship’s stiffener located at frame 64 in the overhead
                of the transducer well. The stiffener shall be shortened to clear
                an interference with the lifting screw mechanism.

       7.5      Modify the lifting screw mechanism bearing by fabricating and
                installing a 4 inch spacer block.

       7.6      Drill four new holes in the retractable seachest bearing brackets
                to match the new alignment.

       7.7      Surface Preparation and Painting
                7.7.1 Mechanically scale to SSPC-SP-11 requirements.
                7.7.2 Apply same coating system as applied to the underwater hull
                      region as listed in Item 902 of this specification (4 coat
                      system).



3PSC                                                                Page 279 of 280
                                          4151bacc-a738-4cc3-92ed-df4726bdb073.doc



                   A.    First coat of Amercoat 240 Black at 5 mils DFT.
                   B.    Second coat of Amercoat 240 Red at 5 mils DFT.
                   C.    First coat of ABC 3 Black at 5 mils DFT.
                   D.    Second coat of ABC 3 Red at 5 mils DFT.


       7.8   Assist sponsor representatives in installing the new transducer
             to the retractable pole.

       7.9   Reassemble the spool piece and lifting mechanism as per original.
             Upon completion, raise and lower the transducer to prove free
             operation to the port engineer and sponsor representative.

8.0    GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:   NONE ADDITIONAL




3PSC                                                              Page 280 of 280

								
To top